Copyright: Copyright (c) Twelve Tone Systems, Inc.


Edit Menu

The Edit menu commands are as follows:

Undo

Redo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Clear

Merge

Paste Special

Select All

Make Invisible

Make Visible

Disable Playback

Enable Playback


Edit>Undo

Edit/Undo

Choose this command to undo your most recent action. You can undo most Overture commands. The Undo command usually describes the reversible action, as in Undo Insertion or Undo Deletion. The Undo command allows you to examine the results of an action without committing to it.


Edit>Redo

Edit/Redo

If you choose to undo an action, the Undo command becomes a Redo command. Choose the Redo command to make the score appear as it did before you chose Undo. You can sequentially undo and redo all your actions since you started the current Overture session.


Edit>Cut

Edit/Cut…

Choose this command to delete the current selection and copy it to the Clipboard. The cut selection remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy some other selection to the Clipboard.


Edit>Copy

Edit/Copy…

Choose this command to copy the current selection to the Clipboard. Unlike the Cut command, choosing Copy keeps the current selection in the Overture score. The copied selection remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy some other selection to the Clipboard.


Edit>Paste

Edit/Paste…

Choose this command to copy the contents of the Clipboard to the insertion point in the current score. Since the Paste command puts a copy of the Clipboard’s contents into a score, you may use the Paste command repeatedly to insert multiple copies.

When you choose Edit>Paste in the Score window, Overture copies all note and note-related events from the Clipboard into the score, replacing the events currently in that time range. It does not copy chord names, meters, beat charts, tempo changes, lyrics, or measure text. This is so you can copy and paste notes between different sections of a score without disturbing the rhythmic flow of the composition. If you do want to copy and paste any of the above-mentioned attributes, use the Paste Special command (discussed in Paste Special).

If the Clipboard contains text, you can paste that text into the Lyrics window or into any text area in Overture.


Edit>Clear

Edit/Clear…

Choose this command to delete the current selection from the Overture score. The contents of the Clipboard are not altered since the Clear command does not place a copy of the selection on the Clipboard.


Edit>Merge

Edit/Merge

This command merges the symbols on the clipboard with the symbols already in the score. It does not replace the symbols like the Paste command.


Edit>Paste Special

Edit/Paste Special

Choose this command to perform a more complete and user-definable paste operation than is possible using simply the Paste command. Overture’s Paste command copies only notes, ornaments, articulations and other music-related symbols from the Clipboard into the score. Overture’s Paste Special command pastes all of that and also gives you the option of pasting meters, beat charts, tempo changes, lyrics, chord names, or measure text.


Edit>Select All

Edit/Select All

Choose this command to select all musical symbols in the active score.


Edit>Make Invisible

Edit/Make Invisible

Choose this command to hide all currently selected symbols. This command is useful for a number of functions, including:

•	Voices: You can hide rests that you might not want to appear as part of a multi-voice staff.

•	Trills: If you want the trill to playback as intended, you enter all the MIDI notes. You do not, however, want to notate all the notes in the trill—only one of the notes. Use the Make Invisible command to hide all the other trill notes in your score. Overture can also perform this function automatically by choosing Notes>Notate as>Trill. For more information, see Notate As Trill.

•	Turns: If you want a turn to playback as intended, you enter all the MIDI notes. You do not, however, want to notate all the notes in the turn—only one of the notes. Use the Make Invisible command to hide all the other turn notes in your score. You can also cause Overture to perform this function automatically by choosing Notes>Notate as>Turn. For more information, see Notate As Turn.

You can view all the invisible symbols in your score by checking the Options>Show>Invisibles option. Also, any invisible symbols can be made visible by selecting the desired symbols and choosing Edit>Make Visible.

Editing operations affect invisible notation symbols exactly as they do visible symbols. For example, when you drag to select multiple symbols (or use double-click or shift-click selection methods), Overture selects all invisible symbols as well as all visible ones. Copy, cut, paste, and edit invisible symbols exactly as if they were visible.


Edit>Make Visible

Edit/Make Visible

Choose this command to make visible all the currently selected invisible symbols. For more information, see the previous section.


Edit>Disable Playback

Edit/Disable Playback

Choose this command to disable playback for selected symbols. To enable playback, select the symbol and choose the Enable Playback command.


Edit>Enable Playback

Edit/Enable Playback

Choose this command to enable playback for selected symbols. To disable playback, select the symbol and choose the Disable Playback command.


Overture Menus

Overture has numerous menus under which it groups related commands and options. The following sections present a brief overview of Overture’s different menus.

File Menu

Use the File menu commands to save, create, open, export, and print the various scores you create with Overture.

Edit Menu

Use the Edit menu commands to cut/copy/paste symbols, lyrics, MIDI data, or other elements of an Overture score. Edit commands use a Clipboard concept common to most Windows programs. Overture uses both an internal Clipboard and the Windows Clipboard depending on the type of data.

Score Menu

Use the Score menu commands to perform score-related tasks like staff location and appearance; system groupings; and page setup.

Measures Menu

Use the Measures menu commands to perform measure-related tasks like inserting and deleting measures; wrapping measures; setting key, meter and tempo; and justifying symbols in a measure.

Notes Menu

Use the Notes menu commands to perform many common Overture tasks like modifying notes; transposing; beaming; grouping; and converting between traditional notation and raw MIDI data.

Options Menu

Use the Options menu to set numerous Overture operating, editing, and display options like auto beaming and positioning, metronome values, and recording choices.

Windows Menu

Use the Windows menu commands to open (or make active) any Overture window.

Font/Size/Style

A standard font toolbar appears when you edit text. Use it to specify font, font size, and font style.

Help Menu

Use the Help menu to see help available for Overture.


File Menu

The File menu commands are as follows:

New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Revert

Edit Library

Allotment Table

Chord Symbols

Drum Map

Expressions Library

Guitar Frames Library

Instruments Library

Load Library

Import

Export

Extract Parts

Print Preview

Page Setup

Print

Recently Opened Files

Exit


File>New

File/New

Choose this command to open a new, untitled Overture score.

When you choose the New command, a New Score dialog appears.  Use the dialog to to enter your new score attributes.

You can have as many open Overture scores as memory allows. To switch between open Overture scores, select the appropriate score from the Windows menu.

If you want to create a new score from an existing score template, use the Open command.


New Score Dialog

Choose this command to open a new, untitled Overture score.

When you choose the new command, a New Score dialog box appears. Use the dialog to enter your new score attributes.

There are three areas in the New Score dialog box. These are described below:

•	Score Type. Use this area to choose the type of instruments/tracks for your score. You may choose a single instrument from the Instruments Library, or Piano, or Piano and Voice, or Guitar and Tablature, or a template from the Templates folder.

•	Title Page. Use this area to enter title page text. You may add more text, footers, and headers later by choosing Score>Title Page.

•	First Measure. Use this area to enter the score’s initial settings such as Time Signature, Key Signature, etc..

To prevent this dialog from appearing at startup, disable the check box labeled Open this dialog at startup at the bottom of the dialog.


File>Open

File/Open

Use this command to open a saved Overture score. When you choose the Open command, a standard Open dialog box appears. Use the Open dialog box to navigate through your various volumes and folders to locate the desired file. Click the file to select it, then click the Open button. The Open dialog box disappears and the selected Overture score opens.

You can have as many open Overture scores as memory allows. To switch between open Overture scores, select the appropriate score from the Windows menu.

Opening a Score Template

Overture ships with numerous score templates. A score template contains staff and page setups for particular types of music. To open a score template:

1.	Choose File>Open.

Overture displays a standard Open dialog box.

2.	Use the dialog box to find the template you wish to open.

3.	Click the Open button.

4.	Choose File>Save As.

Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box.

5.	Create a new name for the file and save it.

Alternatively, you can open a score template by double-clicking its icon. When you do this, Overture asks you to name the new file.


File>Close

File/Close

Use this command to close the active window. There are two types of windows:

•	The Score window (the window containing the actual score)

•	The support windows (such as the Tracks, Lyrics, and Graphic windows)

Choosing the Close command is the same as clicking the active window’s Close box.

Closing a Score Window

If a Score window is active when you choose the Close command, that Overture file closes. If there are any open support windows, they remain open. If you have made any unsaved changes to an Overture score, Overture asks you if you want to save the changes before closing the score.

The contents of any open support windows depend on whether or not there are any other open Overture scores:

•	If, when you close a Score window, you have no other open Score windows, the open support windows will go blank. This is because all data is removed from a support window when you close a Score window.  The support windows stay open for use with other Overture scores.

•	If, when you close a Score window, you have other open Score windows, the open support windows fill with data from the frontmost Score window.

Closing a Support Window

If a support window is active when you choose the Close command, then that window closes and its contents are unaffected.


File>Save

File/Save

Use this command to save the active Overture score in the same folder you last saved it in. This command always saves Overture scores in the Overture file format. If you want to save a score using a different format, use the Export command.

If you choose the Save command for a score that has never before been saved, Overture prompts you to name and file the score using the standard Save As dialog box. We discuss the Save As dialog box below.


File>Save As

File/Save As

Choose this command to either save an existing score under a new name, or save a new score. When you choose the Save As command, Overture produces a standard Save As dialog box.

Type the desired name into the text field and use the pop-up menu and scroll list to select a storage location. Click the Save button to save the file.


File>Revert

File/Revert

Choose this command to cancel any changes you have made to the active Overture score since the last time you saved it and open the most recently saved version.


File>Edit Library>Drum Map

File Edit Library /Drum Map

Choose this command to modify Drum Maps and create new ones. When you choose File>Edit Library>Drum Map, Overture opens the Drum Map dialog box.

You can move the Drum Map dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The dialog box displays the name of the active Drum Map library just underneath the title bar.

You can create and store as many Drum Map libraries as you wish, but Overture can only refer to one Drum Map at a time. That one map is called the current Drum Map and is defined in the Preferences dialog box. You can load a different Drum Map by choosing File>Load Library. See Load Library for more information.

About the Drum Map Dialog Box

The Drum Map dialog box contains a simple scrolling chart. The chart has 128 rows (one for each MIDI note) and it has columns for editing each note’s head, staff position and name. Obviously, you most commonly use Drum Maps to assign drum names to MIDI notes, but you can also create Drum Maps to use with sound effects, foley work, and the like.

Tracks use Drum Maps to create percussion notation. To learn to use Drum Maps in a track, see Percussive Tracks.

0	There are four columns in the Drum Map dialog box. These are:

•	Pitch. This column shows each of the 128 MIDI pitches to which you assign a name, head and staff position. Click those pitches you want included in a default percussive track and Overture places a small triangle next to them. Since a percussive track can record, play and notate up to sixteen different drums, you can select up to sixteen pitches to include in the default percussive track. For more information about percussive tracks, see Percussive Tracks.

•	Head. Press and hold the note icon to open a pop-up menu. From the menu, select the notehead you want to use for the MIDI note.

•	Position. Press and hold the small staff icon to open a larger, editable staff. Drag the cursor up and down to change the staff position on which Overture displays the MIDI note.

•	Name. Use this column to type the name of the sound that’s assigned to each MIDI note.

The Drum Map dialog box also contains four buttons. These are:

•	Save button. Click this button to save changes to the file immediately. This lets you

-	know the state of your libraries as you edit them without having to remember at the end of the Overture session which changes you’d like to keep

-	save the changes to the file but press Cancel to restore your working copy to the state it was in before the current editing

-	press the OK button without pressing Save to use the current state of the library for the duration of the Overture session without saving the changes to the file

•	Save As button. Click this button to save the edited Drum Map to disk. When you click this button, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to name the new Drum Map and to tell Overture where to save it.

•	Cancel button. Click this button to close the Drum Map dialog box and restore the Drum Map to its original state. Clicking this button does not save or apply any of your changes to the current Drum Map.

•	OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. When you click this button, Overture uses the modified Drum Map. Clicking the OK button does not save the new Drum Map to disk—it only affects the Drum Map that’s loaded into RAM. If, when you quit the program, your Drum Map has unsaved changes, Overture does one of two things:

-	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture automatically saves the changes to disk upon quitting the program.

-	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is not checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture asks if you want to save the changes to disk before quitting the program.

Using the Drum Map Dialog Box

Assume, for this example, that your drum machine plays a kick drum on C1, a snare on D1, and low, mid and high toms on G1, A1, and C2 respectively. Also, assume you want Overture to display all drum notes with an X head and that you want the kick drum assigned to the lowest space, the snare in the next space up, the low tom in the space above that, the mid tom in the top space, and the high tom in the space above the top line.

To create this Drum Map:

1.	Choose File>Edit Library>Drum Map.

Overture opens the Drum Map dialog box. This dialog box shows all the assignments for the current Drum Map. If you want to edit a different Drum Map, choose File>Load Library and select a different Drum Map (see Load Library for more information).

2.	Use the scroll bar to find MIDI note C1.

3.	Press and hold the note in the Head column next to C1 and select the X head from the pop-up menu.

This assigns the X head to C1.

4.	In the Position column, drag the C1 note’s staff position to the lowest space.

5.	In the Name column, type Kick Drum.

Overture assigns the name Kick Drum to MIDI note C1.

6.	Assign MIDI note D1 to the snare as shown below.

7.	Assign the three toms as shown in the Drum Map dialog box below.

8.	Click the Save As button.

Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box.

9.	Name and save your new Drum Map.

You’ve now created a simple Drum Map containing a kick, snare and three toms. To see how to use a Drum Map in a score, see Percussive Tracks.


File>Edit Library>Chord Symbols

File Edit Library /Chord Symbols

Choose this command to modify the current Chord library or to create new Chord libraries. When you choose this command, Overture opens the Chord Library dialog box for the current library.

You can move the Chord Library dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The dialog box displays the name of the active Chord library just underneath the title bar.

The Chord Library dialog box consists of four separate areas. We describe these areas beginning with Suffix Element Area.

About Chord Libraries

You can create and store as many Chord libraries as you wish, but Overture can only refer to one Chord library at a time. That one library is called the current Chord library, and you define it in the Preferences dialog box. You can load a different Chord library by choosing File>Load Library (see Load Library for more information).

Why Chord Libraries Exist

Overture uses the current Chord library to name chord suffixes in the Score window. There are two ways that Overture uses this library:

•	Chords window: All suffixes stored in this library appear in the Chords window. For more information about the Chords window, see Chapter 31, “Chords Window.”

•	MIDI Chord Entry: Overture uses this library when you enter chords in step-entry mode using a MIDI keyboard. Overture searches the library for a matching note pattern and, if it finds one, enters a chord of the appropriate root in the Score window. For more information about step-entering chords with MIDI input, see Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard.

What Chord Libraries Contain

Chord libraries contain only chord suffixes and the note patterns assigned to them—they do not store information about the actual roots. Therefore, the bottom of the Chord Library dialog box displays any chord you add to the library as having a root of C (regardless of the root you used to enter and edit the chord). For example, the library might store the pattern first + minor third + fifth with the suffix min. For simplicity, the Chord Library dialog box displays this suffix as C min and shows that it contains the notes C, Eb, and G.

When you enter a chord name into the Score window, Overture gets the suffix information from the current Chord library. It gets the root either from the Root buttons in the Chords window or by analyzing the pattern played on a MIDI keyboard (as discussed in About Chord Recognition).

For example, if you want to enter an F mi chord name into the score window, either:

•	Use the Chords window to select a C mi symbol. Then click the F root button. Then click the Score window to insert the chord name (as described in Chapter 31, “Chords Window”).

Or

•	Step-enter an F mi chord from a MIDI keyboard. Overture recognizes the minor chord pattern from the Chord library and applies the correct root name, F, by analyzing the MIDI input (as described in “Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard).

The Chord library also contains information about the fonts, sizes, and styles used by chord names in an Overture score. When you change the Chord library that an Overture score references, the appearance of any existing chords in the score changes to that defined by the new library.

About the Chord Library Dialog Box

The Chord Library dialog box consists of four separate areas:

•	Suffix element area

•	Chord suffix editing

•	Symbol viewing area

•	File buttons

Suffix Element Area

This area of the Chord Library dialog box contains all the elements you can use to name a chord suffix.

Place chord suffix elements in the Chord Suffix editing area (described below) either by double-clicking elements or by dragging them into the Chord Suffix display.

Some elements (such as majors, minors, diminished, and augmented chords) have numerous acceptable spellings. To open a pop-up menu of alternate spellings for a suffix element, Alt-click the element. The alternate spelling you select applies every time you use that element in the future.

To create a symbol not in the Suffix element area, scroll to the end of the list and double-click a blank space. Overture opens the standard Choose Symbol dialog box. Choose the font and symbol you want.

To learn how the Suffix element area works in conjunction with other elements in the Chord Library dialog box, see Editing Chord Libraries.

Chord Suffix Editing Area

Use the Chord Library dialog box to assemble and edit chord suffixes. It contains the following elements:

The Chord Suffix Editing Area consists of the following elements:

•	Chord Suffix display. Use this to edit a chord suffix. You can click any suffix element to select it and you can drag any suffix element to reposition it. You can nudge a symbol using the arrow keys and, if you Alt-nudge, all elements after the nudged element move the same amount.

•	Show Axis checkbox. Check this to show the vertical and horizontal axis lines in the Chord Suffix display. Uncheck this box to hide the axis lines.

•	Font button. Click this to set the font used for the currently selected suffix element(s). Clicking this button opens the font dialog box discussed in Font Button. This is different from both the Root Font and the Accidental Font buttons in the Symbol viewing area—Overture allows roots, suffixes, and accidentals all to have completely different fonts. Clicking the Replace button saves this font together with the chord suffix

If you Alt-click the Font button, Overture changes the font for all suffixes in the library, not just the selected suffix.

•	Insert button. Click this to insert the suffix shown in the Chord Suffix display into the Symbol viewing area (discussed in “Symbol Viewing Area” below) and into the Chord library itself. Overture inserts the suffix immediately to the left of the highlighted suffix in the library.

•	Replace button. Click this to replace the highlighted suffix in the Symbol Viewing Area (discussed in “Symbol Viewing Area” below) with the suffix shown in the Chord Suffix display.

•	Root display. This shows the root of the chord that you select or play. If you play a chord on a MIDI keyboard, the Root display shows the root of the chord you played. If you select a chord suffix from the Symbol Viewing Area (as discussed in the following section), the Root display shows C, since all symbols stored in the Chord Symbol library are displayed with a root of C.

•	Trash. You can remove suffix elements from the Chord Suffix Editing Area by dragging them to the trash. Similarly, you can remove chord symbols from the Symbol viewing area by dragging them into the trash. We describe the Symbol viewing area in “Symbol Viewing Area” below.

To learn how the Chord Suffix editing area works in conjunction with other elements in the Chord Library dialog box, see Editing Chord Libraries.

Symbol Viewing Area

This area shows all the suffixes in the current Chord library along with a keyboard representation of the actual notes in each chord symbol (generally based on a root of C).

This area consists of numerous elements. Specifically:

•	Miniature Keyboard display. Use this to enter or view the notes in a chord symbol. All displayed chord symbols are based on the root selected in the Root pop-up menu. There are two ways to enter the notes in contained in a chord symbol:

−	Manually. On the miniature keyboard, click each key that makes up the chord. If you enter a chord using a root other than C, Overture automatically transposes it to the root of C when you add it to the Chord library.

−	From a MIDI Controller. Play a chord on a MIDI controller. Overture automatically enters the notes on the miniature keyboard display and selects the Root based on the lowest note played. You can change this root if you want the chord named some other way, for example with an added bass note as discussed in “Example 2: Creating a Chord Symbol with an Alternate Bass.”

The C with the box around it indicates middle C on the miniature keyboard.

Overture uses the notes shown in the miniature keyboard display to recognize chords that you play on a MIDI keyboard. For more information, see Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard.

•	Symbol Library. Use this scrolling display to select a chord symbol. When you select a symbol, the miniature keyboard displays the notes in the chord. Clicking the Replace button in the Chord Suffix editing area replaces the selected chord symbol with whatever is in the Chord Suffix display (and normalizes it to the root of C). Clicking the Insert button in the Chord Suffix editing area inserts whatever is in the Chord Suffix display between the selected chord symbol and the symbol immediately to its left. The Chord Library can contain an unlimited number of chord symbols. You can delete chord symbols by dragging them to the trash icon in this dialog box.

•	Root Font button. Click this button to set the font for the chord symbol’s root. Clicking this button opens the Font dialog box discussed in Font Button. This is different from both the Font button in the Chord Suffix Editing Area and the Accidental Font button—Overture allows roots, suffixes, and accidentals all to have completely different fonts.

•	Accidental Font button. Click this button to set the font for any accidental that appears in a chord symbol. Clicking this button opens the Font dialog box discussed in Font Button. This is different from both the Font button in the Chord Suffix editing area and the Root Font button—Overture allows roots, suffixes, and accidentals all to have completely different fonts.

•	Upper Root pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to change the note that Overture defines as the root of a chord that you play into the library. Normally you won’t need to change the root, but if you want to add a chord symbol with an alternate bass to the library, you’ll need to use this pop-up menu as discussed in “Example 2: Creating a Chord Symbol with an Alternate Bass.”

To learn how the Symbol viewing area works in conjunction with other elements in the Chord library dialog box, see “Editing Chord Symbol Libraries” below.

File Buttons

This area contains the following buttons:

•	Clear All button. Click this button to clear all chord symbols from the existing library. Use this when you want to create a Chord Symbol library from scratch. Generally, you’ll find it easier to modify an existing library than to create a new one.

•	Save button. Click this button to save changes to the file immediately. This lets you:

−	Know the state of your libraries as you edit them without having to remember at the end of the Overture session which changes you’d like to keep.

−	Save the changes to the file but press Cancel to restore your working copy to the state it was in before the current editing.

−	Press the OK button without pressing Save to use the current state of the library for the duration of the Overture session without saving the changes to the file. This button does not save changes to the chord suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements.

•	Save As button. Click this button to save the edited Chord library to disk. When you click this button, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to name the new library and to tell Overture where to save it. This button does not save changes to the chord suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements.

•	Cancel button. Click this button to close the Chord library dialog box and restore the Chord Library to its original state. Clicking this button does not save or apply any of your changes to the current Chord library.

•	OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. When you click this button, Overture uses the modified Chord library. Clicking the OK button does not save the new Chord library to disk—it only affects the Chord library that’s loaded into RAM. If, when you quit the program, your Chord library has unsaved changes, Overture performs one of two actions:

−	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is checked in the Preferences dialog box, Overture automatically saves the changes to disk upon quitting the program.

−	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is not checked in the Preferences dialog box, Overture asks if you want to save the changes to disk before quitting the program.

This button does not save changes to the chord suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements.


File>Edit Library>Guitar Frames

File Edit Library /Guitar frames

Choose this command to modify the current Guitar Frames library or to create new Guitar Frames libraries. When you choose this command, Overture opens the Guitar Frame Library dialog box for the current library.

You can move the Guitar Frames Library dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The dialog box displays the name of the active Guitar Frames library just underneath the title bar.

About Guitar Frames Libraries

You can create and store as many Guitar Frames libraries as you wish, but Overture can only refer to one Guitar Frames library at a time. That one library is called the current Guitar Frame library, and you define it in the Preferences dialog box. You can load a different Guitar Frame library by choosing File>Load Library (see Load Library for more information).

What Guitar Frames Libraries Contain

Guitar Frames libraries contain the root, bass, suffix, and tuning for each frame, and the fingering pattern assigned to them.

When you enter a guitar frame into the Score window, Overture gets the suffix information from the current Guitar Frames library. You choose the root, bass, suffix, and tuning in the Chords window.

For example, if you want to enter an F mi chord name into the score window, either:

Open the Chord window and switch to Guitar Frames (if needed) using the check box. Choose F from the root menu and minor from the Suffix menu. Click on the desired fingering and then click the Score window to insert the guitar frame.

The Guitar Frames library also contains information about the fonts, sizes, and styles used by Guitar Frames names in an Overture score. When you change the Guitar Frames library that an Overture score references, the appearance of any existing Guitar Frames in the score changes to that defined by the new library.

About the Guitar Frames Library Dialog Box

The Guitar Frames Library dialog box consists of five separate areas:

•	Chord Description area

•	Default Suffix Text area

•	Frame  editing area

•	Frame viewing area

•	File buttons

Chord Description Area

Use this area to choose the type of chord you wish to edit.

To place guitar frame in the Frame Editing Area (described below), set the Root, Suffix, Bass, and Tuning popup menus to the desired guitar frame. This displays the different fingerings for this chord. Now click on a fingering to place it into the Frame Viewing Area

Default Suffix Text Area

Use this area to change the spellings for suffix names. To change a spelling click on the menu button and choose a different spelling.

Frame  Editing Area

Use this area to edit the guitar frame.

The enter a dot on a string, click on the string and fret. Click above the frets to place a symbol for open or muted string. Multiple clicks toggle between open, muted, and no symbol.

Shift click two dots to enter a barre between them.

To change starting fret, use the Fret popup menu.

Type the suffix name in the given area. You may type anything you wish for a name. Overture displays non-alpha numeric characters as a superscript. For Example: A C9 chord will have the 9 displayed in a slightly smaller font and raised

Frame Viewing Area

Use this area to choose the guitar frame to edit.

Click on the fingering you wish to edit. The current frame being editited will be shown in red. You may also reposition the frames by clicking and dragging them to a new position. To delete a frame, drag it to the Trash Can

File Buttons

This area contains the following buttons:

•	Font button. Click this button to choose the default font for the suffix names.

•	Insert button. Click this button to insert the frame in the edit area into the viewing area and into the current Guitar Frames library.

•	Replace button. Click this button to replace the selected frame in the viewing area with the frame in the editing area.

•	Save button. Click this button to save changes to the file immediately. This lets you:

-	Know the state of your libraries as you edit them without having to remember at the end of the Overture session which changes you’d like to keep.

-	Save the changes to the file but press Cancel to restore your working copy to the state it was in before the current editing.

-	Press the OK button without pressing Save to use the current state of the library for the duration of the Overture session without saving the changes to the file. This button does not save changes to the guitar frames suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements

•	Save As button. Click this button to save the edited Guitar Frames library to disk. When you click this button, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to name the new library and to tell Overture where to save it. This button does not save changes to the guitar frame suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements.

•	OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. When you click this button, Overture uses the modified Guitar Frames library. Clicking the OK button does not save the new Guitar Frames library to disk—it only affects the Guitar Frames library that’s loaded into RAM. If, when you quit the program, your Guitar Frames library has unsaved changes, Overture performs one of two actions:

-	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is checked in the Preferences dialog box, Overture automatically saves the changes to disk upon quitting the program.

-	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is not checked in the Preferences dialog box, Overture asks if you want to save the changes to disk before quitting the program.

This button does not save changes to the guitar frames suffix or its font. Use the Replace button to save these elements.

•	Cancel button. Click this button to close the Guitar Frames library dialog box and restore the Guitar Frames Library to its original state. Clicking this button does not save or apply any of your changes to the current Guitar frames library.


File>Edit Library>Allotment Table

File/Edit Library/Allotment Table

Choose this command to modify Allotment Tables and create new ones. When you choose File>Edit Library>Allotment Table, Overture opens the Allotment Table dialog box.

You can move the Allotment Table dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The dialog box displays the name of the active Allotment Table just underneath the title bar.

About the Allotment Table Dialog Box

The Allotment Table dialog box contains a simple editing grid with basic note values displayed in columns and various durations displayed in rows. Each cell in the table contains a numerical that represents the number of spaces assigned to each type of note. A space is equal to the distance between two staff lines. If you decrease the number of spaces assigned to a particular type of note, that note appears closer to other notes. If you increase the number of spaces assigned to a particular note, that note appears farther from other notes.

The Allotment Table dialog box also contains three buttons. These are:

•	Save As button. Click this button to save the edited Allotment Table to disk. When you click this button, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to name the new Allotment Table and to tell Overture where to save it.

•	Cancel button. Click this button to close the Allotment Table dialog box and restore the Allotment Table to its original state. Clicking this button does not save or apply any of your changes to the current Allotment Table.

•	OK button. Click this button to activate your changes. When you click this button, Overture uses the modified Allotment Table. Clicking the OK button does not save the new Allotment Table to disk—it only affects the Allotment Table that’s loaded into RAM. If, when you quit the program, your Allotment Table has unsaved changes, Overture performs one of two actions:

−	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture automatically saves the changes to disk upon quitting the program.

−	If the Auto Save Changed Libraries option is not checked in the Preferences dialog, Overture asks if you want to save the changes to disk before quitting the program.

Overture uses the current Allotment Table in a number of ways:

•	It automatically positions any notes entered either by MIDI input or by importing MIDI files according to the Beat Chart derived from the current Allotment Table.

•	If you check Options>Auto Position, it places any notes entered by mouse according to the Beat Chart derived from the current Allotment Table.

•	If you choose Measures>Justify, it aligns any notes in the active measure according to the Beat Chart derived from the current Allotment Table.

Using the Allotment Table Dialog Box

Assume, for this example, that you want to create an Allotment Table that minimizes the spacing differences between eighth notes, sixteenth notes and thirty second notes. To do so, change the Allotment Table so that eighth notes are given less space and thirty second notes are given more.

0	To create this Allotment Table:

1.	Choose File>Edit Library>Allotment Table.

Overture opens the Allotment Table dialog box. This dialog box shows all the assignments for the current Allotment Table. If you want to edit a different Allotment Table, choose File>Load Library and select a different Allotment Table. See Load Library for more information.

2.	Use the numericals in the eighth note column to decrease the number of spaces allotted to all versions of eighth notes.

0	3.	Use the numericals in the thirty-second note column to increase the number of spaces allotted to all versions of thirty-second notes.

1	4.	Click the Save As button.

Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box.

5.	Name and save your new Allotment Table in the Libraries folder.

You’ve now created a new Allotment Table that minimizes the spacing differences between eighth, sixteenth, and thirty-second notes. When you justify a measure, Overture spaces notes using the Beat Chart derived from the new Allotment Table.

0	There is now less of a space difference between eighth notes and sixteenth notes in the bottom music sample than in the top.


File>Edit Library>Instruments Library

File Edit Library /Instruments Library

Choose File>Edit Library>Instruments Library to change instruments and create new ones. Overture opens the Instruments library dialog box.

0	The Instruments library lets you specify and store important information about instruments. Each instrument’s definition includes: name, abbreviation, clef, device, patch, output transposition, pitch range, transposed clef, transposed steps, and number of voices.

1	Assigning an instrument to a track automatically enters the instrument’s information into the track. There is, however, no dynamic link between a track that has been assigned an instrument and the Instrument library that contains that instrument. Editing an instrument in the Instruments library has no effect on tracks that have already been assigned that instrument. Once the track has been assigned an instrument, the instrument’s attributes belong to that track. The track’s attributes are still editable in the Setup Track dialog box, the Tracks Window, or the Score Window.

2	Assigning instruments to tracks is a much faster, more efficient way to use Overture than individually entering each attribute. We recommend using the Instruments library as much as possible to configure instruments; override the assignments in the track only when necessary.

Orchestral and GM Instruments

GenieSoft provides two libraries: Orchestral Instruments and GM Instruments. Both libraries reside in the Libraries folder located in the same folder as the Overture application.

0	Orchestral Instruments contains a list of the most commonly used orchestral instruments and loads as the default Instruments library when you first launch Overture. Although the name, abbreviation, clef, pitch range, number of voices, and transposed steps attributes of each instrument are accurately defined, you need to select the devices and patches to use for your MIDI setup.

1	GM Instruments contains a complete list of General MIDI instruments. Since these instruments are designed to work with General MIDI devices, the patches are accurately specified. You need to select the device they’ll play through in your MIDI setup, however.

2	You can specify the Instruments library to load when starting Overture by selecting the desired library from the Instruments pop-up menu in Libraries Preferences. The Instruments pop-up menu contains all Instruments libraries in the Libraries folder. This menu defaults to Orchestral Instruments until you select another library.

Editing the Instruments Library

This section discusses how to edit, save, and name the currently loaded Instruments library.

0	It’s a good idea to make copies of the GM and Orchestral Instruments libraries. Making backups prevents any mistakes from overwriting these important starting libraries.

1	You can derive your own libraries from those GenieSoft provides or create your own from blank entries. Although GM Instruments is intended for General MIDI devices, you can select patches different from those predefined, or devices that don’t conform to General MIDI. You can add non-orchestral instruments to Orchestral Instruments.

2	Since most composers use a smaller set of instruments than are contained in the libraries we provide, it is not necessary to define all instruments in the library. You can either delete instruments you don’t need or just define the instruments you’d like to use and ignore the others. Once they have defined the relevant instruments, most composers do not need to make frequent changes to the Instruments library.

3	To begin editing the currently loaded Instruments library, choose File>Edit Library>Instruments. This opens either:

•	the Instruments library that was loaded when Overture started;

Or

•	the Instruments library that was last loaded by choosing File>Load Library.

Choosing File>Load Library is the only way to edit and use a library different from the currently loaded library.

The OK and Cancel Buttons

After you edit the library and press the OK button, Overture uses any changes made to that library until you:

•	edit the library again (and press OK)

•	load a different library

•	quit and re-start the program

Pressing the OK button after editing the library saves those changes while you use that library (think of it as a working copy) without saving them permanently in the library file. This allows you to experiment with different settings without committing them to the file.

0	If you select the Auto Save Libraries option in Libraries Preferences, however, Overture saves the changes in the current library file every time you click the OK button. This is a shortcut method for those users who prefer to keep the working copy and the library file in sync with each other without the extra step of clicking the Save button. If you press Cancel instead of OK, Overture saves changes to neither the working library nor the library file.

Save

Pressing the Save button saves any changes you make in the current library to the current library’s file name. Pressing the Save button permanently changes the library file but doesn’t save the changes to the working library until you press the OK button.

0	You can edit the library, press Save to store the changes in the library file, and then press Cancel to avoid working with the changes.

Save As

Pressing Save As opens the standard Save As dialog box. Locate the Libraries folder (in the folder that contains Overture) and assign the library a new name. The name appears in the upper left of the library window. If you’d like to use the current changes to this library, press OK. If you are merely making a copy of the library under a different name and would like to return to the previous library’s state before editing, press Cancel.

0	It’s important to understand that using Save As does not load that library file as the current Instruments library. The next time you choose File>Edit Library>Instruments, you’ll be editing the currently loaded library, not the file you named when you used the Save As button. The only way to change the Instruments library while Overture is running is by choosing File>Load Library to load a different library.

Insert and Delete

You enable the Insert and Delete buttons only when you select an instrument by clicking in the column with the arrows at the far left of the library.

0	Pressing Insert copies the selected instrument’s attributes to a new, un-named entry above the selected instrument. It’s helpful to select an instrument whose attributes are similar to the instrument you’d like to create. Then you can edit those fields in the new instrument that differ from those in the original instrument.

1	Pressing Delete removes the selected instrument from the library.

Clear

Pressing the Clear button creates a new library with unspecified fields. This is the easiest way to create a new library from scratch.

The Instruments Library Attributes

This section discusses each instrument attribute in the Instruments library.

Instrument Section

Name and Abbreviation

You can name and abbreviate each instrument. Selecting Show Name in the Setup Track dialog box displays the instrument’s name in the left margin of the first system in the Score Window. Selecting Show Abbreviation in the Setup Track dialog box displays the instrument’s abbreviation in the left margin for systems subsequent to the first system in the Score Window.

GM #

When you open an Overture file in a MIDI setup different from the one used to create the file, the devices assigned to tracks may differ. This commonly occurs when you exchange Overture files with a friend or co-composer. Overture uses the number specified in the GM # field of the Instruments library in which the file was created to search the Instruments library in the new environment for an instrument that uses the same GM #. If it finds a match, Overture uses the device and patch from that instrument if the current MIDI Setup knows that device. The GM# links MIDI devices in different setups; it is not the actual patch used for the track.

0	If Overture doesn’t find a match, it uses the device you select in the General Preferences option Remap Unknown Devices To. You still need to specify the patch for that track for the new device to play the correct sound. If you don’t select Remap Unknown Devices To, Overture warns you that it will not remap the device(s) and that any tracks using them will not play. Use the Tracks Window to specify devices and patches for these tracks.

Clef

Tracks you assign to this instrument use the clef you select.

Drum Section

When first launched, Overture automatically loads a default General MIDI Drum Map. See Drum Map for more information on Drum Map libraries.

0	GenieSoft would like to thank Dr. Norman Weinberg for giving us a standard. His article “Guidelines for Drumset Notation” in Percussive Notes, June 1994 was very useful. We have made our best effort to match the notehead and staff positions of the various drum notes to his suggestions. Because of the vast numbers of drums, we occasionally had to make slightly different choices.

1	Drum Maps specify names and clef positions for drum notes. You can store multiple Drums Maps in the Libraries folder but only one Drum Map is active at a time. Select a different Drum Map by choosing File>Load Library and select the new Drum Map from the standard File dialog box that appears. There are sixteen pitches in each Drum map, each of which is assigned a position on the percussive clef.

Map

Click the Map column to open the current Drum Map. Clicking OK saves the changes made to that Drum Map, not to the currently active Drum Map’s file. A dot to the left of the Map field (in the Dot field) shows that the pitches for tracks using that instrument are designated by the notes and clef positions you specify in that instrument’s Drum Map. You can edit a different Drum Map for each instrument but each instrument begins with the current Drum Map.

0	Click the dot in the Dot field to remove the dot and use conventional note pitches instead of the Drum Map. Click the Dot field when there is no dot to activate the current Drum Map for that instrument.

Output Section

Device/Patch

Set the device and patch for the instrument with the Device and Patch pop-up menus. Alt-clicking to select a device sets all instruments in the library below that device to the selected device.

0	Think carefully about how you allocate the devices in your MIDI setup to instruments. Consider how many MIDI channels, notes, and multi-timbral parts each device can play before assigning the same device to instruments that play simultaneously. Sometimes you may have to use a device that doesn’t have the best sounding patch in order to play all the tracks with the correct instrumentation. See Resolving Device Conflicts for a detailed discussion about assigning devices in the Instruments library.

Trans

Set the output transposition in the Trans numerical field. This field affects playback only, not the appearance of notes in the Graphic or Score Windows.

Range Section

Low and High

The Low and High fields specify the lowest and highest notes, respectively, in the instrument’s pitch range.

Voices

The Voices field specifies the number of voices the instrument is capable of generating. For example, an alto sax generates only a single voice but a guitar can generate up to four voices.

Transpose Section

Clef

The Clef field shows the clef displayed in the track if you select Options>Show>Tracks Transposed.

Steps

The Steps field shows the instrument’s transposition. You can edit this field, but each transposing instrument in Overture’s libraries already has the correct transposition.

0	This is different from the Output Trans field that transposes the output for playback only.

Rearranging Instruments in the Library

You can move the instruments around the library by dragging in the far left field with the up and down arrows at the top of the column. Since the instruments in GM and Orchestral Instruments libraries are ordered alphabetically, you may want to group instruments in other ways. For example, see Resolving Device Conflicts to learn how grouping instruments by device lets you assign devices to groups of instruments in one step.

The Instruments Library and the Tracks Window

Although you can explicitly set the Track, Voices, Device, Patch, and Trans fields, it is easier to set them automatically by selecting an instrument that encapsulates these attributes. Control-clicking the Device field opens a pop-up menu with the instruments in the current Instruments library. The normal pop-up menu displays the devices known to the current MIDI setup. When you select an instrument, Overture assigns all the instrument’s attributes to the track. This includes the attributes displayed in the Setup Track dialog box but not in the Tracks window, namely clef, pitch, range, steps transposed, and GM#.

0	The instrument’s name appears in the Track field. The Trans field of the Tracks window displays the Output Trans attribute from the instrument, not the Steps attribute from the Transpose section.

Resolving Device Conflicts

To use the Device field to select instruments you must completely define the instruments in the Instruments library. This is not hard. If you are using the Orchestral or GM Instruments libraries, you must systematically configure only the Device and Patch fields in order to view and play tracks correctly.

0	Give careful thought to which devices have the best patches to play specific sounds. It’s also important to think about which instruments you most commonly use in a particular type of composition. For example, if a piece uses horns, piano, drums, bass, and guitar all mapped to a single device, you may run out of MIDI channels, multi-timbral parts, or notes on that device. Overture cannot help you in resolving these issues.

1	As you select patches and devices for the many instruments in the library, it is difficult to anticipate how and when those instruments will be used. For example, consider the following situation:

If	you assign Proteus/2-1 and Oboe as the device and patch to an oboe instrument
and	you assign Proteus/2-1 and Harp as the device and patch to a harp instrument
then	what happens if you assign the harp and oboe to tracks that play simultaneously?
Both tracks request different patches on the same device. Overture solves this problem automatically by consulting your current MIDI setup to see which other MIDI channels on that device are enabled to receive MIDI data. Overture resolves the conflict by assigning the next available MIDI channel to the second of the two tracks. For example, if the Proteus/2 from the previous example were enabled to receive on channels 1-8, Overture would assign Proteus/2-2 for track 2.

9	This automatic device mapping brings up another interesting possibility: since Overture solves device conflicts, why go to the trouble of specifying the precise MIDI channel for each device for every instrument?

10	The answer is that you don’t have to specify the precise MIDI channel. You can simply select the device’s first enabled channel for an instrument. As long as you don’t assign a single device for too many instruments that play simultaneously, you really don’t have to worry about which MIDI channels Overture uses, as long as the correct patch plays on the selected device.

11	This automatic device mapping has an interesting implication for grouping instruments in the library. If you group instruments in your library based on the device they play through, rather than alphabetically, you can Alt-click the Devices pop-up menu when selecting the device for the first instrument in the group to assign that device to all instruments below that instrument.

12	By starting at the top of the library and moving down, you can assign the first channel of the device for that group to the first instrument in the group. Then move on to the first instrument of the next group and perform the same operation. Each succeeding assignment overrides the preceding assignment for the instruments below the instrument you Alt-click. Overture then assigns specific MIDI channels for the devices as the instruments are used in tracks.

13	This technique can significantly speed up and simplify the task of assigning devices. When you’re done assigning devices, you can then re-group the instruments in the library alphabetically or in any other way that makes sense.

14	Selecting an instrument from the Setup Track dialog box does not enter the device and patch into the Track List. See Instrument Pop-up Menu to learn why this is the case.


File>Edit Library>Expressions Library

File/Edit Library/Expressions Library

Choose File>Edit Library>Expressions to change the expressions that appear on the Expressions palette and create new ones.  Overture opens the Expression library dialog box.

The Expression library lets you specify and store information about expressions.  The definition of each expression includes name, font, size, style, and playback information.

Using the Expression Library Dialog Box

This section discusses how to edit, save, and name the currently loaded Expression library.

The Expression library dialog box lists all the expressions in the currently loaded Expression library.  Columns in the dialog box allow you to manipulate the expressions in the Expression palette and change their information:

•	Click  [image] to select an expression.  Press and drag to move an expression up or down the list of expressions.  Expressions appear on the palette in the order you specify by moving them in this column.

•	Ex. (Extract).  Click to put a bullet in the column or to remove it.  Putting a bullet in the column tells Overture to extract this expression in all parts when you extract parts. See Extract Parts.

•	Name.  Click and type to change the name of an expression.  The new name appears on the palette, where you can choose it and put it on the score.

•	Font.  Press and drag to choose a font from the pop-up menu.  The expression appears in the score in the font you specify.

•	Size.  Click and type to change the font size.  The expression appears in the score in the size you specify.

•	Style.  Click and choose the style characteristics you want.  Choose multiple times to specify multiple characteristics.  Your choices are Normal, Bold, Italic, and Underline.

•	Playback.  Click to display the Expression Playback dialog box for an expression.  This dialog box lets you specify options for MIDI playback of the expression in your score.  See “Expression Playback dialog box” below.

Buttons in the Expression Library dialog box let you manipulate the Expressions palette further.

•	Insert.  Select a row and press the Insert button to add an empty row above the selected row.  You can fill in the row with a new expression.  This adds the new expression to the palette after you click OK.

•	Delete.  Select a row and press the Delete button to delete the selected row.  This removes the selected expression from the Expressions palette after you click OK.

•	Save.  Click this button to save the changes you have made as part of the current Expressions library.

•	Save As.  Click this button to save the current Expressions library with a new name (creating a new Expressions library) or to another place.  The Save As dialog box appears.  Specify the new name and location and click Save.

Expression Playback Dialog Box

The Expression Playback dialog box lets you tell Overture how you want MIDI playback of the specified expression to sound.  In the Expression Library dialog box (see “Using the Expression Library Dialog Box” above) click the Playback column for the expression you want to specify.  The Expression Playback dialog box opens.

Choose one of these options:

•	None.  Click to tell Overture not to provide MIDI playback for this expression.

•	Tempo.  Click the radio button to specify a tempo.  Click and type a number to specify the tempo you want.

•	Patch.  Click the radio button to specify a patch for MIDI playback.  Press and hold to display the Patch pop-up menu.  Drag and release to choose a patch.  The patch name or number appears on the menu button.

•	Controller.  Click the radio button to specify a controller for MIDI playback.  Press and hold to display the Controller pop-up menu.  Drag and release to choose a controller.  The controller name or number appears on the menu button.

Type a value for the controller in the Value box.

Click OK to apply your choices for playback to the selected expression.


File>Edit Library

File/Edit Library

Choose File>Edit Library to produce a submenu of library types.

From the submenu, choose the type of library you wish to edit. Overture contains five types of libraries:

•	Drum Map. Overture uses the Drum Map to assign names, noteheads and staff positions to MIDI notes. Choosing this submenu opens the current Drum Map for editing.

•	Chord Symbols. Overture uses the Chord Symbol library to name chords using the Chords window, or to recognize chords played on a MIDI keyboard. Choosing this submenu opens the current Chord Symbol library for editing.

•	Allotment Table. Overture uses the Allotment Table to determine the default horizontal spacing of notes on a staff. Choosing this submenu opens the current Allotment Table for editing.

•	Instruments Library. Overture uses the Instrument Library to define instruments, including the following track attributes: name, abbreviation, clef, device, patch, output transposition, pitch, range, transposed clef, transposed steps, and number of voices. Choosing this submenu command opens the current Instruments library for editing.

•	Expressions Library. Overture uses the Expressions library to organize sets of expressions, their appearance in the Score window and their sound during playback. Choosing this submenu command opens the current Expressions library for editing.

•	Guitar Frames Library. Overture uses the Guitar Frames library to create and organize sets of guitar frames. Choosing this submenu command opens the current Guitar Frames library for editing.

The following sections discuss editing each library type in detail.


File>Load Library

File/Load Library

Choose this command to load any of Overture’s five library types from disk into Overture’s local memory. We discuss Overture’s library types in Edit Library.

When you choose File>Load Library, Overture opens a standard Open dialog box. Use the dialog box to find the library you wish to open. When you load a library into Overture, it replaces the library previously in use.

You can edit any loaded library by choosing its type from the File>Edit Library submenu.

When Overture launches, it automatically loads the Chord library, Drum Map, Allotment Table, Expressions library, and Instruments library selected in the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see Preferences.


Importing Encore, MusicTime, and MIDI files
File>Import

File/Import…

Choose this command to import either a standard MIDI file, Encore. or MusicTime file, and convert it into standard music notation.

1.	Choose File>Import The Open dialog box appears.
2.	Navigate to where you store your files.
3.	Select the file you wish to import and click Open. If the file is an Encore or MusicTime file skip to step 5. If the file is a MIDI file, the Import File dialog box appears. The Import File dialog box appears.
4.	Enable those tracks you wish to import and select the desired voicing, split, quantization and transcription options for each track.
5.	Click the OK button.


File>Export

File/Export…

Choose this command to export data in the active Overture score to a multitrack (format 1) MIDI file. When you choose File>Export, Overture opens a standard Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to tell Overture what to name the resulting MIDI file and where you want it saved.

If your score contains tracks that you don’t want included in the exported MIDI file, disable them by muting them in the Tracks window.


File>Extract Parts

File/Extract Parts

Choose this command when you want to create separate instrument parts from a complete score. When you choose the Extract Parts command, the Extract Parts dialog box appears.

About the Extract Parts Dialog Box

There are four different areas in the Extract Parts dialog box.

•	Track Selector. Use this column to select those tracks you want extracted. Click a selector dot to turn it into a triangle (enabling it for part extraction). All tracks that are marked with a small triangle will be extracted. Click a selector triangle to turn it into a dot (disabling it for part extraction). Shift-click to make multiple selections.

•	Parts. The dotted lines between tracks indicate part divisions. The number of tracks between dotted lines indicates the number of staves (tracks) that will be combined into a single part.

For example, if there are two tracks between dotted lines (as with the two Piano tracks), then the extracted part will contain two staves (one for each track).

•	Split Field. Use this column to control the number of voices extracted into each part.

The possible values for the Split field are:
—	. all voices go into one part
1 splits each voice into a separate part
2 splits two voices into a part
3 splits three voices into a part
4 splits four voices into a part

Part extraction for multiple splits (options 2-4 above) proceeds in order of the voices in the track. For example, a four voice track with the Split value set at 2, extracts voices one and two into one part and voices three and four into another.

•	Track Name. Use this column to rename tracks, or to drag them around to change their order or part assignment.

•	For example, assume the vocalist in your band is also the bass player and you want to extract her parts into a single score. As shown in the figure below, you select the two tracks to extract, then drag the name of the bass track on top of and the vocal track. This puts the two tracks together in a single part.

Alt-clicking a track name, changes the remaing tracks to the selected state.

•	Multi-Bar Rests Check Box. Check this box to create multi-bar rests in the extracted parts. Extracted parts use multi-bar rests to indicate many consecutive blank measures as a single bar. Use the Minimum field to set the minimum number of consecutive empty bars required to notate them as a single multi-bar rest. Use the Maximum field to set the maximum number of consecutive empty bars required to notate them as a single multi-bar rest.

Note: Multi-bar rests never span such symbols as rehearsal marks and double barlines.

Using the Extract Parts Command

To extract individual parts from a score:

1. Choose File>Extract Parts.

The Extract Parts dialog box appears. (See the previous section.)

2. Click the selector dots of those tracks you wish to export.
3. Drag track names into the desired part groupings.
4. Check the appropriate check boxes and click the OK button.

Each extracted part is saved as its own file.

Automatic Names for Extracted Parts

The file and track names are used to name extracted parts automatically. The current file name of the open score is used as a default name.  This is just a default name, and you can assign your own name and locate a folder in the standard File dialog box that appears.

For example:

If	a file is named Counterpoint,
and	the selected track is named piano and contains 4 voices,
and	the track is extracted with the Split field value set to 2,
then	are created with two voices each with the following names: Counterpoint-piano 1&2 and Counterpoint-piano 3&4.
Extracted parts derive their page layout from Preferences, not from the Layout Page dialog box settings.


File>Page Setup

File/Page Setup

Choose this command to define various printing options such as paper size, orientation, scaling and text effects. When you choose the Page Setup command, Overture produces the Page Setup dialog box for your printer. The look and format of the dialog box depends on the printer currently selected. See your printer manual for specific information about its page setup options.

Overture can interpret the Page Setup dialog’s scaling function one of two ways: it can either scale the entire page proportionally; or it can scale the symbols (giving more print area on a single page). For more information, see The Normal Size and Paper Size Buttons.


File>Print

File/Print..

Choose this command to print all or part of the active Overture score. When you choose the Print command, Overture produces the Print dialog box. The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the printer currently selected on your computer. See your printer manual for specific information about its print options.


File>Print Preview

File/Print Preview

Use this command to see what your score will look like when you print it.  When you choose this command, Overture displays the print preview of your score.

About the Print Preview

The Print preview has buttons to help you inspect your score:

•	Print.  Sends your score to the printer when you are satisfied with it.

•	Next Page.  Displays the next page of your score.

•	Prev Page.  Displays the previous page of your score.

•	Two Pages.  Displays your score two pages at a time.

•	Zoom In.  Magnifies your score by

•	Zoom Out.  Shrinks your score by

•	Close.  Closes the print preview and returns you to the score window.


File>Recently Opened Files

File/List of Recently Opened Files

This list of up to four files near the bottom of the File menu displays files you have opened recently.  This is a convenience for files you open often.

Choose the file you want from the list.


File>Exit

File/Quit

Choose this command to exit the Overture application. If any scores contain unsaved changes, Overture prompts you to save those changes before quitting.


Measures>Insert
Measure>Insert

Measures/Insert

Choose this command to insert one or more blank measures into the score. When you choose the Insert command, Overture opens the Insert Measure dialog box.

Using the Insert Measure Dialog Box

To insert one or more blank measures into your score:

1.	Decide where you want to insert the blank measures, then click in the measure that either immediately precedes or follows that location.

2.	Choose Measures>Insert.

Overture opens the Insert Measure dialog box.

3.	Use the numerical to enter the number of blank measures you wish to insert.

In this example we choose to insert one measure.

4.	Click either the Before current measure or After current measure radio buttons.

If you select Before current measure, Overture places the requested number of blank measures immediately before the active measure (the measure that contains the insertion point).

If you select After current measure, Overture places the requested number of blank measures immediately after the active measure.

5.	Click the OK button.

Overture inserts the requested number of blank measures in the requested position. The inserted measures retain the tempo, meter, and key signature of the measure immediately preceding them.


Measures>Delete

Measures/Delete

Choose this command to delete one or more contiguous measures beginning with the active measure. The active measure is the measure that contains the insertion point. When you choose the Delete command, Overture opens the Delete Measure dialog box.

Using the Delete Measure Dialog Box

To delete one or more contiguous measures from your score:

1.	Click in the first measure you wish to delete.

2.	Choose Measures>Delete.

Overture opens the Insert Measure dialog box.

3.	Use the numerical to enter the number of measures you wish to delete.

In this example, we choose to delete one measure.

4.	Click the OK button.

Overture deletes the requested number of measures beginning with the active measure.


Measures>Increase Measures on System

Measures/Increase Measures on System

Choose this command to increase the number of measures on the active system. The active system is the system that contains the insertion point.

Choosing Measures>Increase Measures on System moves a measure from the left of the following system to the right of the active system, thereby increasing the number of measures in the active system. Overture does not change the default number of measures for any remaining systems, so measures continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the left measure in each system moves to the right of the preceding system).

If the final system in the score contains more than one measure, Overture simply decreases the number of measure in that final system. If the final system in the score contains only one measure, Overture moves it to the right of the previous system and deletes the final system from your score.

Overture wraps all slurs, ties, beams, etc. as required.


Measures>Decrease Measures on System

Measures/Decrease Measures on System

Choose this command to decrease the number of measures on the active system. The active system is the one that contains the insertion point.

Choosing Measures>Decrease Measures on System moves a measure from the right of the active system to the left of the following system, thereby decreasing the number of measures in the active system. Overture does not change the default number of measures for any remaining systems, so measures continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the right measure in each system moves to the left of the following system).

If the final system in the score contains fewer measures than the default Measures per System value (as set in the Layout Page dialog box), Overture simply increases the number of measures in that final system. If the final system in the score contains the same number of measures as are specified in the Layout Page dialog box, Overture adds a new system containing a single measure.

Overture wraps all slurs, ties, beams, etc. as required.


Measures>Set Key Signature

Measures/Set Key Signature

Choose this command to specify a key signature for the active measure (and all measures up to the next key change). The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose Measures>Set Key Signature, Overture opens the Set Key Signature dialog box.

About the Set Key Signature Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Set Key Signature dialog box. We describe these in the following sections.

Key Setting

Use this scroll bar to set the measure’s key signature. Scroll up to add more sharps to the key; scroll down to add more flats to the key.

You can also use the up and down arrow keys change the key signature in the Set Key dialog box:

•	The up arrow moves towards fewer flats and more sharps.

•	The down arrow moves towards fewer sharps and more flats.

All Staves Option

Check this option to apply the key change to all staves in the system. If you don’t check this option, Overture applies the key change to only the selected staff—other staves remain in their original keys.

Transpose Options

Check the Transpose option if you want Overture to transpose any music affected by the new key signature automatically.

If you don’t check the Transpose option, Overture keeps the pitch of the music the same and re-spells the notes as required by the new key signature.

If you check the Transpose option, use the Up and Down radio buttons to tell Overture whether to transpose notes up or down in pitch.

If you transpose a staff that contains chord names, Overture automatically transposes them, as well.

Previous Key Cancellation Selection

Use this set of radio buttons to tell Overture how you want it to display key cancellations.

If you click the None button, Overture changes keys without showing any cancellations from the previous key.

If you click the All button, Overture changes keys and shows all cancellations from the previous key.

If you click the Only Changed button, Overture changes keys and shows only those cancellations that are different from the previous key.

If you select either the All or Only Changed options, you can decide whether or not you want the cancellation placed before or after the barline.

System Break Warning Option

Check this option if you want Overture to provide a courtesy key change warning automatically at the end of the previous system if the key change occurs at a system break.

Using the Set Key Signature Command

To insert a key signature into an Overture score:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click in a measure to make it the active measure.

2.	Choose Measures>Set Key Signature.

Overture opens the Set Key Signature dialog box.

3.	Define the desired key signature, then click the OK button.

Overture applies the key signature to the active measure and all remaining measures up to the next key signature change.


Measures>Set Time Signature

Measures/Set Time Signature

Choose this command to specify a meter for the active measure and all measures up to the next meter change. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose Measures>Set Time Signature, Overture opens the Set time Signature dialog box.

About the Set Time Signature Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Set Time Signature dialog box. These are described in the following sections:

Quick Time Signature Select Buttons

Click one of these buttons to set the measure quickly to one of these common time signatures.

When you click a Time Signature Select button, Overture automatically selects a default number of pulses and a beaming pattern.

Main Time Signatures Options

Use the Main Time Signature options to:

•	set a time signature for the measure

•	determine how Overture displays the time signature

•	select the number of pulses in the measure.

Check the Show option if you want Overture to show the inserted time signature. Generally, you want Overture to show the time signature unless you’ve created a composite meter and are showing it instead of the main meter.

Check the Parentheses option if you want Overture to place the time signature in parentheses.

Use the time signature’s Numerator numerical to set the number of beats per measure.

Use the time signature’s Denominator numerical to set the note value that receives one beat.

Use the Pulses numerical to set the number of pulses in a meter. The pulses numerical determines how many pulses (beats) Overture’s beat chart displays (see Using Beat Charts). It also affects the number of clicks the metronome plays and the beaming pattern used by the measure.

Pulses are different from beats because pulses dictate the feel of a measure. For example, you can play a 6/8 measure as though it were three groups of eighth note pairs. The three groups make the measure feel as if it has three pulses.

You can play that same 6/8 measure as though it were two groups of three eighth notes. The two groups make the measure feel as if it has two pulses.

Obviously, pulses are closely related to the measure’s beaming pattern (as discussed in Beam Pattern Options).

Composite Meter Options

Use composite meters to subdivide the measure’s main meter into separate, smaller metrical groups.

Check the Show option if you want Overture to show the specified composite time signature. Often, you’ll want to hide the main time signature when showing a composite time signature. Do this by unchecking the Main Meter Show option.

Check the Parentheses option if you want Overture to place the composite time signature in parentheses. Use parentheses if you’re also going to show the main time signature.

Overture lets you create composite meters of up to three groups. Use the Composite Numerator and Composite Denominator numericals to define each of the composite groupings.

For example, if you create a 4/4 score, but want each measure performed in an unorthodox manner (such as 3/8 + 2/8 + 3/8), you can create a composite meter.

You need a special beaming pattern to convey the rhythmic feel of the composite meter. We disscuss beaming patterns in the following section.

Beam Pattern Options

Beams create a visual representation of a measure’s meter and its internal rhythmic divisions. Use the Set Meter dialog box’s Beam Pattern options to define how you want Overture to beam notes.

Use the four Primary beam group numericals to set the pattern in which notes are beamed. For example, in a 4/4 measure, a pattern of 4+4 automatically beams together the first four eighth notes, then the last four eighth notes.

As another example, in a 4/4 measure, a pattern of 3+2+3 automatically beams together the first three eighth notes, then the middle two, then the last three eighth notes.

You don’t have to enter every element of a steady beaming pattern. For example, to enter a beaming pattern of 2+2+2+2, you only have to enter the first 2.

Secondary beams are the additional beams used to indicate 16th notes, 32nd notes, and so on.

Check the Secondaries option if you want secondary beams to break at a specified number of notes, thus giving a more accurate picture of the internal rhythm of a measure.

The Show Before System Break Option

Check this option if you want Overture to provide a courtesy meter change warning automatically at the end of the previous system if the meter change occurs at a system break.

The Is Pickup Option

Check this option if you want Overture to recognize the active measure as a pickup measure.

Unlike other elements in the Set Meter dialog box, the Is Pickup option applies only to the active measure. This way you can define one measure as a pickup measure without defining the following measure as standard.

When you define a measure as a pickup measure, the following things occur:

•	Overture right-justifies the notes in the measure.

•	When Overture plays a pickup measure, it plays the measure exactly as written.

•	Overture ignores pickup measures when numbering measures in a score. To learn about measure numbers, see Set Measure Numbers.

•	Overture ignores pickup measures when searching for incorrect rhythms. To learn how to search an Overture score for incorrect rhythms, see Incorrect Rhythms.

Rebarring scores destroys pickup measures. If you ask Overture to rebar a score across pickup measures, it asks if you really want to rebar the score. To learn about rebarring a score, see Rebar.

The Alternate Font Option

Check this option to display the meter in the font, size, and style you specify in the Meters option of the Fonts tab in the Preferences dialog box. See Font Preferences.

Using the Set Time Signature Command

To insert a meter change into an Overture score:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click within a measure to make it the active measure.

2.	Choose Measures>Set Time Signature.

Overture opens the Set Time Signature dialog box.

3.	Use the dialog box (discussed earlier) to define the meter and its beaming options, then click the OK button.

Overture applies the new meter to the active measure and all remaining measures up to the next meter change.


Measures>Set Tempo

Measures/Set Tempo

Choose this command to specify a tempo for the active measure and all measures up to the next tempo change. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose Measures>Set Tempo, Overture opens the Set Tempo dialog box.

You can also open the Set Tempo dialog box by double-clicking on a tempo marking.

You can move the Set Tempo dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Set Tempo Dialog Box

Use the Set Tempo dialog box to define

•	the number of beats per minute for your new tempo.

•	the note value of the beat.

You can also use the dialog box to apply the tempo to MIDI playback and to show the tempo in your score, either as a metronome value or as a text description.

There are numerous elements in the Set Tempo dialog box. These are described in the following sections.

Playback Options

Use the Playback Options portion of the Set Tempo dialog box to define a tempo.

Use the Beats Per Minute numerical to enter the number of beats you want in a minute.

Click one of the Beat Value Select buttons to define the value of a beat. For example, 100 quarter-note beats per minute is twice the tempo of 100 eighth-note beats per minute.

Show Options

Use the Show Options portion of the Set Tempo dialog box to determine if you want Overture to display the tempo and, if so, how you want it displayed.

Check the Show Metronome option if you want Overture to display the tempo in your score.

Check the Parenthesis option if you checked Metronome and you want Overture to display the metronome marking in parantheses.

Check the numerical radio button if you checked Metronome and you want Overture to display the tempo as an actual number of beats per minute.

Check the note options radio button if you checked Metronome and you want to change the time signature but keep the pulse constant and represent it by a different note duration. For example, if the meter changes from 2/4 to 6/8, you can represent the change as quarter note=dotted quarter.

Check the Show Text option if you checked Show and you want Overture to display the tempo as user-specified text.

If you selected the Show Text option, use the Tempo Text Field to enter the text you want displayed in your score.

The following figure illustrates the difference between the Show Metronome and Show Text options.

You can show metronome and text values simultaneously. This is particularly convenient if you want to show tempo markings made up of both text and metronome values. For example, assume you configure the Set Tempo dialog box like this.

You can edit either type of tempo marking independently of the other. In the figure below, the metronome marking was dragged into the space left for it in the Text area.

Font Buttons

There are two font buttons:

•	Text Font button: Use this button to open a dialog box in which you select the font that Overture uses to display the desired Tempo Text in the score.

•	Metronome Font button: Use this button to open a dialog box in which you select the font that Overture uses to display metronome (beats per minute) markings in the score.

For a detailed discussion of the Select Font dialog box, see Font Button.

Using the Set Tempo Command

To set a tempo change into an Overture score:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click within a measure to make it the active measure.

2.	Choose Measures>Set Tempo.

Overture opens the Set Tempo dialog box.

3.	Enter a tempo and select viewing options, then click the OK button.

Overture applies the tempo to the active measure and all remaining measures up to the next tempo change.

Editing Tempo

To reposition any tempo mark in the Score window:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the tempo mark you wish to move.

The cursor changes to a Drag Cursor.

2.	Drag the tempo mark to the desired position.

Moving tempo marks only affects where the tempo is displayed,  not the actual tempo of the music.

To copy a tempo mark in the Score window:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the tempo mark you wish to move.

The cursor changes to a Drag Cursor.

2.	Control-drag to move a copy of the tempo mark to a new place.

Shift-Alt-drag to copy a tempo mark and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

To open the Set Tempo dialog box and change an existing tempo:

1.	Click in the desired measure and choose Measures>Set Tempo.

Alternatively, if the tempo appears in the score, you can double-click the tempo mark to open the Set Tempo dialog box.


Measures>Set Codas, Segnos, etc.

Measures/Set Set Codas, Segnos, etc.

Choose this command to attach repeat and jumper text to a measure. When you choose Measures>Set Repeats, Overture opens the Set Repeats dialog box.

You can move the Set Repeats dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Set Repeats Dialog Box

There are two areas in the Set Repeats dialog box:

•	Repeat Type. Use this area to select among the most commonly used repeats.

•	Repeat Text. Use this area to modify the text used by one of the selected Repeat Types.

We describe each of these areas in the following sections.

Repeat Type

Overture offers eight default repeat notation options.

When you select one of these options, Overture enters default text into the Text. The following list discuss each Type option:

•	Use this notation in conjunction with either the D.S. al Coda or D.S. al Fine options. Overture places this symbol at the beginning of the active measure. When the performer sees a D.S. symbol in a score, he or she knows to jump to the measure containing this symbol.

•	To Coda . Use this notation in conjunction with either the D.S. al Coda or D.C. al Coda option. Overture places this symbol at the beginning of the active measure. When the performer sees this symbol, he or she knows to jump immediately to the Coda section.

•	Coda. Use this notation in conjunction with the To Coda symbol. Overture places the Coda symbol at the beginning of the active measure. When the performer sees a To Coda symbol in the score, he or she knows to jump to the beginning of the measure containing the Coda symbol.

•	Fine. Use this notation in conjunction with either the D.C. al Fine or D.S. al Fine options. Overture places the Fine symbol at the end of the active measure. The Fine indicates that this measure is the final measure in the score.

•	D.C. al Coda. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she should jump back to the top of the piece and play to the To Coda sign; at which point, he or she needs to jump to the Coda section (indicated by the Coda notation).

•	D.C. al Fine. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she is to jump back to the top of the piece and play to the Fine sign.

•	D.S. al Coda. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she should jump back to the measure containing the segno, then play through to the To Coda sign; at which point he or she should jump to the Coda section (indicated by the Coda notation).

•	D.S. al Fine. Use this notation to indicate that, when the performer finishes the measure, he or she should jump back to the top of the measure containing the segno, then play to the Fine sign.

If the Options>Play Style>Repeats option is checked, Overture recognizes and plays all default repeat markings discussed above. You must enter all the necessary repeat markings in all the required measures, just as you would for live performers.

Text Editing

When you select one of the eight default Type notations, Overture automatically fills the Text area with default text. This is the text that appears over (or under) the active measure when you click the dialog box’s OK button.

Overture attaches any text from this area to the active measure. Additionally, Overture allows you to enter either a Segno symbol or a Coda symbol by typing #1 or #2, respectively.

For example, when the text box says “D.S. #1 al Coda #2,” Overture creates the ending notation below.

If you change the text box to read “D.S. al Coda,” Overture creates the ending notation below.

Click the Font button to open the Font dialog box. Use the Font dialog box to select the font used to display repeat text. For more information about the Font dialog box, see Font Buttons.


Measures>Set Measure Numbers

Measures/Set Measure Numbers

Choose this command to specify a measure numbering and display format beginning with the active measure in the current staff and continuing to the next numbering change. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point. When you choose the Set Measure Numbers command, Overture produces the Set Measure Numbers dialog box.

You can move the Set Measure Numbers dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Set Measure Numbers Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Set Measure Numbers dialog box. We describe these in the following sections.

Starting Measure Numerical

Use the Starting Measure numerical to enter the measure number of the active measure. This is useful if, for example, the current Overture score is a continuation of a different score and does not start with measure 1.

Overture doesn’t include pickup measures in the measure numbering sequence. For more information about pickup measures, see The Is Pickup Option.

Position Setting

Use the Position Setting to position measure numbers. Overture places all measure numbers in the same relative position in the score (later, you can drag individual measure numbers to change their positions). Use the two gray lines for reference. Drag the small number 1 to show Overture where you want it to place all measure numbers.

Overture allows enclosures around measure numbers. Select the Enclosure option in the Set Measure Number dialog box to enable the enclosure option.

Interval Options

Use this set of radio buttons to tell Overture how frequently you want measure numbers to appear throughout your score.

If you click the Page button, Overture places measure numbers over the first measure at the top of the first system on each page.

If you click the System button, Overture places measure numbers over the first measure at the top of each system.

If you click the n Measures button, Overture places measure numbers at the interval you specify. Use the corresponding numerical to specify the desired interval between measure numbers.

If you click the None button, Overture puts no measure numbers into a score. Select this option to stop displaying measure numbers (or to hide them for a while).

Text Options

Use the Text Options portion of the Set Measure Numbers dialog box to place measure numbers and to enter an optional prefix.

Use the Prefix numerical to enter up to two characters to use as a prefix for the active measure.

Select one of the Justify options to tell Overture whether you want to place measure numbers to the Left, Center or Right of the Position Setting.

Character Options

Use this portion of the Set Measure Numbers dialog box if you want Overture to number measures with letters rather than numbers.

Check the Starts with option if you want Overture to indicate measures with letters rather than numbers. Use the text entry field to type the letter you want applied to the active measure.

If you click the AA, BB, CC button, Overture follows measure Z with measure AA, then measure BB, etc.

If you click the AA, AB, AC button, Overture follows measure Z with measure AA, then measure AB, etc.

Font Button

Click this button to open the Font dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the font that Overture uses to display measure numbers.

There are numerous elements in the Font dialog box:

•	Font Pop-Up Menu. Press and hold the mouse here to select a font from the pop-up menu.

•	Font Size Pop-Up Menu. Press and hold the mouse here to select a font size from the pop-up menu.

•	Font Size Field. Use this numerical to enter a font size not included in the Font Size Pop-Up Menu.

•	Font Style Options. Check those style options you want applied to the selected font.

•	Font Preview Area..View your font selections in this area.

Using the Set Measure Numbers Command

To create a measure numbering format:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click a measure to make it the active measure.

2.	Choose Measures>Set Measure Numbers.

Overture opens the Set Measure Numbers dialog box.

3.	Specify a measure numbering format, then click the OK button.

Overture numbers measures as requested, beginning with the active measure and continuing until it sees a measure requesting a different numbering format.


Measures>Rebar

Measures/Rebar

Choose this command to rebar the score beginning with the active measure and continuing to the end of the score. Use the Rebar command to assure that your score contains the correct number of beats in every measure.

This command is particularly useful if:

•	you inserted or deleted a note or rest

•	changed meters after entering notes

When you choose the Rebar command, Overture analyzes the active measure and, if necessary, moves the barline so that the measure contains the correct number of beats as defined by its meter. It then analyzes each of the following measures until the end of the score. Any leftover beats are, therefore, confined to the final measure in the score.

If, for example, the first measure has too few notes or rests, Overture moves the necessary number of beats from the beginning of the second measure to the end of the first measure. On the other hand, if the first measure has too many notes or rests, Overture moves the necessary number of beats from the end of the first measure to the beginning of the second measure.

Overture always divides any notes or rests as required. For instance, if a measure is short an eighth note, and the first note in the next measure is a quarter note, Overture splits the quarter note into two tied eighth notes; the first eighth note appears at the end of the first measure, and the second eighth note appears at the beginning of the second measure.

The Rebar command does not affect MIDI playback, but the Graphic window updates to show the new position of bar lines.


Measures>Multi Measure Rest
Measures>Multi-measure Rest

Measures/Multi-measure Rest

Choose this command to group a specified number of empty measures into a single measure with multi-measure rest notation. When you choose the Multi-measure Rest command, Overture opens the Set Multi-measure Rest dialog box.

This dialog box contains only one numerical. Use it to enter the number of measures you wish to group into a multi measure rest. The grouping always begins with the active measure (the one containing the insertion point).

You can move the Set Multi-measure Rest dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

Using the Multi-measure Rest Command

To create a multi-measure rest:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click the first measure you wish to group into a multi measure rest.

2.	Choose Measures>Multi-measure Rest.

Overture open the Set Multi-measure Rest dialog box.

3.	In the dialog box, enter the number of measures you want to group into a multi-measure rest (including the active measure).

4.	Click the OK button.

Overture creates a multi-measure rest of the specified length.

To expand a multi-measure rest:

1.	Click the multi-measure rest you wish to expand.

2.	Choose Measures>Multi-measure Rest.

Overture open the Set Multi-measure Rest dialog box.

3.	In the dialog box, enter the number 1 then click the OK button.

Overture expands the multi-measure rest to show all measures in the score.

To display the range of measures in a multi-measure rest, check Show Range.

To display the number of measures in a multi-measure rest below rather than above the staff, check Below Staff.

To switch from a normal to a jazz style of rest, click the Jazz radio button.

To change the style of end caps on the rest, click the radio button for Thin, Thick, or None.

To adjust the length of the rest, drag an end cap horizontally.


Measures>Justify

Measures/Justify

When you choose this command, Overture calculates a new Beat Chart based on the note values contained in the measure(s) and on the spacings assigned to them by the current Allotment Table.

Justifying a measure causes the notes within it to change their relative spacings by calculating a new Beat Chart (based on the current Allotment Table). This greatly improves legibility, though some collision of note heads may still occur since this command does not change the width of a measure, only the spacing of notes within it.

To justify notes in a measure:

1.	Find the measure(s) you wish to justify.

2.	Activate the measure you wish to justify by clicking a blank space within it.

If you wish to justify many measures simultaneously, simply control-click a note in each measure you wish to justify—all measures with selected notes are affected by the Justify command.

3.	Choose Measure>Justify.

Overture calculates new Beat Charts based on the note values and the spacing assigned to them by the current Allotment Table.

Compare the two Beat Charts above. Notice the modified spacing of the beats and the consequent change in note spacing.

To protect a measure from the Measures>Justify command, see Locked Measures.

If you need to brush up on your knowledge of Beat Charts, see Using Beat Charts. For a detailed discussion about Allotment Tables, see Allotment Table.

Overture can automatically space notes using either Options>Auto Position, Measures>Justify, or Score>Recalc Layout. All three of these commands affect note spacing differently. To learn the differences between them, see Automatic Positioning.


Measures Menu

The Measures menu commands are as follows:

Insert

Delete

Increase Measures on System

Decrease Measures on System

Set Key Signature

Set Time Signature

Set Tempo

Set Codas, Segnos, etc.

Set Measure Numbers

Rebar

Multi-measure Rest

Fill in Rests

Justify


Measures>Fill in Rests

Measures/Fill in Rests

When you choose this command, rests are inserted in place of missing beats in the active measure. The active measure is the one that contains the insertion point.

To fill a measure with rests:

1.	Click in the measure to make it the active measure.

2.	Choose Measures>Fill in Rests.

Overture fills in the measure with the necessary rests.

This is also a quick way to insert rests into any blank measures.


Notes Menu

The Notes menu commands are as follows:

Transpose

Modify Notes

Quantize

Delete

Delete>Beams

Delete>Articulations

Delete>Redundant

Beam

Beam>Based on Meter

Beam>Manually

Beam>Tremolo 8ths

Beam>Tremolo 16ths

Beam>Tremolo 32nds

Beam>Tremolo 64ths

Group

Group>Tie

Group>Slur

Group>Ottava

Group>Tuplet

Group>Glissando

Group>Glissando Wavy

Flip

Flip>Direction

Flip>Enharmonic

Flip>Sharps To Flats

Flip>Flats To Sharps

Stem

Stem>Stem Up

Stem>Stem Down

Stem>Hide Stem

Stem>Show Stem

Stem>Set Stem Height

Display on Prev Staff

Display on Next Staff

Move to Prev Track

Move to Next Track

Notate as

Notate as>Arpeggio

Notate as>Reduced Rests

Notate as>Swing Eighths

Notate as>Trill

Notate as>Triplet

Notate as>Turn

Notate as>Single Note

Notate as>Two Tied Notes

Transcribe

Notes to Raw

Notes to Tablature

Set to Voice

Set to Voice>1

Set to Voice>2

Set to Voice>3

Set to Voice>4

Set to Voice>5

Set to Voice>6

Set to Voice>7

Set to Voice>8


Notes>Transpose

Notes/Tranpose

Choose this command to transpose a selection of notes. When you choose the Transpose command, Overture opens the Transpose dialog box.

You can move the Transpose dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The Transpose command does not transpose staves that notate tablature or percussive tracks.

About the Transpose Dialog Box

The left half of the dialog box has two radio buttons to select the type of transposition:

•	Chromatic. Transposes selected notes up/down the selected interval without respect to the current key signature.

•	Diatonic. Transposes selected notes up/down the selected interval based on the current key signature.

The right half of the dialog box has two radio buttons to select transposition direction.

•	Up. Transpose the selected notes up in pitch.

•	Down. Transpose the selected notes down in pitch.

The contents of the Interval pop-up menu change to reflect the Type setting. Although the new dialog box below has the Type set to Chromatic, we show both the Chromatic and Diatonic Interval pop-up menus.

Using the Transpose Command

To transpose a selection of notes in your score:

1.	Select the notes you wish to transpose.

We discuss note selection techniques in Selecting Notation Symbols.

2.	Choose Notes>Transpose.

The Transpose dialog box appears.

3.	Click the radio button next to the type of transposition you desire.

0	4.	Click the radio button next to the direction you want to transpose.

1	5.	Choose the interval by which you want to transpose the selection.

2	6.	Click the OK button.

Overture transposes your selected notes.

0	If you perform a chromatic transposition, Overture automatically spells all notes and accidentals correctly with respect to the key signature.


Notes>Modify Notes

Notes/Modify Notes

Choose this command to alter various MIDI playback attributes of the selected notes. When you choose the Modify Notes command, Overture produces the Modify Notes dialog box.

0	You can move the Modify Notes dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

1	This command affects only the MIDI playback of notes, not their appearance in the score. For you to hear any edits you make to MIDI data, Overture must use the As Recorded play style (as selected in the Play Style submenu in the Options menu). See Play Style for more information.

About the Modify Notes Dialog Box

The Modify Notes dialog box contains three parameters:

•	the Operation pop-up menu

•	the Note Property pop-up menu

•	the Value Setting

We explain each of these parameters in the following three sections.

0	The Modify Notes dialog box always reads like a sentence. For instance, the dialog box shown above reads “Set duration to 240 units.”

Note Property Pop-Up Menu

Use the Note Property pop-up menu to select which note property you want to modify. Click the current note property and select a new one from the pop-up menu.

0	The following note properties are available in the Modify Notes dialog box:

•	Duration. Selecting this causes the Modify Notes command to change the durations of selected notes an amount determined by the Operation pop-up menu and the Value setting.

•	Key Velocity. Selecting this causes the Modify Notes command to change the key velocities of selected notes an amount determined by the Operation pop-up menu and the Value setting.

•	Release Velocity. Selecting this causes the Modify Notes command to change the release velocities of selected notes an amount determined by the Operation pop-up menu and the Value setting.

Operation Pop-Up Menu

Use the Operation pop-up menu to select how you want to modify a note property. Click the current operation and select a new operation from the pop-up menu.

0	The following operations are available in the Modify Notes dialog box:

•	Set. Select this operation to set the note property of all selected notes to the exact value indicated in the Value Setting.

For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value Setting is 64, then selecting Set changes all selected note velocities to 64.

•	Scale Select this operation to multiply the note property of all selected notes by the percentage shown in the Value setting. The Value setting ranges from 0%-999% when you select this operation. Velocities are always limited to a range of 1 to 127.

For example, if the note property is Duration and the Value setting is 50%, then selecting Scale changes all selected note durations to half their current value.

•	Add Amount Select this operation to add or subtract the Value setting from the note property of the selected notes. The Value setting ranges from -127 to 127 when you select this operation.

For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value Setting is +10, then selecting Add Amount increases the velocity of all selected notes by a value of 10.

0	To set whether you want to add or subtract the indicated amount, click to toggle + and -.

•	Max Limit Select this operation to restrict the note property of all selected notes to the maximum limit indicated in the Value setting. Overture lowers any note properties with values above the specified limit to the limit and leaves unchanged any note properties with values below the specified limit.

For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value setting is 100, then selecting Max Limit limits the maximum velocity of any selected note to a value of 100. Overture sets any notes with original velocities greater than 100 to a value of 100, and leaves unchanged notes with original velocities less than 100.

•	Min Limit. Select this operation to restrict the note property of all selected notes to the minimum limit indicated in the Value setting. Overture raises any note properties with values below the specified limit to the limit and leaves unchanged any note properties with values above the specified limit.

For example, if the note property is Key Velocity and the Value Setting is 50, then selecting Min Limit limits the minimum velocity of any selected note to a value of 50. Overture sets any notes with original velocities less than 50 to a value of 50 and leaves unchanged any notes with original velocities greater than 50.

•	Legato This operation works only when you set the note property to Duration. Select this operation to set the duration of each selected note so that it extends a certain percentage of the way to the next note. Use the Value setting to set the percentage.

For example, if the note property is Duration and the Value setting is 50%, selecting Legato changes all selected note durations to half their natural values. Quarter notes have the duration of eighth notes (240 units), eighth notes have the duration of sixteenth notes (120 units), and so on.

Value Setting

Use the Value setting in the Modify Notes dialog box to define how much the selected operation acts upon the note property.

The Value setting changes depending on which operation and which note property you’ve selected. See Operation Pop-Up Menu for more information about how various operations and note properties affect the Value setting.

Using the Modify Notes Command

To modify the MIDI playback of selected notes in your score:

1.	Select the notes you wish to modify.

We discuss note selection techniques in Selecting Notation Symbols.

2.	Choose Notes>Modify Notes.

The Modify Notes dialog box appears.

3.	Select the desired note property from the Note Property pop-up menu.

4.	Select the desired operation from the Operation pop-up menu.

5.	Use the Value setting numerical to set the desired value for the selected operation.

6.	Click the OK button.

Overture modifies the MIDI note data of the selected notes.


Notes>Quantize

Notes/Quantize

Choose this command to quantize selected notes, that is, to round off their start times and durations to even beats so they can display reasonably on a staff or play back with precision, rather than with irregularities, the way humans play them.  When you choose the Quantize command, Overture produces the Quantize dialog box.

About the Quantize Dialog Box

Resolution

In this section of the Quantize dialog box specify the granularity of the quantization.  You can use any value from a half note down to a thirty-second note triplet.  Select a resolution that matches the smallest note in the region you are quantizing.  If you are quantizing a run of sixteenth notes, use a sixteenth note as the resolution.

Change

In this section of the Quantize dialog box, choose to move the start times of notes, their durations, or both.

Options

In this section specify how, exactly, you want the selected notes quantized, in several dimensions.

Strength.  The human ear is tuned to the slight imperfections we hear from most musicians.  If you quantize a song so that all notes are perfectly in position, it may end up sounding mechanical or rigid.  To avoid this, Overture lets you adjust the strength of the adjustment.  A strength of 100 percent indicates that all notes are moved so that they are in perfect time, while a strength of 50 percent means that all notes are moved half-way towards the desired position.  This lets you tighten up the timing as much as you want, without going too far.

Swing. Many songs do not have notes positioned perfectly evenly.  For example, songs with a swing feel, though they may be written all using eighth notes, are often played more like eighth note triplets, with the first note extended and the second one shortened.  The swing option lets you distort the timing so each pair of notes is spaced unevenly, giving the quantized material a swing feel.

A swing value of 50 percent (the default) means that the timing is even.  A value of 67 percent means that the time between the first and second evenly spaced notes is twice as long as the time between the second and third.

Window. When you quantize some portion of a song, notes that are very far from the specified timing should probably not be moved at all. The window, or sensitivity setting, lets you choose how close to the resolution a note must be for quantize to move it.

A window of 100 percent includes all notes, and guarantees that all notes will shift to lie exactly on the resolution timing.  The window extends half the resolution distance before and after the quantization point. A window of 50 percent extends only a quarter of the way toward the adjacent quantization points.

Offset. Normally, the resolution grid is aligned evenly with the start of measures and beats.  As an option, you can shift the grid earlier or later by any number of clock ticks.  If the resolution is a quarter note, and you’ve set the offset to +3 ticks, then a note that is originally near the beat would be moved three ticks beyond the beat boundary.

Using the Notes/Quantize Command

To quantize selected notes:

1.	Using the Arrow cursor, click the first note in the passage to select it (highlighting it).

2.	Shift-click the final note in the passage to select it (highlighting all the notes between).

3.	Choose Notes/Quantize.

The Quantize dialog box appears.

4.	Click the radio button next to the resolution note size you need.

5.	Click one or both check boxes to specify whether you want to quantize start times, note durations, or both.

6.	Specify percentages for the options Strength, Swing, and Window, and ticks for the Offset option.

7.	Click the OK button.

Overture quantizes the selected notes in your score.

This command affects start and ent times of notes only, not the notated note value. To change note value, see Transcribe.


Notes>Delete…
Notes>Delete

Notes/Delete

Choose the Delete command to produce a submenu of delete options.

See:

Notes>Delete>Beams

Notes>Delete>Articulations/Ornaments

Notes>Delete>Redundant


Notes>Delete>Articulations/Ornaments

Notes/Delete/Articulations/Ornaments

Choose this command to remove all articulations and ornaments from the selected notes. For example:

1.	Select some notes with attached articulations and ornaments.

2.	Choose Notes>Delete>Articulations/Ornaments.

All articulations and ornaments attached to the selected notes are deleted.


Notes>Delete>Beams

Notes/Delete/Beams

Choose this command to remove the beams from all selected notes. For example:

1.	Select some beamed notes.

2.	Choose Notes>Delete>Beams.

All beams attached to any of the selected notes are deleted.


Notes>Delete>Duplicate Notes

Notes/Delete/Duplicate Notes

Choose this command to remove duplicate notes at the same pitch. For example:

1.	Select some notes that have the same pitch and start times.

2.	Choose Notes>Delete>Duplicate Notes.

One of the duplicate selected notes is deleted.


Notes>Beam…
Notes>Beam

Notes/Beam

Choose the Beam command to produce a submenu of beaming options.

To beam notes:

1.	In the Score window, select the notes you want beamed.

1.	Choose a beaming option from the Beam submenu.

Overture beams the selected notes according to one of the options. We discuss beaming options below.

You can beam notes that are on different staves and you can also beam across barlines.

By default, Overture makes primary beams span the distance between notes less than a quarter note; it indents secondary beams.

If you create a tremolo beam between quarter notes or larger, Overture automatically indents the primary beam.

To change the indentation of a secondary beam, drag it with the Arrow Cursor.

To create an indentation for the primary beam, Control-drag it with the Arrow Cursor.

Cross-Staff Beaming

This example shows how to beam across staves:

1.	Enter notes onto a single staff.

2.	Select those notes you want displayed on a different staff.

3.	Choose Notes>Display on Prev Staff.

If you wanted to beam to a lower staff, you would choose Notes>Display on Next Staff. Notes that are part of a cross-staff beam can be up to two staves above or below the current staff.

The Display on Prev Staff and Display on Next Staff commands do not actually move MIDI data from one track to another; they only change which staff displays the notes.

Cross-Bar Beaming

This example shows how to beam across bars:

1.	Enter notes into your score.

2.	Select the notes you wish to beam.

3.	Choose Notes>Beam>Manually.

Beams that cross barlines wrap to the next system if necessary. Also, Overture can notate simultaneous cross-bar and cross-staff beams. Simply combine the two techniques.

Feathered Beams

Create feathered beams by Control-dragging the end of a beam.

See:

Beam>Based on Meter

Beam>Manually

Beam>Tremolo 8ths

Beam>Tremolo 16ths

Beam>Tremolo 32nds

Beam>Tremolo 64ths


Notes>Beam>Based on Meter

Notes/Beam/Based on Meter

Choose this command to beam the selected notes and group them based on the meter of the measure(s). Define beam groupings in the Set Meter dialog box (accessed by choosing Measures>Set Meter). See Set Meter for more information about the Set Meter dialog box.


Notes>Beam>Manually

Notes/Beam/Manually

Choose this command or press Control-b to beam all selected notes as a single group regardless of the meter of the measure(s). This command beams over any selected rests and across barlines if requested. This command overrides previous beam commands, including the Options>AutoBeam toggle.


Notes>Beam>Tremolo 8ths

Notes/Beam/Tremolo 8ths

Choose this command to create an eighth note tremolo beam.


Notes>Beam>Tremolo 16ths

Notes/Beam/Tremolo 16ths

Choose this command to create a sixteenth note tremolo beam.


Notes>Beam>Tremolo 32nds

Notes/Beam/Tremolo 32nds

Choose this command to create a thirty-second note tremolo beam.


Notes>Beam>Tremolo 64ths

Notes/Beam/Tremolo 64ths

Choose this command to create a sixty-fourth note tremolo beam.


Notes>Group

Notes/Group

Choose the Group command to produce a submenu of grouping options.

Overture groups the selected notes according to one of the options in the Group submenu.

For more information see:

Notes>Group>Tie

Notes>Group>Slur

Notes>Group>Ottava

Notes>Group>Tuplet

Notes>Group>Glissando

Notes>Group>Glissando Wavy


Notes>Group>Tie

Notes/Group/Tie

Choose this command to tie together any notes of the same pitch within the selected group. To create a tie in your score:

1.	Control-click each note you want to tie together.

2.	Choose Notes>Group>Tie.

Overture ties the selected notes together.

If you draw a rectangle around a contiguous group of notes, then choose the Tie command, Overture ties together any notes of the same pitch within the selected group.

You can select a single note and attach a tie mark to it—this lets you create a note that’s tied to a different place in the score (such as an ending, coda, etc.).

Using the Tie command is the same as selecting the Tie tool from the Groups palette and grouping notes in the Score window (see Chapter 12, “Groups Button”).

MIDI playback recognizes tie markings. For instance, if you tie two quarter notes together, then your MIDI module plays the tie as though it were a half note.


Notes>Group>Slur

Notes/Group/Slur

Choose this command to create a slur across all notes in the selected group. To create a slur in your score:

1.	Select the notes you want slurred.

2.	Choose Notes>Group>Slur.

Overture creates a slur between the notes—even if they’re on different systems.

If you wrap measures containing slurs (as discussed in Increase Measures on System and Decrease Measures on System), Overture keeps all slurs over all notes even if you wrap a measure onto another system (as shown below).

Using the Slur command is the same as selecting the Slur tool from the Groups palette and grouping notes in the Score window (see Chapter 12, “Groups Button”).

MIDI playback is unaffected by slurs. If you want two notes to slur together in playback, use the Legato function in the Modify Notes dialog box (for more information, see Modify Notes).


Notes>Group>Ottava

Notes/Group/Ottava

Choose this command to insert an ottava mark to indicate that the selected notes should be played an octave higher or lower than written.

To place an ottava mark in your score:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click the first note in the passage to select it (highlighting it).

2.	Shift-click the final note in the passage to select it (highlighting all the notes between).

3.	Choose Notes>Group>Ottava.

The Insert Ottava dialog box appears.

4.	Click the radio button next to the type of ottava sign you need.

5.	Use the check boxes in the right half of the dialog box to deter mine how you would like the ottava sign to appear.

6.	Click the OK button.

Overture inserts the ottava into your score.

You can remove an ottava mark by clicking it with the Eraser cursor. MIDI playback recognizes the removal of ottavas and shifts playback pitch accordingly.

See Ottava Dialog Box for a detailed description of Ottava options.


Notes>Group>Tuplet

Notes/Group/Tuplet

Choose this command to group the selected notes into tuplets. When you choose the Tuplet command, Overture produces the Tuplets dialog box.

About the Tuplets Dialog Box

The Tuplets dialog box contains three separate areas:

•	Tuplet Value. Set the tuplet value using the top two fields; the first field sets the number of notes and the second field sets the duration of the tuplet.

For example, to group three notes into a triplet that would play in the time of two eighth notes, you would set the Tuplet value to 3/2 (three notes in the time of two).

•	Tuplet Style. Click one of the illustrated styles to notate your tuplet in that style.

•	Tuplet Options. There are two check boxes for two separate options. Check the Show 2nd Number check box if you want the second number (the “in the time of” number) to appear in the score. Check the Change playback durations check box if you want to change the actual MIDI playback times of the notes you grouped into a tuplet.

Overture remembers the most recent parameters set in the Tuplets dialog box and opens with these settings the next time you choose the command.

Using the Tuplet Command

To create tuplets with the Tuplet command:

1.	Select those notes you want grouped into a tuplet.

0	2.	Choose Notes>Group>Tuplet.

Overture produces the Tuplets dialog box.

3.	Enter the desired tuplet value.

0	4.	Click the desired tuplet style.

1	5.	Check the desired tuplet options.

2	6.	Click the OK button.

Overture groups the selected notes into a tuplet of the specified value using the notation and playback options selected in the Tuplets dialog box.


Notes>Group>Glissando

Notes/Group/Glissando

Choose this command to connect the selected notes with a straight line glissando. Generally, glissandos connect two neighboring notes (the highest and lowest in the glissando). If you select more than two notes, Overture creates a glissando between the first and last notes in the selection.

0	You can modify the angle and length of any glissando by clicking and dragging either end. You can modify the vertical or horizontal position of any glissando by clicking and dragging its middle.

1	MIDI playback is unaffected by glissando marks in a score. If you want to hear a glissando effect in MIDI playback, record a pitch bend event or draw it in the Graphic window.


Notes>Group>Glissando Wavy

Notes/Group/Glissando Wavy

Choose this command to connect the selected notes with a wavy glissando. Generally, glissandos connect two neighboring notes (the highest and lowest in the glissando). If you select more than two notes, Overture creates a glissando between the first and last notes in the selection.

0	You can modify the angle and length of any glissando by clicking and dragging either end. You can modify the vertical or horizontal position of any glissando by clicking and dragging its middle.

1	MIDI playback is unaffected by glissando marks in a score. If you want to hear a glissando effect in MIDI playback, record a pitch bend event or draw it in the Graphic window.


Notes>Flip…
Notes>Flip

Notes/Flip

Choose the Flip command to produce a submenu of flip options.

0	Overture changes the selected notes according to the command you choose in the Flip submenu.

See:

Notes>Flip>Direction

0	Notes>Flip>Enharmonic

1	Notes>Flip>Sharps to Flats

2	Notes>Flip>Flats to Sharps


Notes>Flip>Direction

Notes/Flip/Direction

Choose this command to flip the direction of most selected symbols. If, for instance, you select a slur and choose Notes>Flip>Direction, Overture inverts the slur.


Notes>Flip>Enharmonic

Notes/ Flip /Enharmonic

Choose this command to change the spelling of a note to its enharmonic. For example, if you select an F#, then apply the Enharmonic command, Overture changes the note to a Gb.


Notes>Flip>Sharps To Flats

Notes/ Flip /Sharps To Flats

Choose this command to flip a note from its sharped version to its flatted version. For example, if you select a G#, this command changes it to an Ab.


Notes>Flip>Flats To Sharps

Notes/ Flip /Flats To Sharps

Choose this command to flip a note from its flatted version to its sharped version. For example, if you select Bb, this command changes it to an A#.


Notes>Stem

Notes/Stem

Choose the Stem command to produce a submenu of stemming options.

0	Overture stems the selected notes according to one of the options in the Stem submenu.

See:

Notes>Stem>Stem Up

0	Notes>Stem>Stem Down

1	Notes>Stem>Hide Stem

2	Notes>Stem>Show Stem

3	Notes>Stem>Set Stem Height


Notes>Stem>Stem Up

Notes/Stem/Stem Up

Choose this command to make the stems of all selected notes point up.


Notes>Stem>Stem Down

Notes/Stem/Stem Down

Choose this command to make the stems of all selected notes point down.


Notes>Stem>Hide Stem

Notes/Stem/Hide Stem

Choose this command to hide the stems of all selected notes.

0	This is useful when you want to create a tablature staff that shows only frets and strings, but no stems. Tablature staves are normally used in conjunction with a standard notation staff.


Notes>Stem>Show Stem

Notes/Stem/Show Stem

Choose this command to show the stems of any selected notes.


Notes>Stem>Set Stem Height

Notes/Stem/Set Stem Height

Choose this command to set the stem height to your own specifications. Choosing this item opens the Stem Height dialog box. Set the numerical field to your stem height or to the default height indicated in parenthesis.


Notes>Display on Prev Staff

Notes/Display on Prev Staff

Choose this command to display the selected notes on the staff above their current one.

0	Use this command for cross-staff beaming. See Cross-Staff Beaming for more information.

1	The Display on Prev Staff command does not actually move MIDI data from one track to another—it only changes which staff displays the notes. If you wish to move MIDI data to the previous track, use the Move to Prev Track command (discussed in Move to Prev Track).


Notes>Display on Next Staff

Notes/Display on Next Staff

Choose this command to display the selected notes on the staff below their current one.

0	Use this command for cross-staff beaming. See Cross-Staff Beaming for more information.

1	The Display on Next Staff command does not actually move MIDI data from one track to another—it only changes which staff displays the notes. If you wish to move MIDI data to the next track, use the Move to Next Track command (discussed in Move to Next Track).


Notes>Move to Prev Track

Notes/Move to Prev Track

Choose this command to move the MIDI data that’s notated by the selected notes to the track notated immediately above.

0	When you choose this command, Overture actually moves the selected notes to the previous track, converts them to raw MIDI data, then transcribes them again. This causes all marks, beam adjustments, and the like to be lost.

1	Use this command to correct split-point transcription errors, for example, when Overture notates a note played by the right hand as belonging to the left hand.

2	The Move to Prev Track command actually moves MIDI data from one track to another. If you wish only to notate the selected notes on the previous staff (as for cross-staff beaming), use the Display on Prev Staff command (discussed in Display on Prev Staff).


Notes>Move to Next Track

Notes/Move to Next Track

Choose this command to move the MIDI data that’s notated by the selected notes to the track notated immediately below.

0	When you choose this command, Overture actually moves the selected notes to the next track, converts them to raw MIDI data, then transcribes them again. This causes all marks, beam adjustments, and the like to be lost.

1	Use this command to correct split-point transcription errors, for example, when Overture notates a note played by the left hand as belonging to the right hand.

2	The Move to Next Track command actually moves MIDI data from one track to another. If you wish only to notate the selected notes on the next staff (as for cross-staff beaming), use the Display on Next Staff command (discussed in Display on Next Staff).


Notes>Notate As…
Notes>Notate As

Notes/Notate As

Choose the Notate As command to produce a submenu of choices.

0	Each choice alters the way notes are displayed in a score. This command is particularly useful for altering the appearance of scores that you’ve entered either by MIDI recording or by importing MIDI files.

See:

Notes>Notate As>Arpeggio

0	Notes>Notate As>Reduced Rests

1	Notes>Notate As>Swing Eighths

2	Notes>Notate As>Trill

3	Notes>Notate As>Triplets

4	Notes>Notate As>Turn

5	Notes>Notate As>Single Note

6	Notes>Notate As>Two Tied Notes


Notes>Notate As>Arpeggio

Notes/Notate As/Arpeggio

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as an arpeggiated chord.

0	This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.


Notes>Notate As>Reduced Rests

Notes/Notate As/Reduced Rests

Choose this command to notate the selected note/rest combinations as staccato notes, that is, as notes without subsequent rests.

0	You can add the staccato markings of your choice using the symbols on the Articulations palette. See Articulations Palette Tools.

1	This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.


Notes>Notate As>Swing Eighths

Notes/Notate As/Swing Eighths

Choose this command to notate a selected pattern of dotted eighth and sixteenth notes as straight eighth notes.

0	This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data, nor does it affect playback unless you select Play Style>As Written or Play Style>In Swing. See Play Style for more information about Play Styles.


Notes>Notate As>Trill

Notes/Notate As/Trill

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a single trilled note.

0	This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.


Notes>Notate As>Triplets
Notes>Notate As>Triplet

Notes/Notate As/Triplet

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a triplet.

0	This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data, nor does it affect playback unless you select Play Style>As Written. See Play Style for more information about Play Styles.


Notes>Notate As>Turn

Notes/Notate As/Turn

Choose this command to notate the selected notes as a turn.

0	This command changes only the notation of the selected passage; it does not affect the actual MIDI data.


Notes>Notate As>Single Note

Notes/Notate As/Single Note

Choose this command to convert two tied notes to a single note.


Notes>Notate As>Two Tied Notes

Notes/Notate As/Two Tied Notes

Choose this command to convert a single note to two tied notes.


Notes>Transcribe

Notes/Transcribe

Choose this command to convert the selected raw MIDI data from the Graphic Window or a recording session into standard music notation. Choose this command also to convert existing notation to a different appearance after changing the quantization value. Raw data appears in the Score window as long rectangles. Their vertical position indicates their pitch, and their length indicates their duration.

0	To convert raw MIDI data into standard music notation:

1.	Select the desired section of raw notes.

0	2.	Choose Notes>Transcribe.

Overture converts the raw MIDI data into standard music notation.

This process of converting raw MIDI data into standard music notation happens automatically if you check the AutoTranscribe option in the Record Options dialog box. (Open this by choosing Options>Record Options.) While autotranscription may be suitable for simple scores, there are a couple of reasons you may opt to transcribe raw MIDI data into standard notation manually:

•	You want to assign different notes to different voices manually.

If you select raw MIDI notes individually in the Score window, assign them to a voice, then manually transcribe them (using the Notes>Transcribe command), you can fine-tune any complicated voicings in your score.

•	You want to apply different transcription quantization values to different passages.

You can select raw MIDI notes individually in the Score window, select a transcription quantize amount for just that passage, then manually transcribe the MIDI data into standard music notation using the Notes>Transcribe command. This eliminates any transcription quantization errors that may occur from applying a common transcription quantization amount to an entire score. For a detailed example of this process, see Transcription Quantization and Manual Transcription.

0	For more information about autotranscription, see Record Options.


Notes>Notes to Raw

Notes/Notes to Raw

Choose this command to convert the selected standard notation into raw MIDI data. There are two reasons for converting standard notation back into raw MIDI data:

•	It lets you reassign notes to different voices.

If you don’t like the way Overture voiced a certain passage, you can select it, choose Notes>Notes to Raw, then selectively transcribe various notes back into standard notation one voice at a time (using the Notes>Transcribe command).

•	It lets you apply different transcription quantization values to selected passages.

If Overture transcribes a particular passage incorrectly, select it, choose Notes>Notes to Raw, set a new transcription quantize amount, then transcribe the raw MIDI data back into standard music notation using the Notes>Transcribe command. It is easier, however, to use the Notes>Transcribe command directly on the incorrect passage. For a detailed example of this process, see Fixing Transcription Quantization Mistakes.

Raw MIDI data appears in the Score window as long rectangles; their vertical position indicates their pitch, and their length indicates their duration.


Notes>Notes to Tablature

Notes/Notes to Tablature

Choose Notes>Notes to Tablature to transcribe selected notes to a tablature staff automatically. There can be as many as eight lines in the tablature staff. If you insert the tablature staff below a bass clef, it automatically contains four lines to accommodate bass tablature. If you insert the tablature staff below a treble clef, it automatically contains six lines to accommodate guitar tablature. You can override the number of lines by configuring the clef in the staff display in the Setup Track dialog box.

Notes to Tablature is enabled only when there is a tablature staff directly beneath the staff containing selected notes. Create a tablature staff by:

•	using the Setup Track dialog box to select the tablature clef. This converts the current staff to a tablature staff.

Or

•	inserting a new staff with the Staff tool’s tablature option

Overture manually displays tablature staves at 125% scale to increase the legibility of the small tab notes.You can change this in the Setup Track dialog box.

The Tablature Settings Dialog Box

Choosing Notes>Notes to Tablature opens the Tablature Settings dialog box.

The Tablature Setting dialog box has numerous elements:

•	Tuning Parameters. You can assign a pitch to each of the tablature staff lines. You usually assign the strings to standard guitar or bass tunings if you insert the tablature staff below a treble or bass clef, respectively. If there are more than six lines in the tablature staff, however, the Tuning section displays a maximum of eight strings. You can set each string’s tuning field to any valid MIDI note (C2 to G8), using the mouse or typing the note and octave (i.e. B3).

•	Floating. Overture analyzes each measure in the selection and attempts to create tablature that stays within the number set in the Finger Span field for each measure.

•	Fixed. Overture attempts to create tablature at the fret position entered in the numerical field. If that fails, Overture attempts to stay within the number set in the Finger Span field.

Assign the fret position relative to a capo position by setting the Capo on Fret numerical field to a number between 1 and 31. For example, if you set the Capo on Fret field to 4, and the tablature number for a note is 5, the actual fret number is 9: 5 frets above the capo position. Set this field to 0 if you’re not referencing a capo position.

•	Glissandos, Slurs, and Ties option. Selecting Glissandos, Slurs, and Ties shows these markings on the tablature staff

Since tab notes have durations derived from their source notes in the staff above, deleting the second of two tied notes creates problems if you justify that measure. If you don’t want to see the second note, make it invisible

Editing the Tablature Staff

You can edit Tablature notes as follows:

•	Drag a tablature marking to a new string.

Overture automatically constrains which strings can accommodate a tablature marking. The tablature marking adopts the appropriate fret number to designate the correct pitch using the specified string tuning.

•	Control-drag a number to change the fret it references.

Be careful when using this feature because Overture doesn’t prevent you from referencing the wrong note.

•	Copy, paste, and delete tablature entries.

•	Show the duration of the tablature note by selecting a note and choosing Notes>Stem>Show Stem.


Notes>Set to Voice…
Notes>Set to Voice

Notes/Set to Voice

Choose the Set to Voice command to produce a submenu of Voice selections.

Overture sets the voice to the one you select in the Set to Voice submenu.


Notes>Set to Voice>1

Notes/Set to Voice/1


Notes>Set to Voice>2

Notes/Set to Voice/2


Notes>Set to Voice>3

Notes/Set to Voice/3


Notes>Set to Voice>4

Notes/Set to Voice/4


Notes>Set to Voice>5

Notes/Set to Voice/5


Notes>Set to Voice>6

Notes/Set to Voice/6


Notes>Set to Voice>7

Notes/Set to Voice/7


Notes>Set to Voice>8

Notes/Set to Voice/8


Overture Toolbars

The tool bar contains many of the tools and palettes you need for entering and editing scores in the Score window.

To view a Tool Bar, choose Windows>Tool Bars. You can view the following tool bars: Standard Tool Bar, the Main Tool Bar and Transport. A check appears next to each open tool bar.

For information on the tools and palettes, see:

Arrow Cursor Button

Eraser Button

Scale Button

Notes Palette Overview

Using the Notes Palette

Grace Notes

Cautionary Accidentals

Changing Existing Note Values

Groups Palette Overview

Using the Group Palette

The Harp Pedal Settings Dialog Box

Ottava Dialog Box

Ornaments Palette Overview

Using the Ornaments Palette

Using the Trill Tools

Using the Mordent Tools

Using the Fingering Tools

Articulations Palette Overview

Using the Articulations Palette

Using the Arpeggio Tool

Using the Tremolo Tools

Using the Pause Tools

Noteheads Palette Overview

Tablature Palette Overview

Guitar Palette Overview

Jazz Articulations Palette

Dynamics Palette Overview

Using Absolute Dynamics Tools

Using Crescendos and Decrescendos

Text Palette Overview

Using Bar Text

Using System Text

Using Rehearsal Marks

Using Page Text

Using the Expressions Palette

Using the Graphics Palette

Clefs Palette Overview

Staves Palette Overview

Barlines Palette Overview

Using the Barlines Palette

Using Repeats

Using the Ending Tools

Deleting Barlines

Transcription Quantize Button


Arrow Cursor Button

Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor tool. Use the Arrow Cursor to select or drag musical symbols, staves and text.

You can type the letter c (for “Cursor”) to activate the Arrow Cursor (unless you’re in one of Overture’s text entering modes). If you type the letter c and the Arrow Cursor is already active, Overture selects the last tool you used before selecting the Arrow Cursor tool. This is a great way to toggle between the Arrow Cursor and a specific tool during editing.

For more information, see:

Selecting Notation Symbols


Eraser Button

Click the Eraser button to select the Eraser tool. The cursor becomes an eraser  when you move it over the Score window. Use the Eraser tool to delete musical symbols by clicking them.

You can type the letter e (for Eraser) to activate the Eraser tool (unless you’re using one of Overture’s text-entering tools).

If you delete any note other than the last in the measure, the timing for notes later in that measure changes by the amount of time in the deleted note because Overture does not automatically insert a rest where the note was deleted. You alter note timings when you delete a note in either the Score or Graphic Windows.

For example, deleting the second quarter note in a measure with four quarter notes moves the last two quarter notes earlier by one quarter note. The Graphic Window reflects the altered timing immediately after the deletion; the changed timing is not evident in the Score Window until you justify or transcribe the measure.

Overture changes note timings after you delete a note except when

•	you enter notes with the mouse in the Graphic Window but they have not yet been transcribed

•	you record notes in real time but they have not yet been transcribed

•	you delete the last note in a measure

In the first two cases, the notes appear in the Score Window as bars. Deleting the middle note has no effect on the timing of the third note because the note timings are raw and have not been transcribed. The third case doesn’t require editing because there are no notes later in the measure to encroach on the time deleted with the note.

See Hold TImingfor avoiding these situations.


Scale Button

Click the Scale button to select the Scale tool. The cursor becomes a percent sign ( [image]) when you move it over the Score window. Use the Scale tool to resize notes, staves, clefs and dynamics.

To use the Scale tool:

1.	Click the Scale button.

2.	In the Score window, select the staff, notes, clef or dynamics you wish to scale.

Overture produces the Set Scale Factor dialog box.

3.	Enter the desired scale factor in the dialog box and click the OK button.

Overture scales the selected symbol(s) by the indicated factor.

Scaling Staves

It is sometimes desirable to create auxiliary staves that are smaller than other staves. Auxiliary staves are often used in chamber music as “cue” lines, showing what all the instruments are playing. Auxiliary staves are also used to notate suggested alternatives, corrections or embellishments to a section of the score. Overture allows you to scale staves from 25% to 250% of their normal size. To do so:

1.	Using the Scale tool, click a staff handle.

Staff handles are located at either end of the staff on the middle line.

If you’re not sure where the staff handle is, select Options>Show>Handles to display it.

2.	Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box, then click the OK button.

Overture scales the selected staff (and all musical symbols on that staff) by the indicated factor.

Scaling Multiple Staves

You can scale multiple staves by dragging a rectangle around the left edge of the staves you want scaled.

Scaling Notes

Sometimes alternate passages aren’t notated on a separate staff, but on the same staff as the main score. This is common in popular vocal music when repeated sections have slightly different melody lines. To indicate the alternate passage, use small notes. Overture allows you to scale notes from 25% to 250% of their normal size. To do so:

1.	Using the Scale tool, click a note or drag a rectangle around a group of notes.

Overture opens the Set Scale Factor dialog box.

2.	Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box and click the OK button.

Overture scales the selected note(s) by the indicated factor.

It’s also common to use small notes to indicate rapid note passages or other types of melodic ornamentation.

Scaling Clefs

To scale clefs:

1.	Using the Scale tool, click a clef.

You cannot scale the first clef in a score; you can only scale clefs in the middle of a score.

2.	Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box and click the OK button.

Overture scales the selected clef by the indicated factor.

Scaling Dynamics

Sometimes different voices on a staff have different dynamics levels. You can scale the various dynamic markings to indicate more clearly which dynamics refer to which voice. To do so:

1.	Using the Scale tool, click a dynamics marking (or draw a rectangle around a group of dynamics).

2.	Select a scale factor in the Scale Factor dialog box and click the OK button.

Overture scales the selected dynamic(s) by the indicated factor.


Notes Palette Overview

The Notes palette above contains the following tools:

•	Notes: Select one of these tools to insert a note of that value. The palette contains (from left to right): double whole note, whole note, half note, quarter note, 8th note, 16th note, 32nd note, 64th note, 128th note.

•	Rests: Select one of these tools to insert a rest of that value. The palette contains (from left to right): double whole rest, whole rest, half rest, quarter rest, 8th rest, 16th rest, 32nd rest, 64th rest, 128th rest.

•	Accidentals: Select one of these tools to insert an accidental. The palette contains (from left to right): sharp, flat, natural, double sharp, double flat, courtesy sharp, courtesy flat, courtesy natural, courtesy double sharp, courtesy double flat.

[Control-click] a note with an Accidental tool to apply that accidental to all notes of the same pitch for the remainder of the measure.

•	Augmentation Dots: Select one of the three augmentation dot tools to turn the selected note or rest tool into a dotted note or rest.

•	Tuplet: Use this tool to turn the selected note or rest tool into a tuplet whose value was last defined in the Tuplets dialog box. The default tuplet value is a triplet. We discuss the Tuplets dialog box in Group>Tuplet.

•	Grace Note: Use this tool to insert a grace note into your score. See Grace Notes for more information.

For more information, see:

Using the Notes Palette

Grace Notes

Cautionary Accidents

Changing Existing Notes Values


Using the Notes Palette

Use the Notes palette to insert notes, rests, or accidentals. You can use the Notes palette with the mouse or with a combination of the mouse and the keyboard.

Mouse Entry Method

To insert notes, rests or accidentals using only the mouse:

1.	Select the voice you’d like to enter from the Voice pop-up voice menu at the bottom of the Score window.

Alternatively, you could type Control-1 through Control-8 to select voices 1-8. If you type Control-0, Overture displays all voices but enters notes only on Voice 1.

2.	Select the desired symbol from the Notes palette (or pop-ups menu).

Here are three examples: note selection; rest selection; and accidental selection.

3.	Move the cursor to where you want to place the symbol.

The cursor becomes a crosshair when you move it over the Score window. We discuss all the different cursor types in Cursors in the Score Window.

Position notes both vertically and horizontally. If Auto Position is checked in the Options menu, then horizontal placement is automatically justified according to the measure’s Beat Chart and the note might not be inserted exactly where you click. Spacing within beats is determined by the current Allotment Table.

Position rests horizontally within the staff. If you have checked Auto Position in the Options menu, then Overture automatically justifies horizontal placement according to the measure’s Beat Chart and might not insert the rest exactly where you click. The current Allotment Table determines spacing within beats.

Position accidentals by clicking the cursor on the note to which you wish to apply the accidental.

4.	Click the mouse to insert the symbol in the score.

Entering Notes in the Clef Above or Below the Track

It is occasionally useful to enter notes in a different clef without changing the track’s clef. For example, in a grand staff, bass notes that temporarily move into the treble clef register are better represented in the treble clef than by either ledger lines or changing the bass to a treble clef while those notes are active.

Overture provides a method for entering notes in a track above or below the track that actually owns the notes:

•	[Control-click] to enter a note which appears where you click, but belongs to the track below.

•	[Alt-click] to enter a note which appears where you click, but belongs to the track above the note.

Understanding the distinction between where notes appear and which track owns them is crucial when you edit a track. For example, double-clicking to select all notes in a track’s measure does not select a note that appears in that track but is owned by the track above or below.

Keyboard and Mouse Entry Method

You can use keyboard shortcuts to select tools from the Notes palette without using the mouse. The table below shows the relationship between keys and Notes palette values.

Key	Function
0	Select breve note
1	Select whole note
2	Select half note
4	Select quarter note
8	Select eighth note
6	Select sixteenth note
5	Select thirty-second note
3	Toggle triplet on or off
.	Toggle augmentation dot on or off
r	Toggle between note or rest
s	Select accidental sharp tool
f	Select accidental flat tool
n	Select accidental natural tool
g	Toggle grace note on or off

To enter notes using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse:

1.	Select the voice you’d like to enter from the Voice pop-up voice menu at the bottom of the Score window.

Alternately, you could type control-1 through Control-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control-0 to select all voices.

2.	Type the number key corresponding to the duration of the note you wish to enter.

For example, to select an eighth note, type 8.

3.	Position the cursor in the score and click.

Overture enters the note in your score.

To enter dotted notes using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse:

1.	Type the number key corresponding to the duration of the note you wish dotted, then type the period key.

For example, to enter a dotted sixteenth note, type 6, then type ..

2.	Position the cursor in the score and click.

Overture enters a dotted note in your score.

To enter rests using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse:

1.	Type the number key corresponding to the duration of the rest you wish to enter.
For example, if you wanted to insert an eighth note rest, type an 8.

2.	Type an r to specify that you want to enter a rest of this value.

3.	Position the cursor in the score and click.
Overture enters the rest in your score.
You can cycle through rest durations by typing the r repeatedly. Also, you can enter dotted rests by typing the period key as described previously.

To convert notes to rests:

1.	Select the note you want to convert.

2.	Type r.

Overture converts the note to a rest of the same duration.

To enter accidentals using a combination of the keyboard and the mouse:

1.	Type the keyboard equivalent for your desired accidental: s to select the accidental sharp, f to select an accidental flat, n to select an accidental natural.

2.	Click the note to which you want to assign the accidental.

Overture enters the accidental next to the note. MIDI playback recognizes accidentals and plays them at their proper pitch.


Grace Notes

Grace notes require a special entry method because their notation does not automatically dictate an actual MIDI playback duration. To enter grace notes:

1.	From the Notes palette, select the note tool that corresponds to the playback duration of the grace note you wish to enter. For example, if you want your grace note to play as though it were a 128th note, select the 128th note tool. Obviously, if you select a note of greater duration (like an eight note or quarter note), the grace note will not actually sound like a grace note in MIDI playback.
2.	Click the Grace Note tool to select it (or type g).
3.	Move the cursor to the desired position in the score and click
4.	or
5.	Select the note to be made into a grace note.
6.	Type g.

Overture changes the note to a grace note both in the score and in the MIDI track.


Cautionary Accidentals

Normally, an accidental affects only the pitch to which it’s assigned and only for that measure. Because of this, Overture does not insert accidentals before any other affected pitches in the measure. If, however, you wish to apply cautionary accidentals to other affected notes:

1.	Select the desired accidental tool from the Notes palette.
2.	[Alt-click] the note to which you wish to apply the cautionary accidental.


Changing Existing Note Values

You can change the value of any note in a score by selecting it, then selecting a new note value from the Notes palette. For example, to change a quarter note into an eighth note:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the desired note in the score.
2.	The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned over a note.
3.	Click the note to select it. If you want to change more than one note, you can shift-click multiple notes to select them.
4.	Type the keyboard equivalent for the note value to which you wish to change the selected note(s). In this example, you would type 8 to change the selected note into an eighth note.
Effect of Changing Note Values on MIDI Duration

Overture intelligently decides whether or not to change the MIDI duration of an altered note based on how you entered that note into Overture. Specifically:

•	If you recorded the note in real-time or imported it from a MIDI file or Vision file, Overture does not change the MIDI duration of the altered note, thus preserving the feel of the piece.

•	If you entered the note in any other way, for example from the Notes palette or using the Step Input window, Overture changes the MIDI duration of the note to 80% of its new notated value.

To adjust the MIDI note duration manually, use either the Graphic window or Notes>Modify Notes (as discussed in Modify Notes).


Groups Palette Overview

Overture groups notes differently depending on the type of tool you selected. The following describes each of the tools in the Groups palette:

•	Slur. Use this tool to create a slur across a selected group of notes. Using this tool is the same as grouping notes and choosing Notes>Group>Slur. Slur symbols do not affect MIDI playback.

•	Dotted Slur. Use this tool to create a dotted slur across a selected group of notes. Dotted slur symbols do not affect MIDI playback.

•	Tie. Use this tool to tie together any notes of common pitch within a selected group. Using this tool is the same as grouping notes and choosing Notes>Group>Tie. MIDI playback recognizes tied notes and plays them properly.

•	Dotted Tie. Use this tool to tie together any notes of common pitch within a selected group. MIDI playback recognizes tied notes and plays them properly.

•	Insert Straight Glissando. Use this tool to create a straight line glissando between two adjacent notes. Using this tool is the same as selecting two notes and choosing Notes>Group>Glissando -. Glissandos do not affect MIDI playback.

•	Insert Wavy Glissando. Use this tool to create a wavy line glissando between two adjacent notes. Using this tool is the same as selecting two notes and choosing Notes>Group>Glissando ~. Glissandos do not affect MIDI playback.

•	Group as New Tuplet. Use this tool to group selected notes into a tuplet of any kind. This tool produces a Tuplets dialog box in which you define the value, style, and characteristics of the tuplet. We discuss the Tuplets dialog box in Group>Tuplet. Using this tool is the same as grouping notes and choosing Notes>Group>Tuplet.

•	Reapply Tuplet to Group. Use this tool to group selected notes into the type of tuplet last defined by the Tuplets dialog box. This tool makes it easy to apply common tuplet values quickly to many groups of notes.

•	Half Pedal Sign. Use this tool to instruct the pianist to press the damper pedal down at the beginning of the sign and release it halfway at the half pedal mark (the raised bump). Move the half pedal mark by placing the cursor over the mark (the drag cursor appears), and dragging it to the desired location. Control- dragging the half pedal mark copies it to a new location within the same half pedal sign.

•	Full Pedal Sign. Use this tool to tell the pianist to press the damper pedal down at the beginning of the sign and release it at the end. Move the pedal mark by putting the cursor over the sign. The drag cursor appears. Drag the sign to the new location.

•	Harp Pedal Sign. Use this tool to enter and edit Salzedo Harp pedal positions. Once you place the harp pedal symbol, a dialog appears so you can set  the pedal markings to different positions.

You can also double-click any harp pedal symbol to open the Harp Pedal Settings dialog box. See The Harp Pedal Settings Dialog Box.

•	Parenthesized Notes Sign. Use this tool to enclose selected notes in parentheses.

•	Bracket Sign. Use this tool to group notes where you have written some information about them.

•	Brace Sign. Use this tool to group lyric verses.

For more information, see:

Using the Groups Palette

0	Harp Pedal Settings

1	Ottavas


Using the Groups Palette

Use the Groups palette to group notes into slurs, glissandos, tuplets or ties. To use the Groups palette:

1.	Select the type of group you want from the Groups palette.
2.	Drag a rectangle around the notes you want grouped.
3.	Release the mouse button. Overture groups the notes with the selected musical symbol. The group symbol has editing handles so you can move or reshape the symbol immediately after inserting it.
4.	Click elsewhere in the score or select another tool to hide the editing handles.

Editing Ties

You can reshape and reposition any tie in a score.

To change the height of a tie symbol’s arc:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of a tie. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.
2.	Drag the center vertically to change the arc of the tie symbol.

To change the position of either endpoint on a tie symbol:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over either end of a tie. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.
2.	Drag the end to change its position in the score.

To flip the arc direction of a tie symbol:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of a tie or either of its endpoints. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.
2.	Click the tie with the Drag Cursor. Overture selects the tie and displays its three editing handles.
3.	Choose Notes>Flip>Direction. Overture flips the arc direction of the tie.
4.	Reposition the tie mark as desired.

To nudge a tie up or down:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over a tie. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.
2.	Click the tie with the Drag Cursor. Overture selects the tie and displays its three editing handles
3.	Press an arrow key (left, right, up, or down) to nudge the arc in the indicated direction

Editing Slurs

You can reshape and reposition any slur in a score. Each slur has four editing handles that allow you to bend a slur into most any shape. This section discusses how to edit slur symbols in a score.

Slurs have four editing handles: one at each end of the slur and two control points positioned away from the curve.

To change the shape of a slur:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the arc of a slur. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor.
2.	Drag the cursor to change the shape of the slur. You can reposition either endpoint by dragging it.  You can change the slur’s curvature by dragging anywhere else along the arc. Overture reshapes the slur as though you had actually dragged its control point. You can even create S-shaped slurs by pushing and pulling on the slur and its endpoints.

To flip the arc direction of a slur symbol:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the arc of a slur. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor.
2.	Click the slur with the Drag Cursor. Overture selects the slur and displays its four editing handles.
3.	Choose Notes>Flip>Direction. Overture flips the arc direction of the slur.

Editing Glissandos

You can change the length and slope of any glissando.

To change the length or angle of a glissando:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over either end of the glissando. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.
2.	Drag the end either vertically or horizontally to change the slope and/or length of the glissando.

To change the vertical or horizontal position of a glissando:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of the glissando. The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.
2.	Drag vertically or horizontally to change the position of the glissando.

Editing Tuplets

Overture allows you to insert many different styles of tuplets, but all can be repositioned and reshaped by dragging their editing handles.

Editing handles for straight-line tuplet markers are positioned on the corners and immediately below the number.

Editing handles for curved tuplet symbols are positioned around the curve and are used like slur editing handles.

Complex Tuplets

Overture has two complex tuplet figures:

•	nested tuplets

•	mixed duration tuplets.

Nested Tuplets

Use nested tuplets to play the triplet figure below.

To create this nested triplet figure:

1.	Enter one eighth note, three sixteenth notes and one eighth note.
2.	Use the tuplet tool to convert the three sixteenth notes into a three-in-the-time-of-two tuplet figure (conventional triplet).
3.	Use the tuplet tool again to convert the eighth notes and the sixteenth note triplet figure into a three-in-the-time-of-two tuplet figure. The nested tuplet pattern results. The three sixteenth note triplets occupy the same amount of time as one eighth note of the triplet figure because the sixteenth notes were already a triplet when they were nested into the enclosing eighth note triplet figure.
Mixed Duration Tuplets

You can convert a selection containing different durations into a tuplet.

Overture calculates the resulting durations as if each duration were the only duration being converted. For example:

1.	Enter one eighth note, two sixteenth notes and one eighth note.
2.	Use the tuplet tool to convert the entire four note passage into a three-in-the-time-of-two tuplet figure (conventional triplet). Overture creates the mixed duration tuplet. The two sixteenth notes occupy the same amount of time as one eighth note of the triplet figure because they were not triplets prior to their inclusion in the eighth note triplet figure.


The Harp Pedal Settings Dialog Box

Double click the harp pedal symbol to open the Harp Pedal Settings dialog box. This dialog box provides an easy environment to manipulate the settings. Changes made to the Harp Pedal Settings dialog box affect only the symbol being edited, not subsequent insertions of harp pedal markings. Individual harp pedal markings can be copied and pasted.  Press the ctrl key while dragging to drag a copy of the pedal symbol.

The top of the dialog box contains the type of pedal symbol to display:

•	Graphic. Shows the settings as a graphic.

•	Letter. Shows the settings as a horizontal list of note names for each pedal.

•	Letter-Split. Same as above except left side is on the top and the right side is on the bottom.

•	Change. Pick which pedals to show as a change.  Changes are shown as letters.

The bottom of the dialog box contains the pedal settings:

•	Up. The pitch for that string is flatted.

•	Middle. The pitch for that string is natural.

•	Down. The pitch for that string is sharp.

To make changes, click above, on, or below the center line for each pedal. The string pitches are, from left to right: D, C, B, E, F, G, A. The vertical line divides the first three pitches, controlled by the left foot, from the last four, controlled by the right foot.


Ottava Dialog Box

Double-click on an ottava sign in the Score window to open the Insert Ottava dialog box.

You can move the Insert Ottava dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

MIDI playback recognizes ottava markings and transposes notes accordingly.

The left half of the dialog box has three radio buttons where you can select the type of ottava sign you wish to insert:

•	8va. Select this type to insert an ottava sign over the selected notes. An 8va ottava sign indicates that notes under the sign are to be played one octave higher than written.

•	8vb. Select this type to insert an ottava sign under the selected notes. An 8vb ottava sign indicates that notes over the sign are to be played one octave lower than written.

•	15ma. Select this type to insert an ottava sign over the selected notes. A 15ma ottava sign indicates that notes under the sign are to be played two octaves higher than written.

The right half of the dialog box has a series of check boxes and radio buttons that you use to determine the appearance of the inserted ottava sign:

•	Courtesies (8va). If an ottava sign extends across more than one line, checking this option causes a “courtesy” mark to be placed in parentheses at the beginning of each additional line.

•	va, vb, ma. Checking this option places the va, vb, or ma indications after the transposition number in the inserted ottava sign.

•	Brackets. Checking this option places a bracket after the ottava sign that extends all the way to the end of the selected region, where it ends in a downstroke to indicate the end of the passage.

Use brackets when an ottava sign extends over more than one note. If your ottava sign applies to only a single note, do not check the brackets option.

There are two types of brackets: Dashed and Dotted. Select the dashed option if you want your bracket to be a dashed line. Select the dotted option if you want your bracket to be a dotted line.


Ornaments Palette Overview

The following describes each of the tools in the Ornaments palette:

•	Insert Trills. There are six trill tools. Use the trill 1 and trill 2 marks to indicate a trill (some scores use different trill marks to indicate different trill directions or trill intervals). Use the Trill Section tool to insert a scalable trill section. Use the three Trill Accidental tools to indicate accidentals in a trill mark. Using the Trill Tools discusses all of these tools in detail.

•	Insert Mordents. There are three Mordent tools. Although there are sometimes different schools of thought, generally the short mordent indicates that you play the first three notes of a downward trill; the inverted mordent indicates that you play the first three notes of an upward trill; and the inverted long mordent indicates that you play the first five notes of an upward trill. Select the appropriate tool to create the desired mordent.

•	Insert Turn. Use this tool to create a turn (similar to the concluding four notes in a trill).

•	Insert Fingerings. There are five fingering tools that you can use to indicate which finger should play a particular note.

For more information, see:

Using the Ornaments Palette

Using the Trill Tools

Using the Mordent Tools

Using the Fingering Tools


Using the Ornaments Palette

Use the Ornaments palette to place ornaments over individual notes. To use the Ornaments palette:

1.	Select an ornament tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.	In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the ornament.

If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the ornament in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can manually place the ornament by dragging it before you release the mouse button.

If you hold down the Alt key when you click a note, Overture forces the ornament to go above the note. If you hold down the Control key when you click a note, Overture forces the ornament to go below the note.

Ornamenting Multiple Notes

The ornament tool remains selected after you insert an ornament. This allows you to insert multiple ornaments of a similar type. Additionally, you can apply the same ornament to all the notes in a contiguous group. To do so:

1.	Select an ornament tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.	Drag a rectangle around all the notes you wish to ornament.

Overture automatically places the ornament on all selected notes.

Deleting Ornaments

There are two ways to delete ornaments:

•	Click an ornament with the Eraser Cursor.

•	Select notes with ornaments attached to them and choose Notes>Delete>Articulations. For more information, see Delete.


Using the Trill Tools

The following sections discuss how to use Overture’s Trill tools.

Inserting a Trill Mark

To insert a trill over a note:

1.	Select one of the two Trill tools from the Ornaments palette.

2.	Move the cursor over the desired note.

3.	Click the note.

Overture places the selected trill symbol over the note.

You can force a trill mark to go above a note by holding down the Alt key when you insert it. You can force a trill mark to go below a note by holding down the command key when you insert it.

Trill marks affect MIDI playback if you check Play Trill/Tremolos in the Preferences dialog box.

Inserting a Trill Mark with a Trill Section

Many scores contain the tr mark along with a trill section. To insert a tr mark with a trill section:

1.	Select one of the two Trill tools from the Ornaments palette.

2.	Move the cursor over the desired note.

3.	Press and hold the mouse.

The tr mark appears over the note.

4.	While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse to the right.

Overture begins creating a trill section immediately following the tr mark.

5.	Release the mouse button when the trill section is the desired length.

Overture inserts the tr mark along with a trill section.

Adding a Trill Section to an Existing Trill Mark

Overture lets you add a trill section to an existing tr mark. To do so:

1.	Select the Trill Section tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.	Move the cursor over the note to which you wish to add the trill section.

3.	Press and hold the mouse button.

The trill section appears at its automatic placement position.

4.	While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse to the right or left to lengthen or shorten the trill section.

5.	Release the mouse.

Overture inserts the trill section.

Editing Trills

You can reposition any trill mark by dragging it.

To move a tr mark:

1.	Select the Arrow Cursor.

2.	Move the mouse over a tr mark in your Score window.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

3.	Drag the mark to reposition it.

If you move a tr mark with a trill section beside it, your edits affect both the tr and the trill section. Specifically, if you move the tr mark vertically, the trill section also moves vertically. If you move the tr mark horizontally, the length of the trill section changes.

If you want to move a trill section up or down without moving the tr mark:

1.	Select the Arrow Cursor.

2.	Move the mouse over the center of a trill section.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned
properly.

3.	Drag up or down to reposition the trill.

If you want to change the length of a trill section without moving the tr mark:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over either the right or left end of a trill section.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor when positioned properly.

2.	Drag horizontally to change the length of the trill section.

Inserting an Accidental into a Trill Mark

Some trills require accidental signs. These should appear between the tr and the trill section.

To insert an accidental in the trill marking:

1.	Select the desired Accidental tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.	Move the cursor over the note to which you wish to add the accidental mark.

3.	Press and hold the mouse button.

You’ll see an accidental mark appear over the note.

4.	While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse to position the accidental between the tr and the trill section.

5.	Release the mouse.

Overture inserts the accidental for the trill mark.

Tweaking a Trill’s Appearance

If you like, you can create a gap between the tr and the trill section, then move the accidental mark into the gap. To do so:

1.	Select the Arrow Cursor and move it over the left end of the trill section.

The cursor becomes a Drag Cursor.

2.	Drag the left end of the trill section to the right.

This produces a bigger gap between the tr and the trill section.

3.	Drag the accidental mark into the gap.


Using the Mordent Tools

To insert a mordent into a score:

1.	Select the desired Mordent tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.	In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the mordent marking.

If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the mordent in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can drag the mordent to position it manually.

You can force a mordent to go above a note by holding down the Alt key when you insert it. You can force a mordent to go below a note by holding down the Control key when you insert it.


Using the Fingering Tools

To insert a finger marking into a score:

1.	Select the desired Finger tool from the Ornaments palette.

2.	In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the finger marking.

If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the fingering in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can drag the finger mark to position it manually.

You can force a finger mark to go above a note by holding down the Alt key when you insert it. You can force a finger mark to go below a note by holding down the Control key when you insert it.


Articulations Palette Overview

The Articulations palette contains the following tools:

•	Tenuto. Use this symbol to indicate a pressure accent.

•	Staccato. Use this symbol to indicate a short, light accent.

•	Staccatissimo. Use this symbol for exaggerated staccato. This marking indicates a stronger effect than simple staccato, though is still a light accent.

•	Marcato. Use this symbol for moderate accents. This is stronger than a Staccatissimo.

•	Marcato with staccato. Use this symbol for short, moderate accents.

•	Sforzando. Use this symbol for heavy accents. This is stronger than a Marcato.

•	Inverted Sforzando. This symbol has the same effect as the Sforzando, but is used below notes.

•	Sforzando with staccato. Use this symbol for very strong, short, percussive accents (hammered). This is stronger than a Sforzando.

•	Inverted Sforzando w/staccato. This symbol has the same effect as the Sforzando w/staccato, but is used below notes.

•	Heavy Attack/Full Duration. Use this symbol for very strong, full duration accents. This is stronger than Sforzando w/staccato.

•	Heavier Attack/Full Duration. Use this symbol for excessively strong, full duration accents. This is the strongest accent.

•	Down Bow. Use this symbol in string notation to indicate down bows.

•	Inverted Down Bow. This symbol has the same effect as the Down Bow, but is used below notes.

•	Up Bow. Use this symbol in string notation to indicate up bows.

•	Inverted Up Bow. This symbol has the same effect as the Up Bow, but is used below notes.

•	Natural Harmonic. Use this symbol to indicate that the note is to be played as a natural harmonic.

•	Artificial Harmonic. Use this symbol to indicate that the note is to be played as an artificial harmonic. changing nut position with the first finger while holding harmonic with the fourth finger.

•	Plus. Use this symbol with different instruments to indicate different articulation effects. For example, use this symbol with woodwinds to indicate notes are to be played with a key click; use it with brass to indicate hand stopping; use it with strings to indicate pizzicato notes played with the left hand; or use it in jazz scores to indicate a du.

•	Tremolo 1. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate an eighth note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a very fast passages.

•	Tremolo 2. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate a sixteenth note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a fast passage.

•	Tremolo 3. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate a thirty-second note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a moderate tempo passage.

•	Tremolo 4. If indicating a measured tremolo, place this symbol on a note to indicate a sixty-fourth note tremolo. If indicating an unmeasured tremolo, use this symbol to indicate a tremolo in a slow passage.

•	Down Pedal. Use this symbol in piano notation to mark the depression of the damper pedal.

•	Up Pedal. Use this symbol in piano notation to mark the release of the damper pedal.

•	Toe Pedal. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate use of the toe.

•	Heel Pedal. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate use of the heel.

•	Toe-to-Heel. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate switching from toe to heel.

•	Heel-to-Toe. Use this symbol in organ notation to indicate switching from heel to toe.

•	Pause (Comma). Use this symbol to indicate a very brief pause (such as the length of a breath).

•	Grand Pause (Caesura). Use this symbol to indicate a pause at the end of a long phrase or section. This marking indicates a longer pause than a comma. Convention dictates that you always place a pause through the top space of a staff.

•	Fermata. Use this symbol to indicate a long held note or a long pause.

•	Inverted Fermata. This symbol has the same effect as a Fermata, but is used below notes.

•	Arpeggio. Use this symbol next to a chord to indicate an arpeggio.

With the exception of the four Tremolo tools, no symbols inserted with any of the articulation tools affect MIDI playback.

For more information, see:

Using the Articulations Palette

Using the Arpeggio Tool

Using the Tremolo Tools

Using the Pause Tool


Using the Articulations Palette

Use the Articulations palette to put articulations (such as staccato, bowing, and pedal marks) into your score. To use the Articulations palette:

1.	Select an articulation tool from the Articulations palette.

2.	In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the articulation.

If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the ornament in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can manually place the ornament by dragging it before you release the mouse button.

If you hold down the Alt key when you click a note, Overture forces the articulation to go above the note. If you hold down the Control key when you click a note, Overture forces the articulation to go below the note.

Articulating Multiple Notes

The articulation tool remains selected after you insert an articulation. This allows you to insert multiple articulations of a similar type. Additionally, you can apply the same articulation to all the notes in a contiguous group. To do so:

1.	Select an articulation tool from the Articulations palette.

2.	Drag a rectangle around all the notes you wish to articulate.

Overture automatically places the articulation on all selected notes.

You can also apply an articulation to any set of selected notes. To do so:

1.	Select the notes you want to modify.

2.	Tear off the palette.

This is very important. The feature only works when the palette has been torn off.

3.	Control click on the desired tool.

All selected notes change immediately to reflect the tool used.

Editing Notes with Attached Articulations

In most instances, if you edit a note or stem direction, Overture automatically repositions any attached articulations based on the note’s new position and stem direction.

Deleting Articulations

There are two ways to delete articulations:

•	Click an articulation with the Eraser Cursor.

•	Select notes with articulations attached to them and choose Notes>Delete>Articulations. For more information, see Delete.


Using the Arpeggio Tool

To insert an arpeggio:

1.	Select the arpeggio tool from the Articulations palette.

The cursor becomes a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Click any note in a chord.

Overture places an arpeggio mark to the left of the chord that spans the entire length of the chord.

3.	If you need to move the arpeggio symbol, drag the top of it to a new location.

Overture repositions the arpeggio wherever you release the mouse button.

4.	If you need to resize an arpeggio, drag the bottom of it to the desired length.

Overture lengthens or shortens the wavy arpeggio line when you release the mouse button.

If you add notes to or delete notes from an arpeggiated chord, Overture automatically resizes the arpeggio to span the entire length of the chord.


Using the Tremolo Tools

The tremolo tools contained in the Articulations palette are for bowed (or single note) tremolos. If you want to create tremolos between notes of different pitch, you’ll need to use tremolo beams. We discuss these in Tremolo Beams.

To create a single note tremolo:

1.	Select the desired tremolo tool from the Articulations palette.

Overture offers four different tremolo tools. We discuss these four tools in Articulations Palette Overview.

2.	In the Score window, click the note to which you want to add the tremolo.

If you click a note and immediately release the mouse button, Overture places the tremolo in its default position.

If you press and hold the mouse on a note, you can manually place the tremolo by dragging it before you release the mouse button.

You can add tremolos to a contiguous group of notes by dragging a rectangle around them.

MIDI playback is affected by tremolo symbols only if you check Play Trills/Tremolos in the Preferences dialog box (see Playback Preferences). Single slashes result in 8th note tremolos. Double slashes result in 16th note tremolos; triple slashes in 32nd note tremolos, and quadruple slashes in 64th note tremolos.


Using the Pause Tools

Put pause marks, unlike other symbols in the articulations palette, not directly above or below a note, but in the space where the pause is to occur. To put either a pause or a grand pause into a score:

1.	From the Articulations palette, select either Pause tool.

2.	In the Score window, press and hold the mouse on the note you want to pause after.

Overture, by default, shows the pause over the note.

3.	While still holding down the mouse button, drag the pause to the right to position it in the score.

Commas go above the staff to the right of the note. Grand pauses go through the top space of the staff to the right of the note.

4.	Release the mouse button to complete the insertion.


Noteheads Palette Overview

The following describes each of the tools in the Noteheads palette:

•	Standard Head. This is a standard note head. Use this tool if you want to convert a shaped head back into a standard head.

•	Invisible Head. Use this tool to make noteheads invisible. The stem and flags remain; only the notehead disappears.

•	Rhythmic Slash Head. Use this head to notate guitar or other strummed instrument parts. Generally, this head is used to indicate strumming with a specific rhythm. This head usually has a stem, but no pitch indication.

•	Percussion Head. Use this head to notate percussion parts.

•	Open & Closed Rhythm Heads. Use these heads to notate rhythm parts. Open rhythm heads represent whole notes and half notes; closed rhythm heads represent quarter notes and smaller.

•	Open & Closed Slash Heads. Use these heads to notate guitar or other strummed instrument parts. Generally, these heads are placed without stems or pitch, in the center of a staff. The open slash head represents whole notes and half notes; the closed slash head represents quarter notes and smaller.

•	Picture Music Heads (Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Ti). Use these shaped notes to indicate pitch. Open symbols represent whole notes and half notes; black symbols represent quarter notes and smaller. This notation system is most commonly used in gospel music.

Using the Noteheads Palette

To change the shape of a notehead:

1.	Select a notehead tool from the Noteheads palette.

2.	Position the cursor over the note whose head you wish to change.

The cursor becomes a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

3.	Click the desired note.

Overture automatically changes the notehead.

There are actually two fa heads although only one appears in the Noteheads palette. Notation uses different fa heads depending on whether the stem points up or down. Overture automatically uses the correct fa head depending on stem direction.

To change the shape of multiple notes:

1.	Select the notes you want to modify.

2.	Tear off the palette.

This is very important. The feature only works when the palette has been torn off.

3.	Control-click on the desired tool.

All selected notes change immediately to reflect the tool used.


Tablature Palette Overview

Each tool in the Tablature palette corresponds to a guitar fret number, where 0 is an open string, 1 is the first fret, 2 is the second fret, etc.

Using the Tablature Palette

Use the Tablature palette to replace standard noteheads with fret numbers on a tablature staff. Click a note to select it, then click one of the numbers in the Tablature palette. Overture replaces the standard notehead with the fret number.

To replace the multiple selected notes with fret numbers:

1.	Select the notes you want to modify.

2.	Tear off the palette.

This is very important. The feature only works when the palette has been torn off.

3.	Control-click on the desired tool.

All selected notes change immediately to reflect the tool used.

Creating Tablature

Assume you want to notate a score in tablature notation.

You must first create a tablature staff. To do so:

1.	Select the Tablature Staff tool from the Staves palette (see Chapter 24, “Staves Button”).

2.	Move the cursor just below the staff you want to notate.

The cursor becomes an upward-pointing crosshair (). This indicates that clicking will attach the new staff immediately below the staff to which it points.

3.	Click to insert the staff.

Overture inserts a new tablature staff.

Each line in a tablature staff represents a guitar string. The lowest line represents the low E-string, the next line up represents the A-string, and so on.

If your score contains an unused staff, you can click within it to select it, choose Score>Setup Track, then use the Setup Track dialog box to select an Instrument Name of Tablature. See Setup Track.

Also, you can create tablature staves for instruments such as four-string and five-string bass guitars by designing custom staves (as discussed in Staff Display Options).

Creating Tablature Notation

Now that your score contains a tablature staff, you can begin filling it with notation.

1.	Using the Notes palette, enter all the notes onto the tablature staff.

Remember to place notes on the line that represents the guitar string on which you want the note played.

2.	Select a fret number from the Tablature palette, then click the notes you wish to change.

Overture replaces standard noteheads with the fret number you select.

3.	Select all the notes in the entire tablature staff and choose Notes>Stem>Hide Stem.

Overture hides the stems, flags, and beams.

MIDI playback does not play tablature staves, nor do MIDI transpose commands change their pitch. If you want MIDI playback of a tablature staff, you must create an additional staff that contains traditional notation. If desired, you can then hide the traditionally notated staff in your printed score by using the Score>Hide/Show Staves command as discussed in Hide/Show Staves.


Guitar Palette Overview

The Guitar palette contains symbols to accurately notate guitar music. The finger markings and string numbers suggest the finger or string used to play the notes to which they are applied. The vibrato marking pops up to allow selection of symbols to denote other effects related to vibrato. You must tear the palette off to see the pop-up menu.

String Bend Markings

You can enter string bend markings into the score without needing to associate them with a note. Each bend marking includes a bend range number signifying the number of half steps the note is bent. [Alt-drag] the number to alter it within the allowable bend range of -3 to 3 steps. The default bend is 1/2 step and the resolution is within 1/4 steps.

When you enter a bend marking, dragging to the right extends the area in which the marking pertains. Select a bend marking by dragging a rectangle around it with the arrow cursor, or position the cursor over the marking until you see the drag cursor.

Edit the shape of the bend by dragging the edit handles. You can move selected bend markings using the arrow keys. Position the mouse over the left end of the bend until you see the move cursor and Alt-drag to move the bend marking. You can move the bend range number independently of the bend marking by positioning the cursor over the number until you see the drag cursor and dragging the number.

To summarize the bend markings:

•	Pre-bend. Bend the string prior to sounding the note.

•	Pre-bend, release. Bend the string prior to sounding the note, then release it to its normal pitch during the note’s duration.

•	Pre-bend, release over time. Bend the string prior to sounding the note, then release it to its normal pitch during the time contained within the dotted marking.

•	Bend up. Bend the string up after sounding the note.

•	Bend up/release. Bend the string up and then release it during the note.

•	Bend up/release over time. Bend the string up and then release it during the time contained within the dotted marking.

Barre at Fret Number

Enter the barre at fret number symbol by selecting it in the Guitar palette and clicking in the Score Window.

Double-clicking the barre at fret number symbol in the Score Window (not in the Guitar palette) opens the Barre Settings dialog box.

Use the Barre Settings dialog box to create bar at fret number symbols similar to the one shown below

The Barre Settings dialog box has numerous elements, as follows:

Type

These radio buttons represent different conventions for showing barre and fret positions. The three barre settings options in the Type section represent different notation conventions. Showing the B, C, or no letter differentiates the options in the Type section; the 1/2 is an example of the Amount (number of strings barred),and II is an example of the fret number referenced. You can edit the actual barre Amount and fret numbers are editable in the Score Window, as described below.

Show

Barre markings that are extended over time appear with a line that can be Solid, Dashed, or Dotted.

Selecting the Brackets option ends the line with a downward pointing bracket. [Alt-dragging] the bracket in the Score Window toggles Brackets on and off. If you deselect Brackets, the line still appears with its selected attribute but with no ending bracket.

Amount

The barre symbol can reference the following groups of strings:

•	All. Barre all strings. No marking is shown to denote this option.

•	1/6. Barre the highest string.

•	1/3. Barre the 2 highest strings; same as 2/6.

•	1/2. Barre the 3 highest strings; same as 3/6.

•	2/3. Barre the 4 highest strings; same as 4/6

•	5/6. Barre all strings except the lowest string.

Changing the Fret or Amount

[Alt-dragging] the barre at fret mark horizontally changes the fret. It does not change the Amount setting.

[Alt-dragging] (the barre at fret mark vertically changes the Amount setting. It does not change the fret number.

The direction [Alt-dragged] constrains which function you are editing. This eliminates inadvertent changes to either setting. For example, [Alt-dragging] first in a vertical direction changes only the Amount setting, even if you also drag horizontally.


Jazz Articulations Palette

The Jazz Articulations palette contains symbols commonly used for jazz notation. You can drag some of them to encompass more than one note; you can reposition all. The pop-up menu contains line textures and shapes to designate different intensities you can associate with their articulations.

Most of the signs have more than one name and meaning. Consult a jazz notation text to learn more about the terminology and use of jazz articulations. Here is a brief summary of terms:

•	Lift. Enter note via chromatic or diatonic scale beginning about a third below

•	Slide. Slide up or down to a note

•	Rip. Same as lift

•	Fall off. Opposite of lift

•	Flip. Sound note, raise pitch and drop into following note

•	Smear. Slide into note from below; reach correct pitch before the next note

•	Bend. Waver rapidly on indefinite pitches

•	Doit. Sound note then gliss upwards from 1 to 5 steps

•	Plop. Slide rapidly down diatonic scale before sounding the note

•	Shake. Vary the tone upwards, much as you do for a trill. Sustain note with vibrato, tremolo, or feedback effect.


Dynamics Palette Overview

The Dynamics palette contains two types of dynamics tools:

•	Absolute Dynamics tools. use these tools to mark absolute levels of the dynamic scale (such as pp, mf, ff).

•	Hairpin tools. use these tools to mark gradual changes in the levels of the dynamic scale (the hairpin crescendo and hairpin decrescendo)

For more information, see:

Using Absolute Dynamic Tools

Using Crescendos and Decrescendos


Using Absolute Dynamics Tools

The following sections discuss how to insert, copy, and edit dynamic markings and how to define MIDI playback of the markings.

Inserting Dynamic Markings

To insert an absolute dynamic marking:

1.	Select the desired absolute dynamics tool from the Dynamics palette.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Position the cursor at the point where you wish to insert the dynamic marking and click.

Overture places the selected dynamic marking at that point.

To insert a dynamic mark into all displayed staves in a system:

1.	Select the desired absolute dynamics tool from the Dynamics palette.

2.	Control-click the score.

Overture adds the selected dynamic mark to all displayed staves in the system.

To insert a dynamic mark into all displayed staves in a system as long as they have notes in that measure:

1.	Select the desired absolute dynamics tool from the Dynamics palette.

2.	Alt->click the score.

Overture adds the selected dynamic mark to all displayed staves in the system as long as that measure has notes in it.

Repositioning Dynamic Markings

To reposition a dynamics mark:

1.	Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor (or type C on the keyboard).

2.	Drag the desired symbol to its new location.

Shift-click to select more than one dynamic mark.

Shift-drag to constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction (whichever way you first move the mouse when beginning to drag).

You can select dynamics, as well as text, hairpins, repeats, chords, and Graphics palette objects, as a group and then drag them all to a new position.

You can drag dynamics anywhere, but they retain their track assignments. To change the track assignments, delete and reinsert them.

Copying Dynamic Markings

To copy a dynamics mark:

1.	Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor (or type c on the keyboard).

2.	Control-drag to copy the desired symbol and move the copy to another place.

Shift-click to select more than one dynamic mark on the same track.

Shift-Control-drag to constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction (whichever way you first move the mouse when beginning to drag).


Edit Dynamic Dialog Box

The Edit Dynamic Dialog Box

Double-click a dynamic in the Score Window to open the Edit Dynamic dialog box.

In the Edit Dynamic dialog box, press and hold the mouse on the the Dynamic field to open a pop-up menu showing all the dynamics settings. Set the type of playback to Volume or Velocity.  Set the Value field to the desired setting. Select the Play option to use the selected value setting during playback. Select the Change All Of This Type option to change other dynamics of the selected type to the selected Value setting.

MIDI Playback of Dynamic Markings

You can set the default dynamic playback values  in the preferences dialog box. To do so:

1.	Choose Options>Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box opens.

2.	Click the Dynamics tab.

The Dynamics tab moves to the front.

3.	Set a velocity value for each of the different absolute dynamics markings.

4.	Click OK.


Using Crescendos and Decrescendos

The following sections discuss how to insert and copy crescendo and decrescendo marks and how to edit their appearance.

Inserting a Hairpin

To insert a hairpin crescendo or decrescendo:

1.	Select the hairpin tool from the Dynamics palette.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Move the cursor to where you want the hairpin to start, then press and hold the mouse.

3.	Drag the mouse left to right to the point where you want the hairpin to end, then release the mouse.

Overture creates a crescendo.

OR

4.	Drag the mouse from right to left.

Overture creates a decrescendo.

To insert a crescendo followed by a decrescendo:

1.	Select the double hairpin tool.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Move the cursor to where you want the symbol to start.

3.	Drag from left to right.

Overture creates a crescendo followed by a decrescendo.

To insert a decrescendo followed by a crescendo:

1.	Select the double hairpin tool.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Move the cursor to where you want the symbol to end.

3.	Drag from right to left.

Overture creates a decrescendo followed by a crescendo.

Editing a Hairpin

To move or reposition the hairpin:

1.	Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor (or type c on the keyboard).

2.	Move the mouse into the open end of the hairpin.

The cursor becomes a Drag Cursor.

3.	Click to select the hairpin.

4.	Drag the handle at the closed end of the hairpin to change the slope of the hairpin.

5.	Drag either open ended hairpin handle to open or close the opening of the hairpin.

Alt-drag either of the open ended hairpin handles to move both stems of the hairpin proportionally.

6.	Drag anywhere within the open part of the hairpin to reposition it in the score.

You can select hairpins, as well as dynamics and rehearsal notes and drag them as a group.

You can drag hairpins anywhere, but they keep their track assignments. To change track assignment, delete and reinsert them.

Copying a Hairpin

To copy a hairpin:

1.	Click the Arrow Cursor button to select the Arrow Cursor.

2.	Move the mouse into the open end of the hairpin.

The cursor becomes a Drag Cursor.

3.	Click to select the hairpin.

4.	Alt-drag anywhere within the open part of the hairpin to copy it to the place you want.

Shift-Alt-drag to copy the hairpin and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.


Edit Hairpin Dialog Box

The Edit Hairpin Dialog Box

Double-click a hairpin, crescendo, or decrescendo in the Score Window to open the Edit Hairpin dialog box.

Set the type of playback to Volume or Velocity.  Set the Value field to the start, two middle, and ending values to be used dyring playback. Select the Play option to use the selected Value setting during playback. Select the Change All Of This Type option to change other hairpins of the selected type to the selected settings. Hairpins are played by sending MIDI volume or by changing note velocities over the duration of the hairpin


Text Palette Overview

The following describes each of the tools in the Text palette:

•	Insert Bar Text. This tool inserts text anchored to a specific measure on a specific staff.

•	Insert System Text. This tool inserts text anchored to the top of a system and to a specific measure. If you re-arrange a system, the text always stays at the top of the system.

•	Insert Rehearsal Mark. This tool inserts rehearsal marks in your score. Rehearsal marks are enclosed in boxes and are anchored to a specific measure and a relative staff location.

•	Insert Page Text. This tool inserts text anchored to a specific page. This is useful for titles, headers and footers.

Using any of the text tools causes the font toolbar to appear. Use it to select font, size, and style for the text.

For more information, see:

Using Bar Text

Using System Text

Using Rehearsal Marks

Using Page Text


Using Bar Text

Use bar text for written instructions that apply only to a particular measure and staff. Overture attaches bar text to both a specific measure and a specific staff as illustrated below:

•	Bar Text and Measure Example

If you create bar text above the second measure and then insert a new measure before it, the text now appears above the third measure since it stays attached to its original measure.

•	Bar Text and Staff Example

If you create bar text on the third staff and then insert two staves above it, the text now appears on the fifth staff since it stays attached to its original measure.

Inserting Bar Text

To insert bar text:

1.	Select the Bar Text tool from the Text Palette.

2.	In the Score window, drag a rectangle where you want to position the bar text.

Overture creates an empty text box in your Score window.

3.	Type the desired information into the text box.

To reposition a text box, drag its upper left handle. To resize the text box, drag its lower right handle.

4.	To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor.

Select the desired font characteristics from the [Font toolbar].

5.	To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box.

Repositioning, Copying, and Editing Bar Text

To reposition bar text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the bar text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Drag the bar text to a new location.

This repositions text relative to the original insertion measure— it does not attach the text to a different measure.

To copy bar text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the bar text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Alt-drag to move a copy of the bar text to a new place.

Shift-alt-drag to copy the bar text and constrain movement of the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

To edit bar text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the bar text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Double-click the bar text.

Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor.

3.	Change the text, font or box size as desired.


Using System Text

Use system text for written instructions that apply to all staves in a system. Overture attaches system text to a specific measure and to the top staff as illustrated below:

•	System Text and Measure Example

If system text is above the ninth measure and you insert eight measures at the beginning of the score, the system text now appears above the 17th measure since it stays attached to its original measure.

•	System Text and Staff Example

If you enter system text above the first staff, then add a staff above that, the system text moves to the topmost staff since system text always appears on the upper staff. No matter where you insert system text, it always appears on the top staff.

If you extract parts from a score that contains system text, each and every extracted part displays the text, since system text applies to all instruments in a system. For more information about extracting parts, see Extract Parts.

Inserting System Text

To insert system text:

1.	Select the System Text tool from the Text Palette.

2.	In the Score window, drag a rectangle where you want to position the system text.

Overture creates insertion cursor in your Score window.

3.	Type the desired information at the cursor.

4.	To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor.

Select the desired font characteristics from the Font toolbar.

5.	To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box.

Repositioning, Copying, and Editing System Text

To reposition system text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the system text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Drag the text to a new location.

This repositions text relative to the original insertion measure— it does not attach the text to a different measure.

You can select and drag text, as well as dynamics, hairpins, repeats, chords, and Graphics palette objects, as a group.

To copy system text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the system text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Alt-drag to move a copy of the text to a new place.

Shift-alt-drag to copy text and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

To edit system text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the system text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Double-click the text.

Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor.

3.	Change the text, font or box size as desired.


Using Rehearsal Marks

Use rehearsal marks to mark a score in various places (such as at certain tempo, key or meter changes, or at the entrance of prominent solo instruments). Overture attaches rehearsal marks to a specific measure and a relative staff as illustrated below:

•	Rehearsal Mark and Measure Example
If a rehearsal mark is above the ninth measure and you insert eight measures at the beginning of the score, the rehearsal mark now appears above the seventeenth measure (since it stays attached to its original measure).

•	Rehearsal Mark and Staff Example
If you enter a rehearsal mark above the first staff, then add three more staves above it, the rehearsal mark appears on the topmost staff (since it maintains its relative staff position).

Inserting Rehearsal Marks

To insert rehearsal marks:

1.	Select the Rehearsal Mark tool from the Text Palette.

2.	In the Score window, drag a rectangle where you want to position the rehearsal mark.

Overture creates an empty text box in your Score window.

3.	Type your rehearsal mark into the text box.

Generally, rehearsal marks consist of a single number or letter.

To resize the text box, drag its lower right handle. To reposition it, drag its upper left handle.

4.	To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor.

Select the desired font characteristics from the [Font toolbar].

5.	To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box.

Overture creates a rehearsal mark, which consists of a rectangular box surrounding the text you entered.

Repositioning and Editing Rehearsal Marks

To reposition a rehearsal mark:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the rehearsal mark.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Drag the rehearsal mark to a new location.

This repositions text relative to the original insertion measure— it does not attach the text to a different measure.

You can drag a rehearsal mark anywhere, but it keeps its track assignment. To change its track assignment, delete it and reinsert it.

To edit a rehearsal mark:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the rehearsal mark.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Double-click the rehearsal mark.

Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor.

3.	Change the text, font or box size as desired.


Using Page Text

Use Page text to insert titles, headers, footers, composer credits, copyright notices, publishing data, and so on. You can assign page text to any page (or pages), and you can position it anywhere on that page.

Use the Title Page dialog box to insert titles, instructions, composer credits, copyright notices, headers, and footers. See Title Page for a detailed description of how to use the Title Page dialog box.

Inserting Page Text

To insert page text:

1.	Select the Page Text tool from the Text Palette.

2.	In the Score window, click where you want to position the page text.

Overture displaysan editing box.

3.	Type the desired information into the text box.

To resize the text box, drag its lower right handle. To reposition it, drag its upper left handle.

4.	To assign a font, drag across the text with the I-beam cursor.

Select the desired font characteristics from the Font toolbar.

5.	To complete the insertion, select a different tool or click outside the text box.

Repositioning, Copying, and Editing Page Text

To reposition page text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the page text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor unless one of the text tools is selected, in which case, the cursor becomes an I-beam.

2.	Drag the text to a new location.

You can select and drag text, as well as dynamics, hairpins, repeats, chords, and Graphics palette objects as a group.

To copy page text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the page text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor unless one of the text tools is selected, in which case, the cursor becomes an I-beam.

2.	Control-drag to move a copy of the text to a new place.

Shift-Control-drag to copy page text and constrain movement to the horizontal or vertical direction first dragged.

To edit page text:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the page text.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor. If you use one of the text tools instead of the Arrow Cursor, the cursor becomes an I-beam when you move it over the text.

2.	Double-click the text.

Overture displays the text box and I-beam cursor.

3.	Change the text, font or box size as desired.


Using the Expressions Palette

The Expressions button contains a palette of commonly used musical terms. You can enter expressions anywhere in the Score Window and do not need to apply them to notes as you do other palette tools. Expressions are, however, owned by the track in which you enter them. Moving an expression to another track changes its ownership. When you finish moving or entering an expression, the track indicator (see Page View and Track Controls) shows the track that owns the expression.

You can create additional Expressions libraries or edit the existing library. Store additional Expressions Libraries in the Libraries folder, located in the folder that contains Overture. Specify the library to load when launching Overture in Libraries Preferences. Load another library during an Overture session by choosing File>Load Library.

You can play expressions by assigning them a controller and value, tempo, or patch.

The Edit Expressions Dialog Box

Double-click an expression in the Score Window to open the Edit Expression dialog box shown below. You can edit expressions here for changes that are not general enough to make in the library.

Appearance

The options in the top half of the dialog box determine how the expression appears. Set the Font, Size, and Style attributes in the same manner as in other Overture dialog boxes. Select multiple style attributes by using the Style pop-up menu several times. Selected style items have check marks beside them. You can change the text for that expression in the Edit Expression dialog box without affecting future uses of that expression from the palette. You can use this technique to create an expression that doesn’t exist in the library by changing the text to the new expression. You can permanently alter the text for that expression in the Expression Library by choosing File>Edit Library>Expressions and changing the text in the library. You can also insert to add expressions or delete expressions from the library.

Select Extract On All Tracks to include that expression with any extracted track. Select Print Text to print the expression when that track is selected for printing.

Some expressions span several notes. A line shows the time in which the expression is active. Use the Line Type option to configure how the line appears. The End Cap option determines how the line terminates. The various options are illustrated in the figure below.

	Dashed line, end cap up and down
	Dotted line, end cap down
	Dashed line, end cap up
	Solid line, no end cap
Click an expression to select it and shows its handles. Drag the handle at the end of the line to change its length. [Alt-drag] the end of the line to switch between the line types. [Alt-drag] the end of the line and move the mouse up or down to switch between end cap types.

Double-clicking the expression in the palette opens a similar dialog box without the Print Text, Line Type, and End Cap options. Those options are specific to either the track in which you enter the expression or the type of line present in the expression; you don’t know either attribute until you actually enter the expression in the Score Window.

Playback

You can play expressions in Overture by assigning them an appropriate tempo, patch, or controller and value. For example, if an expression denotes a staccato sound for a guitar, changing the patch to a muted guitar sound might sound better than creating short note durations. You can’t realistically play all expressions you specify. For example, to make gradual tempo changes, such as accelerando or ritardando, you need to use not the Edit Expression dialog box but the Controllers Pane.

If you double-click an expression in the Expressions palette, the Patch section contains program change numbers instead of patch names because Overture doesn’t know which track will eventually contain the expression and to which device the track will be assigned.


Using the Graphics Palette

The Graphics palette provides standard drawing tools. You can put the shapes anywhere in the Score Window. Although this does not connect them to notes, it connects them to a track. The track containing the cursor when you finish drawing or moving a graphic owns that graphic. The track indicator also shows the track that owns the graphic. See Page View and Track Controls.

Overture extracts graphics only with the track that owns them. All Graphics palette shapes print with PostScript printing attributes.

The solid, dashed, dotted, and thickness attributes affect lines (straight and curved), and borders for the rectangles and oval. Shift-dragging to create a rectangle (rounded or regular) or oval constrains the shape to a square or circle, respectively.

You can do the following to selected objects:

•	[Alt-drag] to move the object(s)

•	Select and drag graphics objects as a group, together with dynamics, hairpins, text, repeats, and chords

•	Resize by dragging the handles

•	Reassign line, border, thickness, or opaque/transparent attributes

Select Character Dialog Box

The symbol tool opens the complete character set for a selected font, allowing you to see all non-alphanumeric characters and symbols easily. Clicking in the Score Window with the symbol tool selected opens the Select Character dialog box. You can alter the Style, Font and Size attributes before you enter the character.

•	Double-clicking a character previously entered in the Score Window re-opens the Select Character dialog box.

•	Clicking a symbol onto a note or rest attaches the symbol to that note or rest.

•	Clicking a symbol onto blank space attaches the symbol to the measure where you put the symbol.


Clefs Palette Overview

The following describes each of the tools in the Clefs palette.

•	Insert Treble Clef. Select this tool to insert a treble clef at the insertion point.

•	Insert Bass Clef. Select this tool to insert a bass clef at the insertion point.

•	Insert Moveable C-Clef. Select this tool to insert a C-clef at the insertion point. It defaults to an alto clef (center line), though you can drag it up or down to create a tenor clef, mezzo-soprano clef, or soprano clef.

•	Insert Neutral Clefs 1 & 2. Select either tool to insert a neutral clef at the insertion point. Neutral clefs notate instruments of indefinite pitch (such as drums).

•	Insert Modern Tenor Clef. Select this tool to insert a modern tenor clef at the insertion point. Notes following a modern tenor clef sound one octave lower than written. This is particularly useful for the tenor voice.

•	Insert 8va Bossa Clef. Select this tool to insert an 8va bossa clef at the insertion point. Notes following an 8va bossa clef sound one octave lower than written. This is particularly useful for such transposing instruments as contrabassoon and double bass.

•	Insert Modern Baritone Clef. Select this tool to insert a modern baritone clef at the insertion point. Notes following a modern baritone clef sound one octave higher than written. This is particularly useful for high bass parts that normally would not move to another clef (such as bass voice, baritone voice, and tuba).

•	Insert Modern Piccolo Clef. Select this tool to insert a modern piccolo clef at the insertion point. Notes following a modern piccolo clef sound one octave higher than written. This is particularly useful for such high transposing instruments as piccolo and xylophone.

Clef Insertion Rules

When inserting clefs into a score you need to be aware of the following facts and conventions:

•	You can not replace one type of clef with another by simply selecting a new clef and clicking the old clef. Rather, you must click the old clef with the Eraser cursor, then enter a new clef in its place.

•	Exception: You can change the very first clef in the very first measure by clicking it with any clef tool.

•	When a clef change is to occur at the beginning of a measure, you must insert the clef at the end of the preceding measure, before the barline.

•	Exception: You can insert a clef change at the beginning of the very first measure because there is no measure prior to it.

•	Clefs shown to the left of each staff are not clef changes—they are merely courtesy clefs that illustrate the clef last used in the previous measure. You cannot click these clefs to change them. Rather, you must insert a clef change at the end of the preceding measure (as mentioned above).

•	Exception: You can change the very first clef in the very first measure by clicking it with any clef tool.

•	You can insert new clefs in the middle of measures as well as at the ends.

•	When you insert a new clef, Overture uses it to define the pitch of all notes on that staff until it comes across another inserted clef.

•	When you insert a new clef, Overture always shifts the vertical positions of the notes that follow, so that they maintain their correct pitches.

Using the Clefs Palette

Use the Clefs palette to insert clefs onto staves. To use the Clefs palette:

1.	Select the type of clef you want from the Clefs palette.

2.	In the Score window, click where you desire the new clef.

Overture inserts the clef and automatically shifts the vertical position of any notes that follow it.

Using the Moveable C-Clef

Overture lets you insert a moveable C-clef that you can drag up or down on the staff. To use the moveable C-clef:

1.	In the Clefs palette, click the moveable C-clef tool to select it.

2.	In the Score window, press and hold the mouse at the desired point.

The C-clef will appear.

3.	While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse up or down to change the position of middle C.

4.	Release the mouse when the moveable C-clef is in the desired position.

Overture automatically shifts the vertical position of any notes that follow the inserted clef.


Staves Palette Overview

The following describes each of the tools in the Staves palette:

•	Insert Bass Staff. Select this tool to add a single bass staff to your score.

•	Insert Treble Staff. Select this tool to add a single treble staff to your score.

•	Insert Tenor Staff. Select this tool to add a single tenor staff to your score.

•	Insert Alto Staff. Select this tool to add a single alto staff to your score.

•	Insert Tablature Staff. Select this tool to add a single, six-string tabulature staff to your score.

•	Insert Percussive Staff. Select this tool to add a single percussive staff to your score.

•	Insert Piano & Melody Staff. Select this tool to add three staves to your score. The top staff is a treble staff for a melody line. The bottom two staves (one treble and one bass) are braced for piano accompaniment.

•	Insert Piano Staff. Select this tool to add a piano staff (two braced staves—a treble and a bass) to your score.

•	Group With Bracket. Select the bracket ([) to connect independent staves into a loose grouping (for example, bracketing the four staves of a string quartet).

•	Group As System. Select the system line (|) to connect all the staves in a system.

•	Cross-Staff Barline. Select this tool to connect barlines between staves.

•	Group With Brace. Select the brace ({) to connect the different staves representing a single musical instrument (like the two staves of a piano score).

Inserting Staves

Use the Staves palette to create and insert new staves. To do so:

1.	From the Staves palette, select the tool for the staff configuration you wish to insert.

2.	In the Score window, either click the top part or an existing staff to add the selected staff(s) above it or click the lower part of an existing staff to add the selected staff(s) below it.

For example, to create a piano staff below an existing staff, select the Piano Staff tool and click just below the existing staff.

When you add a staff to a system, Overture adds the staff to all systems, but automatically hides it in all systems above the current system. This lets you create staves in the middle of the score without having to hide them manually (as discussed in Hide/Show Staves).

Creating Big Systems

If you add so many staves to a system that Overture can no longer fit the requested number of systems on the current page, then Overture reacts one of two ways:

•	It automatically lengthens the page. This is the default condition and results if you leave the General preference option named Auto Wrap Systems unchecked in the Preferences dialog box (see Auto Wrap Systems).

•	It automatically changes the requested number of systems so that the page length stays the same. This option results if you check the General preference option named Auto Wrap Systems in the Preferences dialog box (see Auto Wrap Systems).

Overture knows how many staves to place on a page by looking at the Systems per Page numerical in the Layout Page dialog box (accessed by choosing Score>Layout Page as discussed in Layout Page).

Deleting Staves

To remove a staff from a score:

1.	Select Options>Show>Handles.

This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you won’t need to select this option. Handles are always available—they’re just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it.

2.	Using the Eraser Cursor, click the editing handle of the staff you want deleted.

Grouping Staves

Use the Staves palette to create new staff groupings. To do so:

1.	From the Staves palette, select the tool for the staff grouping you wish to create.

2.	In the Score window, drag a rectangle around those staves you want grouped.

Editing Staff Grouping Symbols

You can move a single brace, bracket, or system grouping symbol by dragging it with the Arrow Cursor.

You can move all related braces, brackets, and system grouping symbols for the entire score [Control-dragging] them with the Arrow Cursor.

Deleting Staff Groupings

To remove any staff grouping, click it with the Eraser Cursor.


Barline Palette Overview

The following describes each of the tools in the Barlines palette.

•	Insert Standard Barline. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a standard barline. Use the standard barline to separate the music into measures.

•	Insert Double Barline. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a double barline. Use a double barline to partition separate sections of music.

•	Insert Close Repeat. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a close repeat. Use a close repeat to indicate the end of a repeating section of music. The close repeat affects MIDI playback only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats (as discussed in Play Style>Repeats). If you check the Repeats option and Overture encounters a close repeat, it searches backward through the score for an open repeat that doesn’t have a matching close repeat. It then repeats that section once. If it doesn’t find an un-mirrored open repeat, it repeats from the top of the score. For more information, see Using the Close and Open Repeat Tools.

•	Insert Open Repeat. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert an open repeat. Use an open repeat to indicate the beginning of a repeating section of music. The open repeat affects MIDI playback as discussed in the previous paragraph (but only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats).

•	Insert Dotted Barline. Select this tool and click in your score to insert a dotted barline. Dotted barlines are commonly used to subdivide measures of complex rhythm.

•	Insert Fine. Select this tool and click a barline in your score to insert a Fine. Use a Fine to indicate the end of a composition or of a movement within it.

•	Insert Single Measure Repeat. Select this tool and click in your score to insert a single measure repeat symbol. This symbol means that you’re to repeat the preceding measure in its entirety. It does not affect MIDI playback.

•	Insert Double Measure Repeat. Select this tool and click in your score to insert a double measure repeat symbol. This symbol means that you’re to repeat the preceding two measures in their entirety. It does not affect MIDI playback.

•	Insert First Endings. Select this tool and drag across your score to insert a first ending. Overture automatically names the first ending and inserts a close repeat at the end of it. Use first endings for any ending in your score except for the final ending. MIDI playback recognizes first endings in your score only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats. For more information, see Using the Ending Tools.

•	Insert Final Ending. Select this tool and drag across your score to insert a final ending. MIDI playback recognizes final endings in your score only if you check Options>Play Style>Repeats. For more information, see Using the Ending Tools.

You can type the letter b (for barlines) to activate the most recently selected barline tool (unless you’re in one of Overture’s text entering modes).

For more information, see:

Using the Barlines Palette

Using Repeats

Using the Ending Tools

Deleting Barlines


Using the Barlines Palette

To change one barline type into another:

1.	Select the desired barline tool from the Barlines palette.

The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Click the cursor close to the barline you wish to change.

Overture changes the existing barline into the type selected in the Barlines palette. Overture always changes the barline closest to where you click.

You cannot change an existing barline into a dotted barline. Dotted barlines are used within existing measures to subdivide complex rhythms. See “Using Dotted Barlines” below for more information.

Using Dotted Barlines

Some modern music uses dotted barlines to subdivide irregular meters into useful patterns. These patterns tell the performer which notes or beats to accent.

To insert dotted barlines into an Overture score:

1.	Select the Dotted Barline tool from the Barlines palette.

The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Click the cursor where you want to insert a dotted barline.

Overture inserts a dotted barline.

3.	To reposition the barline, simply click its handle (at the top of the barline) and drag it where you want it.

If you have trouble finding the barline handle, select Options>Show>Handles. This shows all barline handles.


Using Single and Double Measure Repeats

Overture supports both single and double measure repeats:

•	 Use this symbol to indicate the performer is to repeat the entire previous measure.

•	 Use this symbol to indicate the performer is to repeat the entire previous two measures. This symbol sometimes indicates the repetition of mixed value beats within a measure.

To insert a single or double measure repeat sign:

1.	Select either the Single or Double Measure Repeat tool from the Barlines palette.

The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Click the cursor where you want to insert the repeat.

Overture inserts the selected repeat.

3.	To reposition a repeat, select the Arrow Cursor and drag the symbol to the desired position.

MIDI playback does not recognize single or double measure repeats.

Using the Close and Open Repeat Tools

Overture’s MIDI playback recognizes open and closed repeat signs and plays them correctly. Specifically, when Overture encounters a close repeat it searches backward through the score for an open repeat that doesn’t have a matching close repeat. It then repeats that section once. If Overture doesn’t find any un-mirrored open repeats, playback jumps all the way back to the beginning of the score.

The following examples illustrate how to use repeats and how Overture plays them back.

Single Repeats

To insert and playback a single repeat:

1.	Select the Close Repeat tool from the Barlines palette.

The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Click anywhere in the measure to the left of the barline you wish to change.

Overture changes the existing barline into a Close Repeat.

3.	Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked.

If you don’t check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

4.	Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module.

Overture recognizes the repeat sign after measure 2 and causes MIDI playback to jump back to measure 1.

Specifically, Overture plays the measures in the following order:

1->2->1->2->3->4-> etc...

Nested Repeats

To insert and playback nested repeats:

1.	Select the Close Repeat tool from the Barlines palette.

The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Click anywhere in the measure to the left of the barline you wish to change.

Overture changes the existing barline into a Close Repeat.

3.	Select the Open Repeat tool from the Barlines palette.

The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

4.	Click anywhere in the measure to the right of the barline you wish to change.

Overture changes the existing barline into an Open Repeat.

5.	Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked.

If you don’t check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

6.	Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module.

Overture recognizes the repeat sign after measure 3 and causes MIDI playback to jump back to measure 2.

Specifically, Overture plays the measures in the following order:

1->2->3->2->3->4->...


Using the Ending Tools

Overture’s MIDI playback recognizes endings and plays them correctly. Overture supports two types of endings:

•	First Endings: Use this for the first ending in a song and for any endings other than the song’s final ending.

•	Final Ending: Use this to notate the final ending in a song.

To create an ending, select one of the ending tools and drag across the Score window beginning at the first measure in the ending and stopping at the end of the last measure in the ending. You can drag endings across systems if necessary.

You can place any text you want in an ending. To do so, double-click the upper right corner of an ending to open the Set Ending dialog box.

Use the Set Ending dialog box to put text into an ending. Generally, endings contain only numbers to identify them, but Overture lets you type any text you want into an ending. You may find it fastest to use the numbered checkboxes to name endings. For example, if you want the same ending for 1, 3, and 5, simply check the 1, 3, and 5 checkboxes— Overture automatically puts the numbers into the Set Ending dialog box’s Text field.

You can also define the ending’s font. Click the font button to open the Select Font dialog box, which is discussed in Font Button.

Read the next three sections to learn how to create first endings, middle endings and final endings using the ending tools and the Set Ending dialog box.

First Endings

To create a first ending:

1.	Select the First Ending tool from the Barlines palette.

2.	Move the cursor over the Score window.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

3.	Press and hold the mouse at the left edge of the first measure in the ending and drag to the end of the last measure in the ending.

Overture inserts a first ending, names it 1 and inserts a Close Repeat sign in the final measure of the ending.

4.	Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked.

If you don’t check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

5.	Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module.

Overture recognizes the repeat sign and causes MIDI playback to jump back to the first measure in the section.  After replaying the section, playback jumps to the measure after the first ending.

Middle Endings

Middle endings are identical to first endings, except they’re notated with an ending number other than 1. To create a middle ending:

1.	Select the First Ending tool from the Barlines palette.

2.	Move the cursor over the Score window.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

3.	Press and hold the mouse at the left edge of the first measure in the ending and drag to the end of the last measure in the ending.

Overture inserts an ending, gives it the default name of 1 and inserts a Close Repeat sign in the final measure of the ending.

4.	Using the Arrow Cursor tool, double-click the upper-right corner of the ending.

Overture opens the Set Ending dialog box.

5.	Since this is the second ending in the score, check the 2 checkbox and uncheck the 1 checkbox.

The Text area shows the exact text that will appear in the ending.

6.	Click the OK button.

Overture changes the ending number to 2.

7.	Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked.

If you don’t check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

8.	Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module.

Overture recognizes the repeat signs.

Final Endings

To insert a final ending:

1.	Select the Final Ending tool from the Barlines palette.

2.	Move the cursor over the Score window.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

3.	Press and hold the mouse at the left edge of the first measure in the ending and drag to the end of the last measure in the ending.

Overture inserts a final ending and gives it the default name of 2.

Since this is actually the third ending, you’ll need to change its number from 2 to 3. To do so:

4.	Double-click the upper-right corner of the ending.

Overture opens the Set Ending dialog box.

5.	Check the 3 checkbox and uncheck the 2 checkbox.

6.	Click the OK button.

Overture changes the ending number to 3.

7.	Make sure Options>Play Style>Repeats is checked.

If you don’t check this option, MIDI playback ignores all repeats in an Overture score.

8.	Press space to playback the score through a MIDI sound module.

Overture recognizes the repeat signs.


Deleting Barlines

You can delete dotted barlines by clicking their edit handles with the Eraser Cursor. Similarly, you can convert any type of barline (except dotted) into a standard barline by clicking its edit handle with the Eraser Cursor.

The Barline edit handle is located at the top of the barline, where the barline crosses the top line in the staff.

Edit handles are always available, but normally hidden unless you select Options>Show>Handles. The edit handle does not have to be visible in order for you to click it. For more information about editing and moving barlines, see Changing Bar Widths.

Hiding Standard Barlines

You can hide standard barlines by clicking their edit handles with the Eraser Cursor.

If you choose Options>Show>Invisibles, Overture displays the hidden barlines in grey (though they still are invisible when printing).

To make a hidden barline visible again:

1.	Select the Standard Barline tool from the Barlines palette.

The cursor turns into a crosshair when you move it over the Score window.

2.	Click the cursor close to the barline you wish to change.

Overture changes the hidden barline into a standard visible barline.


Transcription Quantize Button

Use this button to set Overture’s transcription quantization level. The button always shows the currently selected transcription quantize value.

Whenever Overture converts raw MIDI data into standard music notation, it does so using the value displayed in the Transcription Quantize Amount button. Therefore, whenever you transcribe raw MIDI data into notation, you generally select a transcription quantize value that corresponds to the smallest note value you plan to transcribe. For example, if the smallest note you’ll transcribe is an eighth note, set a transcription quantize amount equal to an eighth note—this keeps Overture from misinterpreting any sloppy playing. Of course, there are exceptions to this rule and they’re discussed in Transcription Quantization and Manual Transcription.

This button does not quantize the actual MIDI data—rather it quantizes the transcribed notation of the MIDI data. MIDI data is unaffected by this button.

Overture interprets triplets of any value equal to or greater than the selected quantize amount. For example, if you select a sixteenth note quantize value, Overture recognizes and transcribes not only sixteenth note triplets but also eighth and quarter note triplets.

To select a transcription quantization value:

1.	Press and hold the Transcription Quantize Amount button.

Overture opens a pop-up menu of quantize values.

2.	While still holding the mouse button, drag the cursor over the desired quantize level (highlighting it), then release the mouse button.

Overture sets the transcribe quantization to the selected level and displays your selection as the button’s icon.

Overture’s smallest transcription quantize amount is the triplet value of the selected note. For example, if you select a transcription quantize amount of an eighth note, the smallest note value Overture transcribes correctly is an eighth note triplet.

Using Transcription Quantization

Whenever you convert raw MIDI data into standard music notation, Overture quantizes the transcription to the value set by the Transcription Quantize Amount button. The following sections show some examples using different transcription processes.

Transcription Quantization and Auto Transcription

If your scores are rather simple, you may find it adequate to use Overture’s auto transcription feature. This feature (which you can enable either in the Record Options dialog box, or by checking Options>Auto Transcribe) automatically transcribes all recorded MIDI data into standard notation using the value shown in the Transcription Quantize button. The advantage of auto transcription is that it saves you the additional step of manually converting MIDI data into standard music notation. The disadvantage is that it doesn’t let you selectively transcribe raw MIDI data using different transcription quantize values. The Auto Transcribe option is discussed in Record Options.

Transcription Quantization and Manual Transcription

If your score is rather complex, you may want to transcribe MIDI data manually. The advantage of manual transcription is that it lets you selectively choose a transcription quantize amount and voice for any note or group of notes. For example, if your score contains a few measures of eighth notes, then a few measures of sixteenth note triplets, you would find it easiest to transcribe the eighth notes using the eighth note transcription quantize amount, then transcribe the sixteenth note triplet section using a sixteenth note triplet transcription quantize amount.

Follow through this example to see how to record and manually transcribe raw MIDI data:

1.	Choose Options>Record Options.

Overture opens the Record Options dialog box.

2.	Make sure the Auto Transcribe option is unchecked, then click the OK button.

Alternatively, you could simply uncheck the Options>Auto Transcribe option.

3.	Press the tab key to begin recording.

4.	Play some music on your MIDI controller.

5.	Press the Enter key to stop recording.

Overture displays the recorded music as raw MIDI data.

6.	Select the raw MIDI data you want to transcribe.

You select raw MIDI data exactly as you select standard music notation symbols.

7.	Select a note value from the Transcription Quantize Amount pop-up menu.

8.	Choose Notes>Transcribe.

Overture transcribes the highlighted MIDI data into standard music notation using the selected transcription quantize amount. See Transcribe for more information about the Transcribe command.

Fixing Transcription Quantization Mistakes

If you find a transcription quantization error in your score, you can fix it using the Notes>Transcribe command.

To correct a transcription quantization error:

1.	Select the incorrectly transcribed notes.

2.	Press and hold the mouse on the Transcription Quantize Amount button.

Overture opens a pop-up menu of transcription quantization amounts.

3.	Select the desired quantize level from the pop-up menu.

4.	Choose Notes>Transcribe.

Overture converts the notes into raw MIDI data (as though you chose the Notes to Raw command), then transcribes them back into standard music notation using a sixteenth note transcription quantize amount.


Overture Windows

The Score Window

The Transport Window

The Tracks Window

The Graphic Window

The Chords Window

The Lyrics Window

The Step Input Window

Overture groups related functions together and places them in separate windows. The following sections present a brief overview of each Overture window.

Score Window

The Score window displays a traditional music score complete with notes, symbols, lyrics, staves, systems, and anything else you want in your printed musical score. Use the Score window to enter, view and modify your musical score.

Tool Bar

The Tool Bar contains buttons that open all of Overture’s Tool palettes. Use the Tool Bar to select tools for entering and modifying music in the Score window.

Transport Window

The Transport window contains buttons to control MIDI recording and playback, and a pop-up menu to select the MIDI Thru Instrument.

Tracks Window

The Tracks window defines the characteristics of all the tracks in your Overture score. Use the Tracks window to

•	name tracks

•	enable tracks

•	assign MIDI playback devices, programs, channels and transpositions

•	specify the number of voices in a track

•	determine default voice stem directions in a track

Graphic Window

The Graphic window graphically displays the MIDI data in a selected track using a piano roll and strip chart display. Use the Graphic window to edit any MIDI data in any track. Overture applies any changes you make in the Graphic window to the Score window and vice versa.

Chords Window

The Chords window contains a list of possible chord suffixes (as specified by the user in the Chord Symbol library) as well as root and bass names. Use the Chords window to insert chord names and guitar frames into your score.

Lyrics Window

The Lyrics window is like a miniature word processor that you use to enter and edit lyrics. Use the Lyrics window to type or modify lyrics and assign them to specific notes in the score.

Step Input Window

Use the Step Input window to enter a score by recording MIDI data one step at a time. You can enter notes, chord names, or rhythmic slashes in the Step Input window.

The Step Input window is particularly convenient if your playing technique is limited, or if you want to enter lead sheet chords and guitar rhythms quickly.


The Score Window

The Score window displays one or more pages of a traditional music score complete with staves, notes, symbols, lyrics, chords, text and anything else you want in your printed musical score. Use the Score window to enter, view and modify your musical score.

For more information, see:

Page View and Track Controls

Scrolling a Score Window

Arranging Staves and Systems

Default Files

Selecting Notation Symbols

Selecting as Voice to Enter or Edit

Editing Notation Symbols

Adjusting Note Spacing

Locked Measures

Cursors in the Score Window


The Page View and Track Controls
Page View and Track Controls

The bottom of the Score window contains several controls that determine and illustrate which page is displayed and the zoom level at which it’s displayed.

Each of the following sections discuss various actions you can perform with the page view and track controls.

Turning Pages

To move forward or backward through your score a single page at a time, click the Next Page or Previous Page buttons.

If you have an extended computer keyboard, you can also turn pages by typing Control-PgUp or Control-PgDn.

Turning to a Specific Page

To turn to a specific page in your score, use the Page numerical. Simply drag the numerical upward to increase the page number, or drag it downward to decrease the page number. Alternately, you can click the Page numerical, type the desired page number, then press the Enter key.

Turning to a Specific Bar

To place the insertion point in any measure in your score (activating that measure), use the bar numerical. Simply drag the numerical upward to increase the bar number, or drag it downward to decrease the bar number. Alternately, you can click the Bar numerical, type the desired bar number, then press the Enter key.

Zooming

You can zoom in on a score to see tiny details or zoom out to display more of the score. Also, you can size a score to fit completely in the Score window.

1.	Click the Zoom Level pop-up menu to see a list of zoom levels.

2.	Select the desired zoom level from the pop-up menu.

Overture resizes the score based on your selection.

The zoom level options are as follows:

•	Zoom In. Select this zoom level to zoom in on the score. When you zoom in, Overture displays all notes and symbols larger than actual size, allowing you too see more detail in a single portion of a score. You can choose this command repeatedly to zoom in closer and closer.

•	Zoom Out. Select this zoom level to zoom out on the score. When you zoom out, Overture displays all notes and symbols smaller than actual size, allowing you to see more of a score. You can choose this command repeatedly to zoom out further and further.

•	Fit in Window. If you select this zoom level, Overture automatically selects a zoom level that displays an entire page within the confines of the Score window.

•	100%. Select this zoom level to display the score at its normal size.

•	250%, 200%, 150%, 70%, 50%. Select one of these zoom levels to set the zoom level to the indicated percentage.

•	X%. Choose this zoom level to open the zoom level dialog box. Use the View at numerical to select a zoom level between 40% and 999%. Click the OK button to apply the chosen zoom level.

Selective Zooming

Overture lets you zoom in on a specific area of the score. To do so:

1.	Select the Arrow Cursor in the Tool Bar.

2.	Hold down the Alt key and drag a rectangle around the area you want to zoom in on.

Overture zooms the selected area to the largest size that will fit within the Score window.

Selecting a Page View Option

The Zoom Level pop-up menu also contains several viewing options so you can define how Overture displays pages in the Score window.

There are three different ways to view pages in the Score window:

•	Single Page. If you select this option, Overture displays only one page at a time in the Score window.

•	Horizontal Pages. If you select this option, Overture places your pages side by side horizontally across the Score window.

•	Vertical Pages. If you select this option, Overture places your pages top to bottom vertically down the Score window.


Scrolling a Score Window

There are a few cases where you want to scroll a Score window:

•	If the physical page size of your score is larger than your monitor screen and you wish to view the score at full size (100%), you’ll need to scroll the Score window to see any portions of a page that don’t fit within the window’s confines.

•	If you view a score at some magnified level (>100%), you’ll need to scroll the Score window to see the entire page (even if you have a 1- or 2-page monitor).

The most intuitive way to scroll the Score window is to use the standard scroll bars located both to the right and the bottom of the Score window.

You can also scroll a Score window by Alt-shift-dragging within the window. This converts the cursor to a hand for dragging the Score window.

Use the Hand cursor to drag the score around the Score window in any direction. This is much quicker than using the scroll bars since it lets you scroll both horizontally and vertically at the same time.

If you use an extended computer keyboard, you can quickly scroll one full screen up by pressing the PgUp key. You can scroll one full screen down by pressing the PgDn key. You can scroll to the top of the score by pressing the Home key, and you can scroll to the bottom of the score by pressing the End key.


Arranging Staves and Systems

Overture allows you to adjust staff spacing and width by dragging staves to place them anywhere on a page. The following sections discuss how to arrange staves and systems in a score.

Adjusting Vertical Staff Placement

You can adjust the spacing between any two staves or systems and apply that spacing to either:

•	the selected staff only, or

•	all remaining staves on a page, or

•	all remaining staves in a score

The following sections outline Overture’s staff spacing techniques.

Adjusting Staff Spacing in a Single System

To change the spacing between a staff and the staff above it:

1.	Select Options>Show>Handles.

This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you won’t need to select this option. Handles are always available—they’re just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it.

2.	Drag a staff handle up or down to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it.

All staves below a dragged staff maintain their relative spacing.

If you drag the top staff in a system, that system moves closer to or further from the system (or margin) above it, but all other staff and system spacings are unaffected.

If you drag a middle staff in some system, it will move closer to or further from the staff immediately above it. All staff and system spacing below the dragged staff is unaffected.

Adjusting Staff Spacing in all Systems on a Page

As you learned in the previous section, you can drag a staff to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it. If you like, you can have Overture apply the new staff spacing to all remaining systems on a page. To do so:

1.	Select Options>Show>Handles.

This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you won’t need to select this option. Handles are always available—they’re just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it.

2.	Hold down the Alt key and drag a staff handle up or down to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it.

By Alt-dragging, you tell Overture to apply the same spacing to all remaining systems on a page.

If you Alt-drag the top staff in a system, that system moves closer to or further from the system (or margin) above it, and Overture applies the spacing to all remaining systems on the page.

If you Alt-drag any other staff in a system, it moves closer to or further from the staff immediately above it, and Overture applies the spacing to all remaining systems on the page.

Adjusting Staff Spacing in all Systems in a Score

As you learned previously, you can drag a staff to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it. If you like, you can have Overture apply the new staff spacing to all remaining systems in a score. To do so:

1.	Select Options>Show>Handles.

This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you won’t need to select this option. Handles are always available—they’re just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it.

2.	Hold down the Control key and drag a staff handle up or down to change the spacing between it and the staff (or margin) above it.

By Control-dragging, you tell Overture to apply the same spacing to all remaining systems in a score.

Control-dragging affects system and shift spacing just as Alt-dragging does. The only difference is that Overture applies any new spacing throughout the remaining score, not just the active page.

Respacing Staves

Overture’s Score>Respace Staves command respaces all the staves on the page according to the Respace Staves dialog box and the Engraver preferences set in the Preferences dialog box. See Respace Staves Dialog Box and Engraver Preferences.

To respace the staves:

1.	Choose Score>Respace Staves.

Overture re-spaces the staves according to the Engraver preferences set in the Preferences dialog box.

Adjusting Horizontal Staff Placement

You can adjust the width of any system by dragging either of its handles horizontally.

To indent the top system:

1.	In the top system, drag any staff’s left selection handle to the right.

Overture shortens the entire system.

You can also drag a staff’s right selection handle to change a system’s width.

Placing Systems Side by Side

You can apply a combination of vertical staff positioning and staff width adjustment to place systems side-by-side in a score. To do so:

1.	Adjust the width of each system you wish to place side by side.

2.	Drag the lower system up until it’s parallel with the system above it.


Default Files

If you frequently use particular scoring conventions, you may create a score with the desired characteristics and save it with the name DefaultFile. If you put DefaultFile in the same folder as the Overture application, an untitled copy automatically opens every time you launch Overture by double clicking the Overture application icon. Scoring conventions commonly used in creating the DefaultFile include:

•	Staff names and abbreviations

•	Staff grouping and spacing

•	Measures/System and Systems/Page specifications

•	Clef assignments in staff systems

You may save the DefaultFile, including specific parts. For example, a commonly used basic drum track can be saved in the DefaultFile.

Choosing File>New does not automatically load DefaultFile. Choosing File>Open to open DefaultFile opens the actual file for editing, not an untitled copy. Double-clicking the file launches Overture files directly.


Selecting Notation Symbols

You can select notes and symbols either individually or in groups. The following sections discuss how Overture displays selected symbols and how to select them.

Viewing Selected Symbols

Overture displays most selected notes and rests in red.

When you select a note with a beam, Overture displays only the notehead in red. You can select beams separately, so as to edit their position and angle. Editing handles appear on all selected beams. For information about editing beams, see Editing Beams.

When you select most other types of symbols, small, rectangular editing handles appear on or around the symbol. These handles allow you to move or reshape the selected symbol.

For more information about editing selected symbols, see Editing Notation Symbols.

Selection Techniques

You may select notes and symbols either individually or in groups. To select notes or symbols in the Score window, the Arrow Cursor tool must be active. The following sections discuss numerous selection techniques.

Selecting Individual Symbols

To select any note or symbol in the Score window:

1.	Click the Arrow Cursor button in Overture’s tool bar to select the Arrow Cursor tool.

2.	Move the cursor over the symbol you wish to select.

When you position the cursor over a symbol, it changes into a Drag Cursor. The Drag Cursor always appears when you move the Arrow Cursor over an editable portion of a musical symbol.

We discuss this and other Score window cursors in Cursors in the Score Window.

3.	Click the desired symbol.

Overture highlights it to show that it’s selected.

Alternately, you could select a symbol by dragging a rectangle around it.

Selecting Discontiguous Symbols

To select discontiguous notes and symbols in the Score window, hold down the Control key as you click. Specifically:

1.	Using the Arrow cursor, move the mouse over the first symbol you wish to select.

The cursor turns into a Drag cursor.

2.	Click the symbol to select it.

Overture highlights it to show that it’s selected.

3.	Control-click each additional note or symbol you wish to select.

Overture adds the note or symbol to the selection.

Alternately, you could select discontiguous symbols by dragging rectangles around the individual notes or symbols as you hold down the Control key.

Selecting Contiguous Symbols

To select contiguous notes and symbols in the Score window, use the Shift key. Specifically:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, move the mouse over the first symbol you wish to select.

The cursor turns into a Drag Cursor.

2.	Click the symbol to select it.

Overture highlights it to show that it’s selected.

3.	Shift-click the space after the last symbol you wish to select.

Overture selects all notes and symbols between the first selection and the point where you shift-clicked.

Alternatively, you could select contiguous symbols by dragging a rectangle around all the desired symbols—the selection includes any symbol that the rectangle either touches or encloses.

Selecting All Symbols in a Measure

To select all symbols in a single measure:

Using the Arrow Cursor, double-click any blank area in the desired measure.

Overture selects all the symbols in the measure.

Selecting All Symbols in Discontiguous Measures

To select all symbols in discontiguous measures:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, double-click any blank area in one of the measures.

Overture selects all the symbols in the measure.

2.	Control-double-click a blank area in each additional measure.

Overture adds all symbols in each additional measure to the selection.

You can also use this technique to select discontiguous measures on different staves.

Selecting Symbols On Different Staves

You can use any of the contiguous or discontiguous selection methods to select notes and symbols that are on different staves. In addition, you can select symbols in contiguous measures and staves by dragging a rectangle around all desired symbols.

Also, you can control-click symbols in different staves to select them.

Selecting all Symbols in a Track

You can select all symbols in a track by double-clicking with the Arrow Cursor in the margin next to the track you want selected.


Selecting a Voice to Enter or Edit

Each Overture staff displays up to eight voices simultaneously. Select a voice using the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window. You can select and edit only those symbols that are assigned to the selected voice. To select a voice:

1.	Click Voice in the Score Window’s page view controls to open the Voice pop-up menu.

2.	From the pop-up menu, select the voice you want to enter or edit.

You may also select the All option to edit all voices simultaneously.

When you select a particular voice, all other voices already in a score are grayed out.

When you select All, Overture lets you edit all the voices, but automatically puts any new notes on Voice 1.


Editing Notation Symbols

Editing Notes

You can change a note’s pitch or position by dragging it. Drag a note up or down to change its pitch; drag a note left or right to change its position.

When you position the cursor over a notehead, it changes into a Drag Cursor. The Drag Cursor always appears when you move the Arrow Cursor over an editable portion of a musical symbol.

You can choose whether you want dragged notes to change chromatically (according to the twelve-tone scale) or diatonically (according to the key of the measure). To drag notes diatonically:

1.	Choose Options>Preferences.

Overture opens the Preferences dialog box.

2.	In the Preferences dialog box, select General from the Preference Type pop-up menu.

3.	Make sure that Drag Notes Chromatically is not checked.

To drag notes chromatically:

1.	Choose Options>Preferences.

Overture opens the Preferences dialog box.

2.	In the Preferences dialog box, select General from the Preference Type pop-up menu.

3.	Click the Drag Notes Chromatically check box to check it.

You can nudge notes up or down through either the chromatic or diatonic scales. To do so:

1.	Select the note (or notes) whose pitch you want to change.

2.	Press the up arrow key to nudge notes up the scale. Press the down arrow key to nudge notes down the scale.

You can change a note’s value (such as turning a quarter note into an eighth note) by first selecting it, then typing the key equivalent for a new note value. This is described in detail in Changing Existing Note Values.

You can duplicate a note (or most any musical symbol) by Control-dragging it.

There are two ways to remove notes from a score:

•	Select the Eraser tool and click the notes you wish to remove. See Eraser Button.

•	Using the Arrow Cursor, select those notes you wish to remove (as discussed in Selecting Notation Symbols) and type the delete key, or use the Edit>Cut command.

Copying Notes

You can Control-drag any note to make a copy of it.

If you Control-drag a note vertically, Overture creates a new note of the same duration and at the same time, but at a new pitch (thus creating a chord).

If you Control-drag a note horizontally, Overture copies it to a new location.

If you Alt-drag any note in a chord horizontally, Overture creates a copy of the entire chord.

You can also copy notes by selecting them and using standard copy and paste commands. For more information, see Chapter 36, “Edit Menu.”

Editing Stems

To change a stem’s height:

1.	Move the cursor over the end of a stem.

The cursor changes into a Drag Cursor.

2.	Drag the end of the stem up or down to change its height.

To return a stem to its default height.

1.	Select the notes whose stems you wish to reset to their default height.

2.	Choose Notes>Stem>Set Stem Height.

Overture opens the Set Stem Height dialog box.

3.	Make sure the box says 3.5 spaces.

4.	Click OK.

Overture resets the stems to the default height.

To set a stem’s direction:

1.	Select the notes whose stem directions you wish to set.

2.	Choose either Notes>Stem>Stem Up or
Notes>Stem>Stem Down.

Overture makes the selected stems point in the chosen direction.

To hide a stem:

1.	Select the notes whose stems you wish to hide.

2.	Choose Notes>Stem>Hide Stem.

Overture hides the selected stem.

This is a particularly useful feature for tablature notation. For more information about tablature notation, see Chapter 16, “Tablature Button.”

To show a hidden stem:

1.	Select the notes whose stems you wish to show.

2.	Choose Notes>Stem>Show Stem.

Overture shows the stem for the selected note.

Editing Beams

You can change a beam’s height or angle simply by dragging it. To change the height of a beam:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over the center of a beam.

The cursor turns into the Drag Cursor.

2.	Drag the beam up or down to change its height.

To change the angle of a beam:

1.	Move the Arrow Cursor over either end of the beam.

The cursor turns into the Drag Cursor.

2.	Drag the end of the beam up or down to change its angle.

There are two ways to remove beams from a score:

•	Select the Eraser tool and click the beams you wish to remove. See Eraser Button.

•	Using the Arrow Cursor, select those beams you wish to remove (as discussed in Selecting Notation Symbols) and press the delete key.

You can use one of the Notes>Beam commands to change how notes are beamed, and you can even beam across barlines and across staves. For more information, see Beam.

Editing Rests

Drag any rest to move it. You can even move rests up and down on a staff—this is particularly useful when you notate more than one voice on a single staff.

You can nudge rests up, down, left or right in small increments. To do so:

1.	Select the rest (or rests) whose position you want to change.

2.	Press the up arrow key to nudge rests upward. Press the down arrow key to nudge rests down. Press the left arrow key to nudge rests left, and press the right arrow  key to nudge rests to the right.

There are two ways to remove rests from a score:

•	Select the Eraser tool and click the rests you wish to remove. See Eraser Button.

•	Using the Arrow Cursor, select those rests you wish to remove (as discussed in Selecting Notation Symbols) and type the delete key (or choose Edit>Cut or Edit>Clear).

Editing Other Notation Symbols

There are also techniques for editing slurs, ties, glissandos, trill sections, arpeggios, chord symbols, text, and numerous other musical symbols. We discuss each of these when first introducing the symbols in Part III, “The Tool Bar.”


Adjusting Note Spacing

There are numerous ways to adjust the spacing of notes in the Score window:

•	Drag notes (or groups of notes) to change their position relative to other notes.

•	Nudge notes (or groups of notes) with the arrow keys to make small changes in their position relative to other notes.

•	Display and modify Beat Charts.

•	Change the bar width to expand or contract the spacing of notes in a measure.

•	Automatically position notes. There are three ways to do this:

1.	automatically align them with existing Beat Charts upon entry (using the Options>Auto Position option).

2.	automatically calculate new Beat Charts and align existing notes (using the Measures>Justify command).

3.	automatically adjust measure width and spacing based on the current Allotment Table and on the existing Beat Charts (using the Score>Recalc Layout command).

The following sections detail each of the preceding techniques.

Dragging Notes

You can drag a note to change its position relative to other notes.

Also, you can drag any note in a chord to change the horizontal spacing of the entire chord.

You can select and drag notes and chords, as well as dynamics, hairpins, text repeats, and Graphics palette objects as a group.

Nudging Notes

You can nudge notes either left or right in small increments. To do so:

1.	Select the note (or notes) you want to nudge.

2.	Type the left arrow key to nudge the notes to the left. Type the right arrow key to nudge the notes to the right.

Each horizontal nudge moves the symbol approximately a single pixel. Overture prints at a resolution of 1/72 of an inch so, at 100% scaling, you can nudge symbols at a resolution of 1/72 of an inch on the printed page.

Using Beat Charts

Instead of dragging individual notes to change their relative spacings, you might find it easier to modify the beat spacing. Overture illustrates a measure’s beat spacing in a Beat Chart. Beat Charts appear above a measure and mark each beat in the measure with a small rectangular handle.

Use Beat Charts to view the individual beats (or pulses) in a measure and to modify the spacing of those beats. To do so:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click anywhere in the desired measure to make it the active measure.

2.	Select Options>Show>Beat Chart.

Overture produces a Beat Chart over the active measure.

The upper row of the Beat Chart contains small square handles that represent each beat in the measure.

3.	Drag one of the beat handles to a new position.

To hide a Beat Chart:

1.	Using the Arrow Cursor, click anywhere in the desired measure to activate it.

2.	Select Options>Show>Beat Chart.

Overture hides the active measure’s Beat Chart.

Overture actually displays pulses. Measures usually contain the same number of beats as pulses, but you can use the Set Meter dialog box to set a number of pulses that’s different from the number of beats. See Set Meter for more details.

Changing Bar Widths

You can proportionally compress or expand the spacing between all notes in a measure by changing the width of the bar. To do so:

1.	Select Options>Show>Handles.

This is an optional step. Once you learn where to click on a staff or barline, you won’t need to select this option. Handles are always available—they’re just normally invisible. Selecting this option shows you where to click a staff or barline to edit it.

2.	Drag the desired bar’s handle to the left or right.

The figure shows the middle bar dragged to the left. This results in tighter spacing in the first measure and wider spacing in the second.

Bar widths also change when you use the Measures>Wrap Left or Measures>Wrap Right commands since these actions place a different number of bars on a single, fixed width line. For more information about wrapping measures, see Wrap Left and Wrap Right.

Automatic Positioning

There are three ways to space notes automatically in a score. The following discusses the differences between these three automatic note spacing algorithms:

•	Options>Auto Position: When you select this option, Overture automatically spaces any new notes that you enter. Overture spaces notes according to the measure’s existing Beat Chart without changing the width of the measure.

For more information about Beat Charts, see Using Beat Charts. For a detailed discussion of the Options>Auto Position option, see Auto Position.

•	Measures>Justify: When you choose this command, Overture calculates a new Beat Chart based on the note values and the amount of space allocated to them in the current Allotment Table. It then spaces notes accordingly (without changing the width of the measure).

For more information about Beat Charts, see Using Beat Charts. For a brief description of Allotment Tables, see “About Allotment Tables” below. For a detailed discussion of the Measures>Justify command, see Justify.

•	Score>Recalc Layout: When you choose this command, Overture calculates a new width for each measure in the score based on the number of Measures per System you specify in the Source>Layout Page dialog box.

For more information about Beat Charts, see Using Beat Charts. For a brief description of Allotment Tables, see “About Allotment Tables” below. For a detailed discussion of the Score>Recalc Layout command, see Recalc Layout.

About Allotment Tables

Allotment Tables determine the amount of horizontal space occupied by each note on a staff, relative to other note values. For example, it’s generally desirable to have an eighth note occupy more space than a sixteenth note (though not twice as much space)—thus giving some visual feedback as to the rhythm of a piece. You can create and save any number of Allotment Tables. To load an Allotment Table into Overture, simply choose File>Load Library. For more information about creating and editing Allotment Tables, see Allotment Table.


Locked Measures

When you’ve manually spaced notes in a measure, it is sometimes useful to exclude that measure from being justified or affected by a Score>Recalc Layout command. Overture allows locked measures that maintain their spacing. To lock a measure:

1.	Select Options>Show>Handles.

Barline and staff handles appear.

2.	Control-click the barline handle to lock the preceding measure.

The barline handle turns solid, indicating that it is locked. Control-click the barline handle again to unlock the measure.


Cursors in the Score Window

Overture uses a number of different cursors depending on the function you’re about to perform. The following is a list of Overture cursors that appear in the Score window:

		Arrow Cursor: The Arrow Cursor is Overture’s basic operating cursor. It may change form when you move it over various tools, symbols, staves, or text. Select the Arrow Cursor by clicking the Arrow Cursor tool in the Tool Bar or by typing the letter c (unless you’re in a text entering mode). For more information, see Arrow Cursor Button.
		Drag Cursor: The Drag Cursor appears automatically any time you move the Arrow Cursor over any symbol’s edit handle. It indicates that you can edit or drag the symbol.
		Eraser Cursor: Use the Eraser Cursor to delete musical symbols by clicking them. Select the Eraser Cursor by clicking the Eraser Cursor tool in the Tool Bar or by typing the letter e (unless you’re in a text entering mode). For more information, see Eraser Button.
		Scale Cursor: Use the Scale Cursor to resize notes, staves, clefs and dynamics by clicking them. Select the Scale Cursor by clicking the Scale Cursor tool in the Score mode Tool Bar. For more information, see Scale Button.
		I-beam Cursor: The I-beam Cursor appears over any editable text.
Crosshair Cursor: The Crosshair Cursor appears over the Score window whenever you’ve selected a symbol to insert. There are three types of crosshair cursors:
		This crosshair appears when the cursor is directly over a staff and indicates that the action you’re about to perform applies to this staff.
		This crosshair appears when the cursor is above a staff. It indicates that the action you’re about to perform applies to the staff immediately below the cursor.
		This crosshair appears when the cursor is below a staff. It indicates that the action you’re about to perform applies to the staff immediately above the cursor.
There are numerous other cursors associated with Overture’s Graphic window. For more information about these cursors, see Graphic Window.


The Transport Window

The Transport window contains buttons to control MIDI recording and playback, and a pop-up menu to select the MIDI Thru Instrument.

To open the Transport window, choose Windows>Transport.

For more information, see:

Transport Controls

Punch Recording

Thru Device Button

Thru Patch

Count Off

Real Time MIDI Recording


Transport Controls

The four buttons to the left of the Transport window are Overture’s Transport Controls.

Use these buttons when you want to play a score using MIDI sound modules, or when you want to record MIDI data in real-time.

The table below shows the function of each Transport Control button as well as its key equivalent. Typing a key equivalent has the same effect as clicking the respective button.

Button		Key Equivalent		Function
		Enter		Real-time MIDI recording from the beginning of the active measure.
		space		MIDI playback from the beginning of the score.
		space		Stops either MIDI recording or MIDI playback.
				MIDI playback from the insertion point (the blinking input cursor)
Putting the Transport Controls in the Tool Bar

For convenience, you can move the transport controls to the tool bar.

To put the transport controls in the tool bar, drag the palette by its title area to the tool bar.

The window shrinks to its four controls and appears in the tool bar.  You can put it below the buttons or to the right of them.

To remove the transport controls from the tool bar, drag them by their boundary out of the tool bar.  They expand into the transport window.


Punch Recording

Historical Origins

The technique of Punch recording originated from tape recording studios. Recording engineers discovered that they could improve sections or fix mistakes in a recorded track without re-recording the entire track. They could correct only the area in which the mistake occurred. Punch recording saved time and conserved the creativity of the musicians by retaining most of an acceptable (or even inspiring) performance. It didn’t require the musician to start from the beginning each time he or she made a small mistake.

General Procedure

Punch recording begins by rewinding the tape to the beginning of the section that needs modification. When the tape starts playing, the musician begins playing as if he or she were recording, in order to get into the flow of the music. Recording does not actually begin, however, until the engineer punches in to activate recording. The musician continues playing, blissfully unaware of the mechanics of the process until the tape arrives at the end of the section being replaced. The engineer then punches out to stop recording.

Punch Recording in Overture

Punch recording is a standard feature in professional MIDI sequencers and is now available in Overture.

You enable punch recording by first defining a punch region bounded by Punch In and Punch Out points and then pressing the Punch Record button in the Transport Window. With the cursor located prior to the Punch In point, press the Record button in the normal manner. Overture begins playback the number of Countoff Bars prior to the Punch In point but begins recording at the Punch In point. Overture stops recording at the Punch Out point.

Punch recording lets you improve sections or fix mistakes without either over-writing music outside the Punch Region or interrupting your performance to punch in and out at the correct times.

In the following sections we discuss three useful methods for setting punch points.

•	Using the cursor to locate Punch points

•	Setting Punch points manually

•	Locating Punch points by playing the score

Whichever method you use, Overture enables Punch recording only when you highlight the Punch Record button.

To Locate the Punch Points Using the Cursor

The first method uses the location of the cursor in either the Score or Graphic Windows to derive and set the punch points.

1.	In either the Score or Graphic Window, identify the Punch In point by putting the cursor at the desired place.

2.	Press the Punch In button.

Alternatively, press the [ key. The Bar, Beat and Units numericals reflect the location of the cursor.

3.	In either the Score or Graphic Window, locate the Punch Out point by placing the cursor at the desired location.

4.	Press the Punch Out button on the Transport Window.

Alternatively, press the ] key. The Bar, Beat and Units numericals reflect the location of the cursor.

5.	Press the Punch Record button to enable Punch recording.

The button highlights when you enable Punch Record.

To Set the Punch Points Manually

The second method operates directly on the Bar, Beat, and Units numericals in the Transport Window, assuming the user knows the precise settings for the Punch points.

1.	Set the Punch In point by clicking in the top row of the Bar, Beat and Units numericals.

Type a number or use the mouse to set each numerical field.

2.	Set the Punch Out location by operating on the lower row of the Bar, Beat, and Units numericals.

3.	Enable Punch recording by pressing the Punch Record button.

The button highlights when you enable Punch Record.

To Locate the Punch Points during Playback

You can easily locate and set punch points using the playback controls in the Transport Window.

1.	Place the cursor before the desired Punch In point.

2.	Press the Play button on the Transport Window to begin playback.

3.	Press the Stop button in the Transport Window when playback reaches the Punch In point.

Pressing the Play button again also stops playback.

4.	Press the Punch In button.

The Bar, Beat, and Units numericals reflect the location of the cursor.

5.	Press the Play button to resume playback.

6.	When the Punch Out point is reached, press the Stop button.

The cursor is at the Punch Out point.

7.	Press the Punch Out button to set the Punch Out point.

8.	Enable Punch recording by pressing the Punch Record button.

You can also combine the methods described above to set the Punch points. For example, if playback stops at a location that is close to, but not at, the desired Punch In point, either adjust the Punch In numerical fields directly, or click the cursor at the precise Punch In point.


Thru Device Button

Use this button to set Overture’s Thru Device. The button always shows the name of the currently selected Device.

If Options>Keyboard Thru is checked (as discussed in Keyboard Thru), MIDI data received by Overture gets sent to the device displayed in the Thru Device button. Overture watches for MIDI input from any device that you select as an Input and passes the MIDI data out to the device that you select as a Thru Device.

This feature allows your master MIDI keyboard to play any device in your studio.

To select a Thru Device:

1.	Press and hold the mouse on the Thru Instrument button.

Overture opens a pop-up menu of all the devices in your current OMS Studio Setup document.

2.	Release the mouse over the device you wish to use as a Thru Instrument.

Overture selects the device as the Thru Instrument and displays its name in the Thru Instrument button.

If you check the MIDI Through Follows Tracks option in the Playback tab of the Preferences dialog box (as discussed in MIDI Through Follows Tracks), and you select a different track or voice in the Score window, Overture automatically changes the Thru Device to the device assigned in the Tracks window. See Chapter 28, “Tracks Window.”


Thru Patch

You need to understand Keyboard Thru to use Thru Patch correctly. See Keyboard Thru.

The Thru Patch pop-up menu selects a patch on the Thru Device.

This feature lets the MIDI controller play different patches and devices thru the computer without permanently changing the track’s patch setting. For example, if you’ve already assigned an instrument that has the correct device and patch settings to the current track and you want to search for a sound to use for a new track, you can experiment using the Thru pop-up menus without over-writing the patch or device settings for the current track.

You must select Options>Keyboard Thru to transmit the changes made in the Thru pop-up menus to the MIDI device. You must turn local control off on the MIDI controller (if it generates sound) to use Keyboard Thru correctly.

You can put changes made using the Thru Patch and Thru Device pop-up menus permanently into the track by doing real-time recording in that track after selecting a new patch and/or device.


Count Off

Count Off allows the musician to begin recording at the correct tempo by previewing the metronome before recording begins. Overture supports a maximum of 8 count off bars. After you click the Record button, the metronome ticks the specified number of count off bars at the current tempo before beginning recording. To set the number of count off bars, set the Count Off field to a number between 0 (no count off) and 8. See Metronome for a complete discussion.


Real Time MIDI Recording

Using a MIDI controller, you can record MIDI data directly into Overture. The following sections discuss the process.

Basic Setup

Before you record your first track, you need to make sure that your hardware is connected and that all the software is configured properly. To do so:

1.	Make sure you have a MIDI controller and sound source connected to a MIDI interface, and that the interface is connected to your computer properly.

2.	Choose Options>MIDI Devices.

Overture opens the MIDI Ports dialog box.

3.	Select your MIDI controller as an input port in the MIDI Ports dialog box.

4.	Click OK.

Setting Metronome and Record Options

Next, you must make decisions concerning metronome use, voice assignments, and other recording options. To do so:

1.	From the Options>Metronome submenu, select if and when you want the metronome to click.

If you select Click in Record, Overture’s metronome clicks for a 1-bar countoff and throughout the entire recording. If you select Click in Count Off, Overture’s metronome clicks during the count off measure. If you don’t select either option, Overture does not play a one-bar countoff before recording and the metronome does not click at all while Overture records.

2.	If you decide to use the metronome, choose Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound.

Overture opens the Metronome dialog box.

3.	Use the Metronome dialog box to assign a click sound to the metronome.

To learn more about the metronome and its related options, see Metronome.

4.	Decide whether you want the recorded music to be autobeamed, autopositioned, or autotranscribed by checking the appropriate options in the Options menu.

We discuss each of these options in detail in Chapter 40, “Options Menu.”

5.	If you decide you want Overture to automatically transcribe the music, select a transcription quantize value with the Tool Bar’s Transcription Quantize Amount button.

For details, see Transcription Quantize Button.

6.	Decide whether or not to check the Options>Keyboard Thru option.

This feature allows you to play a master MIDI controller and hear the output from any sound module in your studio. Generally, you should select this option if your MIDI controller and sound module are separate instruments (or you use a multitimbral keyboard synth with its local control turned off). You should uncheck this option if you’re using a single keyboard synthesizer and its Local Control is turned on. For more information, see Keyboard Thru.

7.	Using the pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window, select a Voice to record.

8.	Choose Options>Record Options.

Overture opens the Record Options dialog box.

9.	Select the desired record options, then click the OK button.

We discuss the Record Options dialog box in Record Options.

Recording

You’re ready to start recording tracks. To do so:

1.	Using the Transport Window’s Thru Instrument button, select the MIDI device on which you wish to record.

2.	In the Score window, click the measure and staff at which you want recording to begin.

3.	In the Transport window, click the Record button, or press tab.

If you checked either the Click in Record or Click in Countoff Only options in the Options>Metronome submenu, Overture counts off for one measure, then begins to record. If you didn’t check any count off options, Overture begins to record immediately.

4.	Play your MIDI controller.

5.	When you’re finished recording, click the Stop button in the Transport window, or press Enter.

Overture records the MIDI data and transcribes it in the Score window. If you selected Options>AutoTranscribe, Overture automatically transcribes the music using the transcription quantize amount set with the Tool Bar’s Transcription Quantize Amount button.


The Tracks Window

The Tracks window defines the characteristics of all the tracks in your Overture score.

To open the Tracks window, choose Windows>Tracks.

For more information, see:

Tracks Window Overview

Setting Stem Directions

Port, Bank, Patch, and Channel

Volume, Pan, and Transposition

Mute and Solo

Other Features


Tracks Window Overview

The Tracks window is organized as a grid. Each row represents a different track (or voice), and each column edits a different parameter for that track (or voice). Use the tracks window to:

•	name tracks

•	enable tracks

•	arrange tracks

•	assign MIDI playback devices, programs, volume, pan, channels and transposition values to tracks

•	specify the number of voices in a track

•	determine voice stem directions in a track

See The Instruments Library and the Tracks Window for a way to automate some of these tasks.

About Voices

Each Overture track may contain as many as eight separate voices. A voice is defined as a single rhythmic line within a track. Some tracks require more than one voice to notate and playback correctly. Specifically:

•	•	If you notate more than one instrument per staff, you’ll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple instruments.

•	•	If you notate a polyphonic instrument (such as a piano) that plays different rhythmic lines simultaneously, you’ll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple rhythmic lines.

Viewing Voice Assignments

You can view all the voice assignments in a track by clicking the small right-pointing triangle to the left of the track number. This causes Overture to display all the voice assignments for that track. It also rotates the small triangle to point downward. You can click the downward-pointing triangle to hide the voice assignments for a track.

Setting the Number of Voices for a Track

Use the Voices column numerical to set the number of voices used by each track.

If a track uses only one voice, set the numerical to 1. If a track uses three voices, set the numerical to 3. You can assign up to eight voices per track. When you look at a track’s voice assignments, you’ll see only as many voices as are defined in the Voices column.

If you assign an Instrument name in the Setup Track dialog box, Overture automatically assigns a default number of voices to that track corresponding to the type of instrument selected. You can override this default by using the Voices numerical. We discuss the Setup Track dialog box in Setup Track.


Setting Stem Directions for a Track or Voice

Use the Stem column to set a stem direction for each track or voice.

0	There are three possible stem directions:

•	Auto Stem: Overture determines stem direction based on staff position. Stems point down for any notes below the middle line and point up for any notes on or above the middle line.

•	Up Stem: Overture makes all stems point up regardless of staff position.

•	Down Stem: Overture makes all stems point down regardless of staff position.

To switch between them, simply click the icon in the Stem column until it shows the desired stem direction.

0	Setting a direction in the stem column does not change the stem directions of any existing notes in a track. Rather, it sets the direction for any newly entered notes. If you want to change stem direction of existing notes, use the Notes>Stem>Stem Up or Notes>Stem>Stem Down commands as discussed in Stem.

1	In general, you’ll use the Auto Stem direction for either single-voice tracks or for multi-voice tracks that notate multitimbral instruments, that is, instruments that make more than one sound at a time. For tracks notating two or more instruments, you’ll probably want to define a stem direction for each voice so as to distinguish which instrument plays which voice.


Port, Bank, Patch, and Channel Selection
Device, Bank, Patch, and Channel Selection

You can assign a different MIDI device to play each separate track (or voice). To do so, press and hold the mouse in the Device column and select a new device from the pop-up menu. This pop-up menu lists every device defined by your current patch library.

If you check the MIDI Through Follows Tracks option in the Preferences dialog box (as discussed in MIDI Through Follows Tracks), and you select a different track or voice in the Score window, Overture automatically changes the Thru Instrument to the device assigned in this column.

Bank Selection for a Track or Voice

Choose a bank containing the patches you need for this track. Specify a bank by pressing and holding on the space, then selecting a number from the pop-up menu.

Patch Selection for a Track or Voice

Pick a patch from the pop-up menu.

When Overture plays a track, it sends the patch message to your MIDI device. If you don’t want Overture to change your MIDI device’s internal program, set the patch to None.

You can also use Overture’s Graphic window to insert MIDI patch information into a score.

Setting a Channel for a Track or Voice

MIDI transmits information on 16 channels, 1 through 16. On playback, the channel number directs the MIDI information to a particular piece of equipment. Specify a number by pressing and holding on the space, then selecting a number from the pop-up menu.


Volume, Pan, and Transposition

You can assign a default MIDI volume level to each track (or voice) by entering it in the Vol column.

When Overture plays a track, it sends the MIDI volume message to your MIDI device. If you don’t want Overture to set your MIDI device’s volume, set the numerical to -.

You can also use Overture’s Graphic window to insert MIDI volume changes into a score.

Setting Pan for a Track or Voice

Press and hold on the space to open a pop-up menu of possible choices. Select a number between -64 and +63 to specify a default left-right balance for the track or voice. 0 balances both sides equally.

Setting Transposition for a Track or Voice

You can assign a default MIDI transposition value (in semitones) to each track (or voice) by entering it in the [Key +] column.

This is the same as the C3 offset in the Setup Track dialog box. It does not affect the staff; it affects playback only.

When Overture plays a track, it transposes the MIDI data before sending it to your MIDI device. If you don’t want Overture to transpose a track’s MIDI data, set the numerical to 0.


Mute and Solo

You can mute the playback of any one or more tracks by clicking in the corresponding Mute column.

All muted tracks are indicated by the letter M. To unmute a track, simply click the M in the Mute column. You cannot mute individual voices.

Overture ignores muted tracks when exporting to a MIDI file. Therefore, if you want to export an Overture file but don’t want all the tracks included in the exported file, mute those tracks in this window. For more information, see Export.

You can solo the playback of any one or more tracks by clicking in the corresponding Solo column.

All soloed tracks are indicated by the letter S. To un-solo a track, click the S in the Solo column. You cannot solo individual voices.


Other Features

You can change the order of tracks by dragging them to new locations. When you change track order in the Tracks window, the staves also change order in the Score window.

To change track order:

1.	Press and hold the mouse over the far left of the track you wish to move.

Make sure the cursor is in the far left column, underneath the up/ down arrow indicator.

2.	Drag the track to the desired location.

A dotted outline of the track shows where you’re moving it.

3.	Release the mouse button when the track is in the desired location.

Overture moves the track in the Tracks window and the corresponding staff in the Score window.

Opening the Setup Track Dialog Box

You can open the Setup Track dialog box for any track by double-clicking in the far left column, underneath the up/down arrow indicator.

This is the same as clicking a staff selection handle in the Score window and choosing Score>Setup Track. To learn about the Setup Track dialog box, see Setup Track.


The Graphic Window

Overture lets you edit the events in your songs in dozens of different ways. The Piano Roll view lets you add and edit notes, controllers, and automation data interactively, using a graphic display. Overture’s many editing commands can improve the quality of recorded performances, filter out certain types of events, and modify the tempos and dynamics of your songs.

The Piano Roll View

The Graphic window displays all notes and other events from a single track in a grid format that looks much like a player piano roll. Notes display as horizontal bars, and drum notes as diamonds. Pitch runs from bottom to top, with the left vertical margin indicating the pitches as piano keys or note names. Time runs left to right with vertical measure and beat boundaries. The Graphic window facilitates adding, editing, and deleting notes.

The Graphic window has two main panes: the Note pane and the Controllers pane. When you first open a Piano Roll window, the Note pane is full-size and the Controllers pane is hidden at the bottom. Drag the gray splitter bar up to display the Controllers pane.

To open the Graphic window, choose Window>Graphics Window.

Zoom tools let you change the vertical and horizontal scale of the view. Hold the Shift key and click the zoom tool to jump to the largest or smallest scale.

The Snap Grid button snaps note start times and durations to the snap grid resolution. You can set the resolution to any note length in the Snap Grid pop-up menu.

Selecting and Editing Notes

To select notes in the Graphics window:

•	Use the Select tool to select notes

Or

•	Click or drag the piano keys to select all notes of the given pitch(es)

Shift-click to add notes to the selection and Control-click to toggle between adding to or removing from the selection.

You can add notes to your score by clicking in the Note pane with the pencil tool. Overture remembers the velocity, duration, and channel of the note that you most recently moved, edited, or deleted, and uses these same characteristics for new notes automatically. You can edit notes freely, using the mouse to change the start time, pitch, or duration. You can move and copy notes anywhere in the track.

You can scrub the current track. The Scrub tool lets you drag a vertical bar over the view so that you can hear the notes in the track. You can scrub forward or backward at any speed. Scrubbing can be handy when you want to locate a bad note or listen to the effects of changes you have made without playing back at normal speed.

To Select Notes with the Selection Tool

1.	Click to select the Arrow cursor.
2.	Select notes as shown in the table:

To do this	Do this
Select a single note	Click on the note
Select several notes at once	Drag a rectangle around the notes you want to select
Add to the selection	Hold the Shift key while selecting notes
Toggle the selection	Hold the Control key while selecting notes
Selected notes are highlighted in the Piano Roll view, and the time selection is set to the range of note start times.

To Select All Notes of Certain Pitches

Click the piano keys or note names on the left side of the Note pane as shown in the table:

To do this	Do this
Select all notes of a single pitch	Click on the piano key or note name
Select all notes of several pitches	Drag across the keys or note names
Add to the selection	Hold the Shift key while clicking on a piano key or note name
Toggle the selection	Hold the Control key while clicking on a piano key or note name

To Edit a Note

Choose the Pencil tool.

Edit notes as described in the table:

To do this	Do this
Change the start time	Drag the left edge of the note in either direction. The note duration stays the same, but the start time is shifted.
Change the pitch	Drag the middle of the note up or down.
Change the duration	Drag the right edge of the note in either direction.
To Change Note Velocity

1.	Select a note.
2.	Display the Controller’s pane.
3.	Select the Controller you want in the Controllers menu.
4.	Select the pencil tool or type p.
5.	Drag the line corresponding to the note in the Controllers pane up or down to the value you want.
To Move Notes

1.	Click or type s to choose the Select tool
2.	Select one or more notes
3.	Drag the selected notes to a new location
4.	Overture moves the selected notes

To Copy Notes

1.	Click or type s to choose the Select tool.
2.	Select one or more notes.
3.	Press and hold the Control key.
4.	Drag the selected notes to a new location.
Overture copies the selected notes.

To Add a Note

1.	Click or type d to choose the Pencil tool.
2.	Press and hold the left mouse button in the Notes pane. Overture adds a new note with the duration and velocity of the last note you edited.
3.	Drag the note to the desired location.
4.	Release the mouse button.
To Erase a Note

1.	Click or type e to choose the Erase tool.
2.	Click on any note to delete it.

To Erase Several Notes

1.	Click or press e to choose the Erase tool.
2.	Drag the cursor across notes to delete them.
3.	Release the mouse button when you are done.

To Select and Erase Notes

1.	Click or type s to choose the Select tool
2.	Select one or more notes
3.	Press the Delete key to delete the notes.

To Scrub the Song

1.	Click or press b to choose the Scrub tool.
2.	Press and hold the left mouse button in the Graphics window. Overture displays a vertical line and plays any notes that are underneath the line.
3.	Drag the line to the left or right, at any desired speed.

Percussion, Drum Notes, and Note Names

If you are editing a track that is routed to a percussion instrument, the Graphics window automatically configures itself in drum mode. In drum mode, the names of the various percussion instruments replace the piano keys. This means it is easy to change percussion notes from one instrument to another or to select and edit the notes played by a single percussion instrument.

To display drum note names:

1.	Set the track to a percussion definition.
2.	Assign an instrument with defined note names.

Controllers Pane

The Controllers pane, the lower half of the Graphics window, lets you edit MIDI, controller, velocity, and pitch wheel data.

Controllers

MIDI hardware and software use controllers, special types of events, to control the details of how MIDI music is played. They use automation data to adjust volume, pan, and other parameters of MIDI and audio tracks on the fly while playback is in progress.

Overture lets you enter or edit controller and automation data using the Controllers pane in the Graphic window.

Controllers

Controllers are the pedals, knobs, and wheels on your electronic instrument that you use to change the sound while you're playing. For example, a sustain pedal and a modulation wheel are two controllers commonly found on keyboards.

Controllers let you control the detail and character of your music. Say you’re playing a guitar sound on your synthesizer, but it sounds lifeless and dull. That’s partly because a guitar player doesn’t just play notes one after another — he often bends or slides on the strings to put emotion into his playing. You can use controllers in the same way, creating bends, volume swells, and other effects that make sounds more realistic and more fun to listen to.

Your computer can work the controllers on your electronic instrument by sending MIDI Controller messages. The MIDI specification allows for 128 different types of controllers, many of which have standard usages. For example, controller 7 is normally used for volume events, and controller 10 is normally used for pan. Every controller can take on a value ranging from 0 to 127.

The Graphic window toolbar contains two drop-down lists, Data type and Controller, that let you choose the controller or data you want to see and edit. The contents of these lists depend on the port and channel settings and on the instrument assigned to that port and channel. Different instruments use controllers in different ways. Overture lets you use instrument definitions to define the names that go with each controller number. For more information on instrument definitions, see Instruments.

Overture has automatic searchback for all continuous controller data to ensure that the correct controller values are in effect regardless of where you start playback. Suppose you start playback halfway through a song. Overture searches back from that point to find any earlier controller values that should still apply.

Velocity, Pitch Wheel, and Aftertouch

Overture lets you display and edit several other types of data the same way you do controller data. These data depend on your port and channel settings and on the instruments assigned to them. The may include, for example:

•	Velocity. MIDI note velocities

•	Wheel. MIDI pitch wheel or pitch-bend messages

•	ChanAft. MIDI channel aftertouch (ChanAft) values

•	Control. MIDI Controller values

•	Tempo. Song tempos

Note velocity is an attribute of each note and not a completely separate event. You cannot add or remove velocity events in the Controllers pane, but you can use the pencil and straight line tools to adjust the velocity values for existing notes. You can also edit velocities with the Notes>Modify Notes command.

Using the Controllers Pane

The Controllers pane is the most powerful and flexible way to edit data. The Controllers pane is the lower half of the Graphic window.

To display the Controller pane, drag the splitter bar at the bottom of the Graphic window up.

The Controllers pane looks like a graph; the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents the event values. Each event appears as a single vertical line, and the height of this line shows the value of the event. The Controllers pane shows events for a single track. You can only see one type of controller at a time. You can zoom in and out on the Controllers pane using the zoom and unzoom buttons in the scrollbar. To zoom all the way in or out in a single step, hold the Shift key while you click on the tool.

Selection methods in the Controllers pane are similar to those in other views. Here is a summary:

•	Click a controller value to select it

•	Shift-click to add other controller values to the selection

•	Ctrl-click to toggle the selection state of a controller

•	Drag a rectangle around several controller values to select them

The Controllers pane has the same tools you use to edit notes; use them to add or modify controller events:

Tool Name...	What it’s for...
Select	Select controller events, so you can delete them
Line	Draw a straight line indicating a steady increase or decrease in controller value
Pencil	Draw a custom curve indicating changes in controller value
Erase	Erase controller changes already in place
When you use the Draw tool, the speed with which you drag the mouse determines the density of controller events. To insert a larger number of controller events with relatively small changes in value, move the mouse slowly. To insert a smaller number of controller events with relatively large changes in value, drag the mouse quickly.

Creating a change that sounds smooth does not always require making the value change by one on each unit. Bigger jumps may sound very gradual if the tempo is fast. Also, many devices round off the controller values. For example, many instruments respond to volume controller values of 100 and 101 with exactly the same loudness. Using too high a density of controller events can backfire by making the computer work so hard during playback that it is unable to keep up. This will usually cause hiccups or poor timing during playback.

To Display Controller, Velocity, Pitch-Bend, Aftertouch, or Tempo Data

1.	Select the track whose controller data you want to see by clicking the track number in the Track view.
2.	Choose Window>Graphic Window to display the Graphic window.
3.	Drag the horizontal splitter bar so that the Controllers pane is visible.
4.	Choose the data you want to see according to the table:
To see this	Do this
Controller data	Choose Control from the data type menu in the toolbar, and then choose the controller from the controller menu
Velocity data	Choose Velocity from the data type menu in the toolbar
Pitch-bend data	Choose Wheel from the data type menu in the toolbar
Aftertouch data	Choose ChanAft from the data type menu in the toolbar
Tempo data	Choose Tempo from the data type menu in the toolbar
Overture displays the data in the controllers pane.

To Insert a Controller Value

1.	Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus.
2.	Select the tool.
3.	Click in the Controllers pane view at any desired time point and value.
Overture adds a controller at the indicated point.

To Draw a Linear Series of Controllers

1.	Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus.
2.	Select the tool.
3.	Drag a line in the Controllers pane from the starting time and value to the ending time and value.
Overture adds a series of controllers and erases any existing controller values in the same time interval.

To Draw a Series of Controller Value Changes

1.	Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus.
2.	Select the tool.
3.	Drag the cursor across the Controllers pane, adjusting the value as you move left to right.
Overture adds a series of controllers and erases any existing controller values in the same time interval.

To Remove or Erase Controllers

1.	Choose the data type and controller (if applicable) from the toolbar menus.
2.	Select the tool.
3.	Drag the mouse over the desired region to highlight the region you want to erase.
4.	Release the mouse button when you have highlighted the desired region.
Overture deletes all controllers of the selected type. You cannot delete velocity events in the Controllers pane. You must delete the notes that have those velocities.


The Chords Window

Use the Chords window to put chord names and guitar frames in the Score window. To open the Chords window, choose Windows>Chords.

The Chords window cannot be open at the same time as the Lyrics window. If the Lyrics window is open when you choose Windows>Chords, the Lyrics window closes automatically.

For more information, see:

Chord Teminology

Anatomy of the Chord Window

Entering Chord Names with the Mouse

Entering Chord Names with the Keyboard

Step Entering Chord Names

Guitar Frames View

Entering Guitar Frames with the Mouse

Moving Chord Names


Chord Terminology

It’s important to understand the different terminology associated with naming chords. Specifically:

•	Chord. This is the actual notation of multiple notes as shown on the staff in a score.

•	Chord Name. This is the alphanumeric name of the chord as written above a staff to indicate which chord to play.

•	Chord Root. This is the fundamental note of the chord, or its root position.

•	Chord Bass. This is an additional pitch added to a chord name that indicates a note other than the root is the lowest pitch in the actual chord.

•	Chord Suffix. This is the portion of the chord name that describes the actual pattern of notes that make up the chord, without regard for the root or alternate bass. Examples of suffixes are “mi7” or “sus4”.

•	Chord Symbol. In standard music notation, this term is synonymous with “chord name” but in Overture it describes a generic suffix/root/bass pattern as defined in the Chord Symbol library (discussed in Chord Symbols). For example, “CMa7/G” is a different chord name than “EMa7/B”, but they’re based upon the same chord symbol since both use the identical pattern of notes.


Anatomy of the Chord Window

The Chords window contains four separate areas. These are:

•	Root buttons. Click one of the root buttons to set the root of a chord name. Click a sharp or flat button if the root is sharp or flat. You can toggle sharps and flats on and off, but you must always select one of the root letter buttons.

•	Bass buttons. Click one of the bass buttons to add an alternate bass note to a chord name. Click the sharp or flat button if the bass note is sharp or flat. Bass notes (and their corresponding sharp or flat) can be turned off by clicking them a second time.

•	Symbol list. Overture gets this list of symbols from the current Chord Symbol library.

•	Guitar Frames and 1	Bass on Bottom. Click the Guitar Frames button to toggle between guitar frames and chord names. Click the Bass on Bottom to play bass notes below the chord name.

•	Chord Name display. This area shows a preview of the chord name exactly as it appears when you insert it into the Score window.

You can use the Chords window to enter chords names in a score using one of the following techniques:

•	Entering chord names with the mouse. Create chord names by clicking a symbol, root and alternate bass in the Chords window, then click the Score window to insert the chord name.

•	Entering chord names with the computer keyboard. Create chord names by using the computer keyboard to select a symbol, root and alternate bass, then click the Score window to insert the chord name.

•	Step-entering chord names with the computer keyboard. Create chord names using either mouse or keyboard selection of symbol, root and alternate bass, then step-enter the chord name into the Score window.

Overture provides a fourth method for entering chord names, step-entering them with a MIDI keyboard. This method does not use the Chords window. We discuss it in Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard.

Each of the three chord name entry methods that use the Chords window are discussed in the following sections.


Entering Chord Names with the Mouse

Follow through this example to learn how to enter chord names using only the mouse.

Assume you want to enter the following chord names:

•	1st measure: Dmi7

•	2nd measure: G7

•	3rd measure: Ami7/F

To enter these chord names using only the mouse:

1.	Make sure the Step Entry window is closed.

2.	Choose Windows>Chords.

Overture opens the Chords window.

3.	Click the “D” Root button.

Since your first chord is a Dmi7, clicking “D” sets the root of the chord.

4.	Click “Cmi7” in the Chords window’s scrolling symbol list.

Since your first chord is a Dmi7, selecting “Cmi7” sets the correct chord symbol. Overture gets the root of the chord (in this case, a “D”) from the Root button.

5.	Move the cursor into the Score window at exactly the spot you wish to insert the chord name.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer, pointing at the staff where you want to attach the chord name.

6.	Click the mouse.

Overture inserts the chord name into the score.

7.	Continue entering chord names using only the mouse.

If, while the Chords window is open, you select a tool from the Tool Bar, then that tool becomes active and chord insertion is disabled. To continue inserting chords, click in the Chord window’s symbol list.


Entering Guitar Frames with the Mouse

Follow through this example to learn how to enter guitar frames using only the mouse.

Assume you want to enter the following chord names:

•	1st measure: Dmi7

•	2nd measure: G7

•	3rd measure: Ami7/F

To enter these chord names using only the mouse:

1.	Make sure the Step Entry window is closed.

2.	Choose Windows>Chords.

The Chords window opens.

3.	Switch to Guitar Frames view (if needed).  Click the root button and choose “D”. Since your first chord is a Dmi7, choosing “D” sets the root of the chord.

4.	Type m then 7 to choose minor 7 or by clicking on the suffix button and choosing minor 7.

5.	Move the cursor into the Score window at exactly the spot you wish to insert the chord name.The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer, pointing at the staff where you want to attach the chord name.

6.	Click the mouse.

The guitar frame is inserted into the score.

7.	Continue entering chord names using only the mouse.

If, while the Chords window is open, you select a tool from the Tool Bar, then that tool becomes active and chord insertion is disabled. To continue inserting guitar frames, click in the Chord window’s symbol list.


Entering Chord Names with the Keyboard

You can assemble chord names in the Chords window using only the computer keyboard. The table below shows all the key equivalents necessary to create chord names in the Chords window.

Key	Action	Key	Action
A	Sets root to A	Shift-a	Turns added A bass on/off
B	Sets root to B	Shift-b	Turns added B bass on/off
C	Sets root to C	Shift-c	Turns added C bass on/off
D	Sets root to D	Shift-d	Turns added D bass on/off
E	Sets root to E	Shift-e	Turns added E bass on/off
F	Sets root to F	Shift-f	Turns added F bass on/off
G	Sets root to G	Shift-g	Turns added G bass on/off
S	Turns root sharp on/off	Shift-s	Turns bass sharp on/off
W	Turns root flat on/off	Shift-w	Turns bass flat on/off
{	Selects previous chord symbol	}	Selects next chord symbol
Assume, as in the previous section, that you want to enter the following chord names:

•	1st measure: Dmi7

•	2nd measure: G7

•	3rd measure: Ami7/F

To enter these chord names using the computer keyboard:

1.	Make sure the Step Entry window is closed.

2.	Choose Windows>Chords.

Overture opens the Chords window.

3.	Type d to select a root of D.

4.	Type either { or } repeatedly until Overture highlights the Cmi7 chord symbol.

5.	Move the cursor into the Score window at exactly the spot where you want to insert the chord name.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer, pointing at the staff to which Overture will attach the chord name.

6.	Click the mouse.

Overture inserts the chord name into the score.

7.	Select a G7 chord name by typing a g, then typing [ one time to step backwards to the previous chord symbol in the list.

8.	Click the score in the desired location.

9.	Select an Ami7/F chord name by typing an a to set the root, then typing shift-f to add an F bass, then typing ] one time to step to forward to the next chord symbol in the list.

10.	Click the score in the desired location.

If, while the Chords window is open, you select a tool from the Tool Bar, then that tool becomes active and chord insertion is disabled. To continue inserting chords, click in the Chord window’s symbol list.


Guitar Frames View

To enter Guitar Frames click on the Guitar Frames check box in the Chords Window

The symbols view now displays guitar frames from the current Guitar Frames library plus several additional buttons

•	Suffix button. Click the suffix button to choose the desired frame suffix. This is the same list of suffix names found in the Guitar Frames library

•	Tuning button. Click the tuning button to choose the Guitar tuning. This is the same list of tunings found in the Guitar Frames library.

•	Text Only check box. Click the text only box if you want to display only the guitar frame name.


Step Entering Chord Names

You can step-enter chord names from either the computer keyboard or from a MIDI Keyboard. The following section shows how to step enter chord names using the computer keyboard. To learn how to step enter chord names with a MIDI keyboard, see Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard.

Step Entering Chord Names with the Computer Keyboard

Follow through this example to learn how to step enter chord names without using a MIDI keyboard.

Assume, as in the previous sections, that you want to enter the following chord names:

•	1st measure: Dmi7

•	2nd measure: G7

•	3rd measure: Ami7/F

To enter these chord names using the computer keyboard:

1.	Choose Windows>Step Input. Overture opens the Step Input window.
2.	Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the chord name icon from the pop-up menu.
3.	In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin step-entering chord names.
4.	Select a step size of a whole note from the Note Size pop-up menu. Alternatively, you can type a 1 on the computer keyboard to set the step size to a whole note.
5.	Choose Windows>Chords. Overture opens the Chords window.
6.	Using either the mouse or the computer keyboard, select a Dmi7 chord name.
7.	Press Enter. Overture enters the Dmi7 chord name and advances the cursor one measure (since the step size is a whole note and this example is in 4/4 time).
8.	Select a G7 chord name and press Enter. Overture enters the G7 chord name and advances the cursor one more measure.
9.	Select an Ami7/F chord name and press Enter. Overture enters the Ami7/F chord name and advances the cursor one more measure.


Moving Chord Names

You can move chord names either individually or globally by staff (or multiple staves).

Moving Chord Names Globally

When you select Options>Show>Chord Positions, the Score window displays a small triangle to the left of the chords on each system—this is called the Chord Position Indicator.

0	Drag any position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all chord names for that system.

1	Alt-drag a position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all chord names for every remaining system on that page.

2	Control-drag a position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all chord names for every remaining system in the score.

Moving Chord Names Individually

Once you’ve placed chord names in a score, you can modify their automatic placement by dragging any chord name to a new location.

0	To constrain movement to vertical or horizontal while dragging a chord name, shift-drag it. Overture constrains the movement to the direction you moved the mouse when you began shift-dragging. That is, if you begin to drag horizontally, the chord name moves only in the horizontal direction. If you begin to drag vertically, the chord name moves only in the vertical direction.


The Lyrics Window

Use the Lyrics window to add or change lyrics and assign them to specific notes.

To open the Lyrics window, choose Window>Lyrics.

The Lyrics window cannot be open at the same time as the Chords window. If the Chords window is open when you choose Windows>Lyrics, the Chords window closes automatically.

For more information, see:

Anatomy of the Lyrics Window

Using the Lyrics Window

Advanced Lyric Entry Techniques


Anatomy of the Lyrics Window

The Lyrics window is split into four areas:

•	Buttons. This right side of the window has buttons for inserting and deleting lyrics in the Lyrics window, and putting them in the score.

•	Font characteristics. This top area of the window lets you specify the look of the lyrics.

•	Lyric Tabs. Use this middle section of the window to name, select and assign lyrics.

•	Lyric editing area. This bottom portion of the window functions as a standard text editing area. It has its own scroll bar so you can move through long lyrics.

In Overture, a lyric is any body of text displayed in the Lyric editing area. You can assign the individual words and syllables to notes in a score. You assign each lyric to a specific voice beginning on a specific measure and, if necessary, on a particular verse. Select different lyrics by clicking different lyric tabs.

0	The following sections discuss each of the four main portions of the Lyrics window.

Buttons

Use the buttons to add and delete lyrics and to apply lyric changes to a score. There are four buttons. They are:

•	Insert Lyric. Click this button to add a lyric to the score. Each new lyric can have its own starting measure, verse, and voice assignment.

•	Delete Lyric. Click this button to delete the selected lyric. The selected lyric is indicated by which tab is in front.

•	Apply Lyric. Click this button to apply any lyric changes to the score. When you click this button, Overture reflows the lyric, beginning in the specified measure on the designated verse and voice.

Lyric Tabs

Use the Lyric tabs to name, select and assign lyrics.

0	There are numerous elements in the Lyric List. They are:

•	Name box. Use this box in each tab to name each lyric.

•	Track box. Use this box to assign each lyric to a specific track.

•	Measure box. Use this box to assign a starting measure for each lyric. Overture automatically flows lyrics beginning on the first note in the starting measure.

•	Voice box. Use this box to assign each lyric to a specific voice. Overture supports 8 voices.

•	Verse box. Use this box to assign each lyric to a specific verse.

Lyric Editing Area

The lyric editing area functions as a standard text editing area. Type in this area to enter lyrics. Drag across lyrics to change them. Double-click words to select them. Generally, most common word-processor editing rules apply to the lyric editing area. This area has its own scroll bar so you can scroll through long lyrics.


Using the Lyrics Window

Perhaps the easiest way to learn about lyric entry is to follow some examples. The following sections take you step by step through the process of creating and editing lyrics in Overture.

Adding the First Lyric to a Score

To add a lyric to a score that currently contains no lyrics:

1.	Choose Window>Lyrics.

Overture opens the Lyrics window.

2.	Click the Insert Lyric button.

Overture creates a tab

3.	In the Name box, type a name for the lyric.

4.	In the Track box, type the number of the track to which you want to assign the Lyric.

5.	In the Measure box, enter the number of the measure in which you want the lyric to begin.

6.	In the Voice box, enter the voice number (1-8) to which you want to assign the lyric.

7.	In the Verse box, enter the verse number of the lyric.

8.	Type the lyric in the Lyric editing area.

For now, type only single syllable words. If your lyric extends beyond the width of the window (or if you prefer to view your lyrics as poetic verse), you can press the Enter key at the end of each line. Overture treats returns exactly like spaces.

9.	Click the Apply Lyric button.

Overture assigns each word to an individual note automatically.

Adding Additional Lyrics to a Score

To add a lyric to a score that already contains lyrics:

1.	Choose Window>Lyrics.

When a score already contains lyrics, the Lyric window opens with a tab for each lyric already in the score; it does not automatically add a new lyric to the window.

2.	Click the Insert Lyric button.

Overture adds a new tab to the window.

3.	In the Name box, type a name for the new lyric.

4.	In the Track box, type the number of the track to which you want to assign the lyric.

5.	In the Measure box, enter the number of the measure in which you want the Lyric to begin.

6.	In the Voice box, enter the voice number (1-8) to which you want to assign the new lyric.

7.	In the Verse box, enter the verse number of the new lyric.

8.	Type the lyric in the Lyric editing area.

For now, type only single syllable words. If your lyric extends beyond the width of the window (or if you prefer to view your lyrics as poetic verse), you can press the Enter key at the end of each line. Overture treats returns exactly like spaces.

9.	Click the Apply Lyrics button.

Overture assigns each word to an individual note automatically.


Advanced Lyric Entry Techniques

In the previous sections, you created lyrics that contained only single syllable words, with each word assigned to its own note. In the following sections, you learn to create more advanced lyrics.

Entering Multi-syllable Words

You can type words with multiple syllables and have Overture automatically assign each syllable to a note. To do so, simply separate each syllable with either a dash or a space. In the score, Overturecenters dashes between syllables. When a word crosses a barline, Overture centers the dash under the barline.

Entering Multi-note Syllables (Melisma)

To extend a syllable across more than one note, type an underline character. Each underline extends the syllable for one note.

Entering Multiple Words or Syllables on a Single Note

To assign multiple words to a single note, type a non-breaking space between each word. To do that, make sure the Num Lock key is on, then press Alt while typing 0160.

To assign multiple syllables to a single note, type a non-breaking dash between each syllable. To do that, make sure the Num Lock key is on, then press Alt while typing 0150.

Starting a Lyric in the Middle of a Measure

Overture automatically flows lyrics beginning with the first note in the designated measure. If you want lyrics to begin on a note other than the first note in the measure, begin the lyric with a space for each note you wish to skip.

Entering Additional Verses

Popular vocal music often contains multiple verses, with each verse’s text shown immediately below the previous verse. Overture handles verse placement automatically. To add a verse to an existing score:

1.	In the Lyrics window, click Insert Lyric.

Overture adds an empty lyric.

2.	Name the lyric, then assign it to a voice and a starting measure.

3.	Since this is the second verse, enter 2 in the Verse column.

4.	In the Lyric editing area, type the desired text.

5.	Click the Apply Lyric button.

Overture automatically creates the second verse immediately below the first.

Applying Different Fonts To Lyrics

You can apply any font, size, or style to any or all characters in a lyric. To change the font, size, or style of any text in a Lyrics window:

1.	Drag across any character, word or group of words in the Lyrics window.

2.	Select the font you want from the Font drop-down list.

3.	Select the font size you want from the Size drop-down list.

4.	Select the font style you want from the Style drop-down list.

5.	Click the Apply Lyric button.

Overture applies the font changes to your score.

Changing Lyrics

You can edit any lyric even after you’ve flowed it into a score. To do so:

1.	Click the Lyric tab for the first lyric.

Overture shows the lyric in the Lyric Editing area.

2.	Select the text you wish to edit.

You can drag across any characters to select them.

3.	Type the new lyric.

4.	Click the Apply Lyric button.

Overture applies the changes to the score.

Moving Lyrics

You can move lyrics either individually or by line (verse).

Moving Entire Lyric Lines

When you select the Options>Show>Lyric Positions option, Overture places a small triangle to the left of each verse in the Score window— these are the lyric position indicators. If there is one verse assigned to a staff, there’s one lyric position indicator. If there are three verses, there are three position indicators.

Drag any position indicator up or down to change the vertical position of all remaining verses for that staff in that system.

Alt-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to the same verse in every remaining system on that page.

Control-drag a position indicator up or down to apply the vertical change to the same verse in every remaining system in the score.

Moving Lyrics Individually

Once you’ve assigned lyrics to notes in a score, you can modify their automatic placement by dragging any word (or syllable) in a score to a new location.

You can constrain word movement to either the horizontal or vertical direction by holding down the shift key before dragging a word.


The Step Input Window

Use the Step Input window to enter a score by recording MIDI data one step at a time. You can enter notes, chords, or rhythmic slashes in the Step Input window.

To open the Step Input window, choose Windows>Step Input.

For more information, see:

Anatomy of the Step Input Window

Step Entering Notes and Rests

Step Entering Slashes

Step Entering Rhythmic Slashes

Step Entering Chord Names


Anatomy of the Step Input Window

The Step Input window contains four different areas, though not all areas are available at all times. These areas are:

•	Type area. Use this top portion of the window to define the type of symbol you want to input and any related options. This area also contains a counter, showing exact metrical location and pitch.

•	Size area. Use this portion of the window to set the amount of time the counter advances each time you play a note. Size appears as both an actual note value and as a number of units (480 units = one quarter note).

•	Duration area. Use this portion of the window to set the actual duration of the MIDI note you enter. This area is not available if you’re entering chord names.

•	Velocity area. Use this portion of the window to set the actual velocity of the MIDI note you will enter. This area is not available if you’re entering chord names.

The following sections discuss each area in detail.

Type Area

Use this area to define the type of symbol you want to input, to set options related to that symbol, and to view pitch and meter placement of any step-entered data.

The Type area contains four elements:

•	Input Select button

•	Options pop-up menu

•	Counter

•	Pitch indicator

We discuss each element in one of the following sections.

Input Select button

Press and hold the mouse on this button to open the Input Select pop-up menu.

Select the type of symbol you want to step-enter from the Step Input pop-up menu. Overture lets you step-enter five types of music symbols: notes, rests, slashes, rhythmic slashes, and chord names.

Options pop-up menu

Move the cursor over the Options button, then press and hold the mouse to open the Options pop-up menu.

Use the pop-up Options menu to select various step-entry notation options:

•	Force Stems Up. When you select this option, Overture makes the stems of any step-entered notes point upward, regardless of staff position. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it.

•	Force Stems Down. When you select this option, Overture makes the stems of any step-entered notes point downward, regardless of staff position. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it.

•	Force Accidentals to Sharps. When you select this option, Overture notates any accidentals as sharps, regardless of the key. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it.

•	Force Accidentals to Flats. When you select this option, Overture notates any accidentals as flats, regardless of the key. Select this option to enable it (put a check beside it); select it again to disable it.

•	Tie Previous Two Notes. This is actually a command, not an option. When you choose this command, Overture automatically ties together the two notes immediately to the left of the input point. This command allows you to step-enter tied notes easily.

•	Duplicate Previous. This command is enabled only when you are step-entering slashes. Use it to copy the previous measure’s slash pattern into the active measure.

•	Duplicate Previous to End. This command is enabled only when you are step-entering slashes. Use it to copy the previous measure’s slash pattern into all remaining measures in the score.

Counter

The Counter displays (in bars, beats and units) the location of the step you’re about to enter.

The bar number displays the measure number containing the insertion point. The beat number displays how many beats the insertion point is into the measure. The unit number displays how many units the insertion point is into the beat. Overture records and plays notes with a resolution of 480 units per quarter note, so an eighth note would equal 240 units; a sixteenth note would equal 120 units, and so on.

The counter display shown above indicates that the cursor is at 8 • 2 • 240. This means the insertion point is in the eighth measure and midway through the second beat.

Pitch Indicator

The Pitch Indicator displays, as a MIDI note number, the pitch of the note you’re about to enter. MIDI supports 128 notes ranging from C2 to G8 with Middle C = C3.

Size Area

This area sets the amount of time the counter advances each time you play a note. Overture displays the step size as both a note value and as an exact number of units (480 units = one quarter note).

There are several ways to set the size:

•	Method 1: Select a size from the Note Size pop-up menu.

•	Method 2: Use the units numerical to enter a new step size.

•	If you enter a value in the units field that is not an equal subdivision of the beat, the Note Size button shows a “>” or “<” symbol along with the current note size.

•	Method 3: Use the computer keyboard to set step size.

As shown in the table below, you can type keys on your computer keyboard to set the step size.

Key		Function
1		Set value to whole note/rest
2		Set value to half note/rest
4		Set value to quarter note/rest
8		Set value to eighth note/rest
6		Set value to sixteenth note/rest
5		Set value to thirty-second note/rest
3		Turn triplets on or off
.		Turn the dot on or off
Tuplet Checkbox

You can also define the size as a tuplet by clicking the Tuplet checkbox. This lets you create complex timing divisions, like five notes in the space of one quarter note.

Use the mouse or keyboard to set tuplet fields. Overture automatically calculates the units and updates the note size pop-up.

Duration Area

The duration is the length of the note you step enter.

The Duration area is not available when you step-enter chord names.

The duration is different from the size; the duration is the length of the note, and the size is the amount of time the counter advances each step. The space between notes is called the gap. Duration + Gap = Size.

You can select one of three possible duration modes, which you select from the Duration Mode pop-up menu.

These duration modes are:

•	Constant. Select this duration mode to create notes of identical duration, regardless of the step size.

Set the constant duration amount by selecting a value from the Note Size pop-up menu or changing the value in the units field. Changing either of these values updates the other one.

•	Constant Gap. Select this duration mode to create a uniform amount of space between all step-entered notes, regardless of the step size.

Set the constant gap amount by selecting a value from the Gap Size pop-up menu, or change the value in the Units field. Changing either of these values updates the other one.

•	Percent. Select this duration mode to have Overture calculate a note duration as a percentage of the step size.

Set the percentage by entering it in the Percentage Amount field, which appears below the Duration Mode pop-up menu when you select Percent mode.

Velocity Area

Velocity is the parameter that defines how hard you struck a note. The Velocity area is not available when you step-enter chord names.

You can select one of two possible velocity modes from the Velocity Mode pop-up menu.

These velocity modes are:

•	Constant. Select this velocity mode to insert notes of a set velocity, regardless of the actual velocity you play.

Set the desired constant velocity value by entering it into the Constant Velocity field.

•	As Played. Select this velocity mode to insert notes at exactly the velocity you play them.


Step Entering Notes and Rests

You can step-enter notes and rests from either the computer keyboard or a MIDI keyboard.

Step Entering Notes and Rests with the Computer Keyboard

You can step-enter notes and rests using only the computer keyboard. To do so:

1.	Choose Windows>Step Input.

Overture opens the Step Input window.

2.	Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the note icon from the pop-up menu.

3.	Select the voice you’d like to enter from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window.

Alternatively, type Control-1 through Control-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control-0 to select all voices.

4.	In the Score window, click where you’d like to begin entering music.

5.	If desired, select a stem direction and accidental naming scheme from the pop-up Options menu.

You need to do this only if you want to override Overture’s default stem direction and accidental naming algorithms.

6.	On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the note you wish to enter.

Alternatively, you can select a size from the Note Size pop-up menu, but you’ll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents.

When you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the note you’re about to enter.

7.	On the computer keyboard, type the letter of the scale tone you wish to enter (c, d, e, f, g, a, b).

Notice that when you type a letter, the Pitch Indicator changes to show the pitch of the note you’re about to enter.

8.	Enter the desired Duration parameters.

9.	Enter the desired Velocity parameters.

10.	Press the Enter key.

Overture enters the note as specified and moves the cursor to the next step.

Step-Entering Rests

You can step-enter rests as well as notes from the computer keyboard. To do so:

1.	On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the rest you wish to enter.

2.	If desired, select the voice you’d like to enter from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the Score window.

Alternatively, you could type control-1  through control-8  to select voices 1-8, or type control-0 to select all voices.

3.	On the keyboard, press space to insert a rest of the selected duration.

Pressing Space inserts rests without actually toggling the Step Input window to Rest Entry mode. This allows you to step-enter the occasional rest quickly while performing the more common task of step-entering notes. If you actually wish to enter Rest Entry mode, select the rest icon from the Input Select pop-up menu.

When in Rest Entry mode, select rest values from the Note Size pop-up menu. To insert a rest into the score, press either Enter or Space on your computer keyboard.

You can toggle back and forth between Rest Entry mode and Note Entry mode by typing either r or = on your computer keyboard.

Shifting Step-Entry Octaves

When you enter notes with the computer keyboard, the seven scale tone keys (c, d, e, f, g, a, b) all enter notes in the octave beginning with middle C. If you want to enter notes in a higher or lower octave range, you need to shift the step-entry octave. To do so:

Type a lower case o to raise the step-entry range one octave. Type an upper case O to lower the step-entry range one octave.

This change affects the current step and all steps after it.

Notice that when you change the octave range, the Pitch Indicator changes to show the octave of the note you’re about to enter.

Step Entering Accidentals

Step entry always enters notes using the key of the active measure. For example, if your song is in F major and you type a b, Overture actually enters a bb. If you need to enter an accidental, use the up and down arrow keys to raise and lower pitch in half-step increments. To change the pitch of a step-entered note:

After typing the letter of the scale tone you wish to enter, press up arrow to raise its pitch a half step, or press down arrow to lower its pitch a half step.

You can step up and down through all note values using the up arrow and down arrow keys.

Step Entering Chords

To step-enter chords using the computer keyboard:

1.	Type the first note in the chord.

2.	Press Enter.

Pressing Enter enters the note into Overture but does not advance the cursor to the next step.

3.	Type the next note in the chord, then press Enter.

Overture enters the second note at the same cursor location as the first.

4.	Continue entering notes in your chord.

5.	After entering the last note in your chord, press Enter to advance the cursor to the next step.

To change chord roots using the letter keys, engage the Caps Lock key.

Step Entering Tied Notes

To step-enter tied notes using the computer keyboard:

1.	Enter the first note using previously discussed techniques.

2.	Enter the second note using previously discussed techniques.

3.	Type ;.

Alternatively, you can select Tie Previous Two Notes from the Tool Bar’s pop-up Options menu.

Overture ties together the two notes immediately to the left of the insertion point.

Auto-Tied Notes

Overture automatically splits any step-entered note across a barline.

For example, assume you’ve step-entered the music below, and you now want to enter a quarter note.

There is only room in the measure for an eighth note, so when you step-enter a quarter note, Overture automatically creates two eighth notes tied across the barline below.

Stepping Through a Score

To step backward through a score and erase the most recently entered note or rest:

•	Press delete to back up one step and erase it. The cursor moves one step to the left and Overture erases the note or rest associated with that step. Each time you press delete Overture backspaces and erases the previous step.

To start step recording in the middle of a measure (to enter a different voice, for example), or to skip a few steps without entering any actual music:

1.	Press right arrow to step forward through the score.

Overture steps forward by the amount indicated by the Note Value selector in the tool bar. It does not enter any notes or rests.

2.	Press left arrow to step backward through the score.

Overture steps backward by the amount indicated by the Note Value selector in the tool bar. It does not erase any notes or rests.

Synopsis of Step-Entry Key Modifiers

The following table shows a synopsis of all the key modifiers discussed in the previous sections.

Key		Function
right arrow		Step forward through a score without entering notes
left arrow		Step backward through a score without deleting notes
delete		Step backward through a score, deleting each step
up arrow		Raise current pitch 1/2 step
down arrow		Lower current pitch 1/2 step
o		Raise current and future pitch range one octave
O		Lower current and future pitch range one octave
Enter (keyboard)		Enter a note or rest, then step forward
Enter (number pad)		Enter a note or rest, but don’t step forward (use for step-entering chords)
;		Tie together the two previous notes
R or =		Toggle between Note Entry mode and RestEntry mode
space		Insert a rest while in Note Entry mode
Step Entering Notes and Rests with a MIDI Keyboard

To step enter a score using a MIDI controller:

1.	Choose Windows>Step Input.

Overture opens the Step Input window.

2.	Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the note icon from the pop-up menu.

3.	Select the voice you’d like to enter from the Voice pop-up voice menu at the bottom of the Score window.

Alternatively, type Control-1 through Control-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control-0 to select all voices.

4.	In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin entering music.

5.	If desired, select a stem direction and accidental naming scheme from the pop-up Options menu.

You need to do this only if you want to override Overture’s default stem direction and accidental naming algorithms.

6.	On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the note you wish to enter.

Alternatively, you could select a size from the Note Size pop-up menu—however, you’ll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents.

When you type a number, the Note Size pop-up menu changes to show the value of the note you’re about to enter.

7.	Enter the desired Duration parameters.

We discuss duration parameters in Duration Area.

8.	Enter the desired Velocity parameters.

We discuss velocity parameters in Velocity Area.

9.	On your MIDI keyboard, play the note (or chord) you wish to enter.

Overture enters the note and moves the cursor to the next step.

Using a MIDI keyboard, you can step record single notes or entire chords.

You can enter a rest by pressing a Space or you can type r or = to toggle to Rest Entry mode, then play any note on your MIDI keyboard. As with step entry of notes from the keyboard, you can delete the previous step by pressing Delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score. Also, you can enter tied notes as discussed in Step Entering Tied Notes.

Entering Rests

You can use a MIDI keyboard to enter rests. To do so:

1.	Type a number to set the duration of the rest you wish to enter.

2.	Type either an r (for rest) or =.

This is the same as selecting the rest icon from the Input Select pop-up menu. Notice that when you type r or =, the Input Select button changes to show that you’re about to enter a rest.

3.	On your MIDI keyboard, play any note to insert the rest.

Overture enters the rest and moves the cursor to the next step.

Alternatively, you can simply press Space on your keyboard to enter a rest without toggling to Rest Entry mode.


Step Entering Slashes

Lead sheets for guitarists generally contain chord names and a series of slashes to indicate that the performer is to strum the chords. This section discusses how to use Overture’s Step Input window to enter strum slashes into a score quickly. See Step Entering Chord Names to learn how to step-enter chord names).

1.	Choose Windows>Step Input.

Overture opens the Step Input window.

2.	Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the slash icon from the pop-up menu.

3.	Select the voice you’d like to enter from the Voice pop-up voice menu at the bottom of the Score window.

Alternatively, type Control-1 through Control-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control-0 to select all voices.

4.	In the Score window, click the measure where you want to begin entering slashes.

5.	On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the Step Size of the slash you wish to enter.

See the table to see how number keys correspond to step sizes. Generally, you use one slash per quarter note.

Alternatively, you can select a note value from the Note Size pop-up menu. You’ll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents.

Notice that when you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the note you’re about to enter.

6.	On your MIDI keyboard, play any note to enter a slash.

Overture enters the slash and moves the cursor to the next step. Slashes do not have stems because they do not actually indicate any rhythm. They also do not indicate pitch. The played pitches may be different from what the score shows.

The position at which the slash note is displayed is independent from the played pitch (or pitches if a chord has been entered). Slash symbols may be transposed, affecting the played pitch, without changing the displayed position.

You can enter a rest by pressing a Space, or you can type r or = to toggle to Rest Entry mode, then play any note on your MIDI keyboard. As with step entry of notes, you can delete the previous step by pressing Delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score.

You can step enter slashes using only the computer keyboard. The technique is identical to that used for entering notes and rests from the keyboard. For more information, see Step Entering Notes and Rests with the Computer Keyboard.


Step Entering Rhythmic Slashes

Sometimes, it’s desirable to indicate the actual strumming pattern on a lead sheet. You do this by entering rhythmic slashes. Rhythmic slashes (unlike regular slashes) have stems, flags and beams to indicate rhythm. Like regular slashes, rhythmic slashes do not indicate pitch—the played pitches may be different from what the score shows.

This section discusses how to use Overture’s Step Entry mode to enter rhythmic slashes in a score quickly. See Step Entering Chord Names to learn how to step-enter chord names.

1.	Choose Windows>Step Input.

Overture opens the Step Input window.

2.	Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the rhythmic slash icon from the pop-up menu.

3.	Select the voice you’d like to enter from the Voice pop-up voice menu at the bottom of the Score window.

Alternatively, type Control-1 through Control-8 to select voices 1-8, or type Control-0 to select all voices.

4.	In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin entering rhythmic slashes.

5.	On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size of the slash you wish to enter.

See the table to see how number keys correspond to step sizes.

Alternatively, select a note value from the Note Size pop-up menu, but you’ll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents.

Notice that when you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the note you’re about to enter.

6.	On your MIDI keyboard, play any note to enter a rhythmic slash.

Overture enters the rhythmic slash and moves the cursor to the next step.

You can enter a rest by typing a space, or you can type r or = to toggle to Rest Entry mode, then play any note on your MIDI keyboard. As with step entry of notes, you can delete the previous step by pressing Delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score.

You can step enter rhythmic slashes using only the computer keyboard. The technique is identical to that used for entering notes and rests from the keyboard. For more information, see Step Entering Notes and Rests with the Computer Keyboard.


Step Entering Chord Names

You can step-enter chord names from either the computer keyboard or from a MIDI Keyboard. The following section shows how to step enter chord names using a MIDI keyboard. To learn how to step enter chord names with the computer keyboard, see Step Entering Chord Names with the Computer Keyboard.

Step Entering Chord Names with a MIDI Keyboard

1.	Choose Windows>Step Input.

Overture opens the Step Input window.

2.	Press and hold the mouse on the Input Select button, then select the chord name icon from the pop-up menu.

3.	In the Score window, click in the measure where you want to begin step-entering chord names.

4.	On the computer keyboard, type a number to set the step size you wish to enter.

See the table to see how number keys correspond to step durations.

Alternatively, select a note value from the Note Size pop-up menu, but you’ll probably find it quicker to use the keyboard equivalents.

When you type a number, the Note Size button changes to show the value of the note you’re about to enter.

5.	On your MIDI keyboard, play the chord you wish to notate.

Overture searches the current Chord Symbol library for a matching chord. If it finds a matching chord, it enters the chord name above the staff and moves the cursor to the next step.

Overture alerts you if it doesn’t find a matching chord in your chord library and gives you the option of opening the current chord library to add the chord.

For more information about how Overture recognizes chords, see “About Chord Recognition” below. For more information about Chord Symbol libraries, see Chord Symbols.

As with step-entry of notes, you can delete the previous step by pressing delete and you can move forward or backward through a score by pressing right arrow or left arrow. For more information, see Stepping Through a Score.

About Chord Recognition

Follow through these steps to learn how Overture names chords:

1.	If you want to enter a chord name without an alternate bass note, play the chord such that its root is the lowest note.

For example, if you play F-A-C, Overture assumes F is the root, then searches the Chord Symbol library and matches the note pattern with a major chord. Overture then enters a chord name of F.

2.	If you want to enter a chord name with an alternate bass note, play the chord so that the bass note it the lowest note and the root is the second lowest note.

For example, if you play E-F-A-C, Overture assumes E is the root, then searches the Chord Symbol library for that four-note pattern. When it doesn’t find a match, it assumes that E is an alternate bass and that F is the root. It then searches the Chord Symbol library for the remaining three-note pattern. It matches the major chord. Overture then enters a chord name of F/E.

3.	If you want to enter a chord name with an alternate bass note that’s the same as a note in the chord, use the note twice in your chord.

For example, if you wanted to notate Fmaj7 with an E bass, simply play E-F-A-C-E. Overture recognizes the F-A-C-E as an Fmaj7 and adds the first E as an alternate bass.

The figure below illustrates how Overture interprets chords played on a MIDI controller.

Chord recognition always references the current Chord Symbol library. For more information about Chord Symbol libraries, see Chord Symbols.


Score Menu

The Score menu commands are as follows:

Insert Page

Delete Page

Layout Page

Page Dimensions

Increase Systems on Page

Decrease Systems on Page

Insert Track

Delete Track

Hide/Show Staves

Setup Track

Respace Staves

Recalc Layout

Redraw Page

Allotment

Font Map

Title Page

Engraver


Score>Insert Page

Score/Insert Page

Choose this command to add one or more pages to the current Overture score. When you choose Score>Insert Page, Overture opens the Insert Page dialog box.

Using the Insert Page Dialog Box

Choose whether you want to add pages before or after the current page, and enter the number of pages you want added to the score. Click the OK button to add the pages. Click Cancel if you decide not to add any pages to your Overture score. Inserted pages use the Page Layout assigned to the current page. For more information about page layout, see Layout Page.


Score>Delete Page

Score/Delete Page

Choose this command to delete one or more pages from the current Overture score. When you choose the Delete Page command, Overture displays the Delete Page dialog box.

Enter the number of pages you want to delete, then click the OK button. Overture deletes pages beginning with the current page.


Score>Layout Page

Score/Layout Page

Choose this command to specify the default number of measures in a system and the default number of systems on a page. When you choose the Score>Layout Page, Overture displays the Layout Page dialog box.

About the Layout Page Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Layout Page dialog box.

•	Systems per Page. Use this numerical to enter the number of systems you want displayed on the current page.

If you add staves to systems such that the requested number of systems no longer fits within the current page, Overture automatically increases the length of the page. It automatically tiles printed pages (as discussed in The Use Tiles Option).

0	If you don’t want to have your pages tiled, decrease the value of the Systems per Page numerical, thus automatically shrinking the length of the page.

1	If you don’t want Overture to increase page size automatically when you add staves, check the General preference option Auto Wrap Systems in the Preferences dialog box. See Auto Wrap Systems.

2	If you reduce the number of systems per page, Overture warns you, then reduces the page length.

•	Measures per System. Use this numerical to enter the default number of measures you want in each system on the current page.

•	All Remaining Pages. If you check this option, Overture applies the Systems per Page and Measures per System choices to every remaining page in your score. It also generates new measures to fit existing pages. If you leave this option unchecked, Overture applies your choices only to the current page and does not change the number of measures in the score.


Score>Page Dimensions

Score/Page Dimensions

Choose this command to specify page and margin sizes for the current Overture score. When you choose Score>Page Dimensions, Overture opens the Page Dimensions dialog box.

You can move the Page Dimensions dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Page Dimensions Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Page Dimensions dialog box. These are described in the following sections.

Metric Measurements

You can specify either inches or centimeters for measurement units.

Click the units display in the Page Dimensions dialog box to switch between the two units.

Page Size Controls

Use the page size controls to set the width and height of a page (up to a maximum of 34” x 44”). You can either type the dimensions into the Page Width and Page Height fields, or you can drag the lower right corner of the score graphic.

Normally, you use a Page Width and Page Height that match the dimensions of your paper. There are two instances, however, when these dimensions do not match the physical size of your output paper:

•	Creating scaled scores. For information, see The Normal Size and Paper Size Buttons.

•	Creating large, tiled scores. For more information, see The Use Tiles Option.

If you create a page that’s too large to fit into the score graphic area, you can drag it around to see any part of it.

Margin Controls

Use the margin controls to set all four margins on a page. As shown in the following figure, you can either type the margin widths into the Margin fields, or you can drag the corners of the dotted margin indicators in the score graphic.

Reduction

Use the Reduction control to specify a percentage increase or decrease in the size of the score.  This lets you get more music on your score.

The Use Tiles Option

Choose the Use Tiles option when you want Overture to print pages larger than the physical dimensions of the paper in your printer. Do this by printing individual tiles that you can tape together to create a larger page. This is like the way billboards and other large banners are produced.

The Normal Size and Paper Size Buttons

Use either the Normal Size or Paper Size buttons to set a default score size. There are subtle differences between the default values obtained with these two buttons.

When you click the Normal Size button, Overture performs the following tasks:

•	It sets the score size to the paper dimensions currently selected in the Reduction control.

•	It sets all margins to 1/2”.

If you use the Reduction control to scale the printed output, Overture scales the page proportionally and prints it in the upper left corner of the paper.

Assume, for example, that your Page Setup dialog box is set for 8.5” x 11” and you have set a scaling of 50%. When you click the Normal Size button, Overture creates an 8.5” x 11” score. Because of the 50% scaling, a printed page looks like this:

When you click the Paper Size button, Overture performs the following tasks:

•	It sets the margins to those that are specified by your printer driver software. Many printers let you change this margin size in the Page Setup dialog box.

•	It looks at the Page Setup dialog box to see the paper size and at the scaling in the Reduction control. It then sets the score size to whatever is necessary to create the physical page size selected in the Page Setup dialog box.

Assume, for example, that your Page Setup dialog is set for 8.5” x 11” and you have set a scaling of 50%. When you click the Paper Size button, Overture creates a 17” x 22” score. This is because a 17” x 22” score printed at 50% is 8.5” x 11”. A printed page looks like this:

Notice the difference between the two examples. This is the primary difference between the Normal Size and Paper Size buttons.

Use the Normal Size button to create printed output that maintains the same proportions as your paper. This is especially useful for printing scaled thumbnail pages of a score, or parts for individual instruments in a marching band.

Use the Paper Size button to create printed output that fills a piece of paper no matter what the scaling. Since this button gives you more printing area on a scaled page, you generally want to choose Score>Layout Page and increase the number of measures in a system and number of systems on a page.


Increase Systems on Page
Score>Increase Systems on Page

Score/Increase Systems

Choose this command to move a system from the top of the following page to the bottom of the current page, thereby increasing the number of systems on the current page. Overture does not change the default number of systems for any remaining pages, so systems continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the top system on each page moves to the bottom of the preceding page). If the final page in the score contains more than one system, Overture decreases the number of systems on that final page. If the final page in the score contains only one system, Overture moves it to the bottom of the previous page and deletes the blank page from your score.


Score>Decrease Systems on Page

Score/Decrease Systems

Choose this command to move a system from the bottom of the current page to the top of the following page, thereby decreasing the number of systems on the current page. Overture does not change the default number of systems for any remaining pages, so systems continue to wrap throughout the score (that is, the bottom system on each page moves to the top of the following page).

If the final page in the score contains fewer systems than the default Systems per Page value (as set in the Layout Page dialog box), Overture increases the number of systems on that final page. If the final page in the score contains the same number of systems as specified in the Layout Page dialog box, Overture adds a new page containing a single system.


Score>Insert Track

Score/Insert Track

Choose this command to insert a new track into the score. When you choose the Insert command, the Insert Track dialog box opens.

Using the Insert Track Dialog Box

To insert a new track into your score:

1.	Click on the track where you want to insert the new track.

2.	Choose Score>Insert Track to open the Insert Track dialog box.

3.	Choose the type on track (instrument) you want to insert.

4.	Click either the Before current track or After current track radio buttons.

If you select Before current track, the new track iis inserted mmediately before the active track (the track that contains the insertion point).

If you select After current track, the new track iis inserted immediately after the active track.

5.	Click the OK button.


Delete Track
Score>Delete Track

Score/Delete Track

Choose this command to delete the current track (the track that contains the insertion point).


Score>Hide/Show Staves

Score/Hide/Show Staves

Choose this command to select which staves are visible in the current system. The current system is the system that contains the insertion point. When you choose Score>Hide/Show Staves, Overture opens the Hide/Show Staves dialog box.

You can move the Hide/Show Staves dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

About the Hide/Show Staves Dialog Box

The Hide/Show Staves dialog box selects which tracks to display in the current system. Visible tracks are marked with a check; hidden tracks are not checked. Click the Show column next to the desired track to toggle between visible and hidden.

Using the Hide/Show Staves Command

It’s common to hide staves when a particular instrument doesn’t play for an extended time. For example, you may have a vocal/piano score, but the singer doesn’t perform for the first eight measures. Rather than show eight measures of rests, you can hide the singer’s staff for the first eight measures. To do so:

1.	Set up your score so that it contains four measure in each of the first two systems.

You can do this using the Measures>Wrap Left or Measures>Wrap Right commands or by changing the Measures per System numerical in the Page Layout dialog box.

2.	Click anywhere in the top system to make it the active system.

3.	Choose Score>Hide/Show Staves.

Overture opens the Hide/Show Staves dialog box.

4.	Click the Show column next to the Vocal track to uncheck it.

5.	At the bottom of the dialog box, type the number 2 in the Apply to x systems field.

This means you hide this staff in both the active system and the system below it.

6.	Click the OK button.

Overture hides the vocal staff from the first two systems.

You can tell Overture to perform part of this procedure automatically. Click the Auto Hide checkbox. Overture automatically hides systems starting at the cursor and continuing for as many systems as you specify in the Apply to x systems box. It does this even though you have the staves marked Show, for any tracks with no data in them.


Score>Setup Track

Score/Setup Track

Choose this command to set various options for the staff that contains the active measure. When you choose Score>Setup Track, Overture produces the Setup Track dialog box.

You can also open the Setup Track dialog box by double-clicking either the clef at the beginning of any staff system or the staff selector handle. You don’t actually see the handle unless you select Options>Show>Handles. You can double-click in the location of the handle whether it’s visible or not.

You can move the Setup Track dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The Setup Track dialog box has four main editing areas. We discuss these in the following sections.

Track Name Options

Use this portion of the dialog box to name tracks, assign a font to the track names, and select whether or not to display track names in the score.

There are numerous elements in the Track Name Options portion of the Setup Track dialog box. These are:

•	Main field. Type the full name of the track in this field. If you check the Show Name option, this name appears next to the first staff. Using a comma (,) forces a carriage return in the track name—this is particularly useful for long track names.

If you select something from the Instrument Name pop-up menu (as discussed in Instrument Options), Overture automatically fills this field with the name of the selected Instrument. Typing a new name replaces the old one.

•	Abbreviated field. Type the abbreviated name of the track in this field. If you check Show Name, this text appears next to all staves after the first. If you select something from the Instrument Name pop-up menu (as discussed in “Instrument Options” below), Overture automatically fills this field with the abbreviated name of the selected Instrument. Typing a new abbreviation replaces the old one.

•	Show Name option. If you check this option, Overture shows the name of the selected track in the score. All displayed track names center around the widest name in a system.

If you hold down the Alt key when you check Show Name, Overture automatically shows the names of all tracks in the score (not just the selected track). Similarly, if you hold down the Alt key when you uncheck Show Name, Overture automatically hides the names of all tracks.

•	Show Abbreviation. If you check this option, Overture shows the abbreviation of the selected track in the score.

•	Font button. Click this button to open the Font Select dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the font with which to display track names in the score. For more information, see Font Button.

Instrument Options

Use this portion of the dialog box to assign a particular type of notation to a track.

Instrument Pop-up Menu

The appearance of the Instrument options section changes depending on the instrument you select from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. To select an Instrument Name:

1.	Press and hold the mouse on the Instrument Name pop-up menu.

Overture opens a menu of the instruments in the current Instruments library.

2.	Move the cursor over the desired instrument and release the mouse button.

Overture sets the track to the selected Instrument. When you select an instrument, Overture puts its pitch range, transposition, and clef into the appropriate Setup Track dialog box fields. You can still edit all the fields in the dialog box after selecting an instrument but this is usually not necessary.

See Instruments Library for a full discussion of the Instruments Library.

Normally, we recommend using the Tracks Window to assign instruments to tracks. The Instrument pop-up menu allows the entry of all instrument attributes into the track except the device and patch. This behavior lets imported tracks that already have the correct device and patch acquire the other instrument attributes without overwriting the device and patch.

The Instruments listed are of three types:

•	Normal. These are instruments that Overture notates using standard music notation, for example, Cello, Guitar, Soprano, and Trumpet in Bb. For more information, see “Normal Tracks” below.

•	Percussive. These are instruments that Overture notates using percussion notation, for example, non-pitched instruments like Bass Drum, Drums, and Percussion. For more information, see Percussive Tracks.

•	Tablature. These are instruments that Overture notates using tablature notation. Select this type of instrument by selecting Tablature from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. For more information, see Tablature Tracks.

Normal Tracks

If you select an Instrument of normal type, Overture’s Instrument options look like these.

There are numerous elements in the Instrument Options section of the Track Setup Dialog Box. These are:

•	Instrument Name pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to select an Instrument Name for the track from the Instruments library. When you select an Instrument Name from this pop-up menu, Overture automatically fills in the Range, Transpose, and Middle C Offset numericals, selects a Starting Clef and Transposed Clef, and supplies Main and Abbreviated track names to the Track Name options in the dialog box.

•	GM Equivalent pop-up menu. The appropriate patch appears here when you select an instrument name. If you need to, change the patch here.

•	Range numericals. Use these numericals to set the range of the Instrument notated by the track. The left numerical sets the lowest note in the range. The right numerical sets the highest note in the range. You can search your score for notes that are out of an instrument’s specified range by choosing Options>Show>Range Errors (as discussed in Show>Range Errors).

•	Transpose numerical. If you’re notating a transposed instrument (such as many trumpets, clarinets, english horns, and so on) and you want Overture to transpose an extracted part into the correct key, use this numerical to set the transposition amount. This numerical does affect MIDI playback pitch—it’s used strictly to transpose a track when you extract it. To display the transposition in the current score, choose Options>Show>Tracks Transposed.

For example, if the extracted track is to be played by a Bb trumpet, set the numerical to 2. Since a Bb trumpet sounds a major second lower than written, a value of +2 indicates that the extracted trumpet part needs to be transposed two half-steps higher than in the conductor’s score.

Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. For more information about extracting parts, see Extract Parts.

•	MIDDLE C Offset numerical. If you’re notating a transposed instrument (such as many trumpets, clarinets, english horns, and so on) and you’ve asked Overture to transpose the extracted part into the correct key (via the Transpose numerical), use this numerical to set the correct MIDI playback pitch of the extracted part. This numerical affects the score containing the extracted part. To display the transposition in the current score, choose Options>Show>Tracks Transposed.

For example, if you’re notating a Bb trumpet, set the MIDDLE C Offset numerical to -2. Since an extracted trumpet part is notated two half-steps higher than it sounds, an offset value of -2 insures that MIDI playback remains at the correct pitch.

0	Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu. For more information about extracting parts, see Extract Parts.

•	Starting Clef pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to select which clef Overture uses to notate the track in the current score.

Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu.

•	Transposed Clef pop-up menu. Use this pop-up menu to select which clef Overture is to use to notate the track in a transposed extracted score. This pop-up menu has no effect on the current score, only on the score containing the extracted part.

Overture sets this numerical automatically when you select an Instrument Name from the Instrument Name pop-up menu.

Percussive Tracks

If you select one of the percussive Instrument types, Overture’s Instrument options change to allow you to choose among percussive options.

0	You must understand Drum Maps in order to understand percussive tracks. Percussive tracks refer to the current Drum Map for pitch names, default noteheads and default staff positions. To learn about Drum Maps, see Drum Map.

1	The percussive track options are arranged in a grid. There are eight rows in the grid. Each row corresponds to a single percussion instrument (called a part). If you need to notate more than eight drum parts, you’ll need to use more than one percussive track.  If you need to change clef defaults, return to the track in the score window and insert a new clef from the clef palette.

2	There are three columns in the grid.

•	Pitch (Name) pop-up menu. Press and hold the Pitch (Name) cell to open a pop-up menu. From the menu, select the Pitch (or pitch name) to be played by the corresponding part. The pop-up menu displays all the MIDI notes as defined by your current Drum Map. If you want the menu to display only those pitches to which you’ve assigned names, hold down the Alt key when you click the Pitch (Name) cell. When you select a new Pitch (Name), Overture automatically changes the corresponding Head and Position to match those assigned to that pitch in your current Drum Map.

You can also select a different pitch by dragging across it, then playing a note on your MIDI controller.

•	Head pop-up menu. This column displays the notehead with which Overture notates the corresponding drum. When you select a different drum in the Pitch (Name) column, Overture automatically changes the head to match the one assigned to that pitch in your current Drum Map.

You can use this column to override your Drum Map’s default head by pressing and holding the notehead icon and selecting a new head from the pop-up menu. When you override a Drum Map’s notehead assignment, you do not change the Drum Map, only the percussive track. This allows you to create numerous percussive tracks that reference the same Drum Map, but that use different noteheads.

•	Position numerical. This column displays the staff position on which Overture notates the corresponding drum. See About the Drum Map Dialog Box to learn about position numbers. When you select a different drum in the Pitch (Name) column, Overture automatically changes the position to match the one assigned to that pitch in your current Drum Map.

You can use this column to override your Drum Map’s default position by entering a different position. When you override a Drum Map’s position assignment, you do not change the Drum Map; only the percussive track. This allows you to create numerous percussive tracks that reference the same Drum Map, but that use different positions.

Once you’ve assigned parts in a percussive track, Overture uses your assignments to record, notate, and play drum parts. When you record into a percussive track, Overture automatically maps each part’s MIDI note to the selected staff position and assigns the selected notehead. When you play a percussive track, Overture automatically maps the displayed notes to their correct MIDI pitch so that it plays the correct drum sounds.

Tablature Tracks

If you select Tablature from the Instrument Name pop-up menu, Overture automatically creates a six-line staff with a TAB clef. Additional Tablature track options are the same as those of a normal track. See Normal Tracks.

0	Use tablature notation to indicate guitar music by string and fret number, rather than with a traditional musical staff. For information about setting up and using a Tablature track, see Chapter 16, “Tablature Button.”

1	MIDI playback does not play tablature tracks, nor do MIDI transpose commands change their pitch. If you want MIDI playback of a tablature track, you must create am additional staff that contains traditional notation. If desired, you can then hide the traditionally notated staff in your printed score by using the Score>Hide/Show Staves command as discussed in Hide/Show Staves.

Staff Display Options

Use this portion of the Setup Track dialog box to define the appearance of the staff used to notate the track.

0	The Staff Display options are:

•	Scale numerical. Use this numerical to set the scale of the selected staff. Unlike the Scale tool, which scales a single staff in a single system, the Scale numerical scales every occurrence of this staff in every system.

If you hold down the Alt key while setting this numerical, Overture sets the scaling of every staff in every system to the new value.

•	Show Clef option. Select this option if you want Overture to display a clef on the staff. You normally leave this option checked unless you’re notating some types of non-pitched instruments or a strum pattern on a lead sheet.

•	Show Barlines option. Select this option if you want Overture to display barlines. You normally leave this option checked unless you’re notating music with no set meter or a strum pattern on a lead sheet.

•	Show Ledger Lines option. Select this option if you want Overture to display any needed ledger lines above or below the selected staff.

•	Show Key Signature option. Select this option if you want Overture to display the key signature of the selected staff. You normally leave this option checked unless you’re notating a non-pitched instrument, tablature notation, or a strum pattern on a lead sheet.

•	Show Time Signature option. Select this option if you want Overture to display the time signature of the selected staff. You normally leave this option checked unless you’re notating music with no set meter, or unless you’re notating a tablature staff or a strum pattern on a lead sheet.

•	Filled Rests option. Use this option in conjunction with the Options>Show>Filled Measure Rests command. Select this option if you want Overture to fill empty measures in the current track with whole measure rests. Deselect this option if you want Overture to leave empty measures in the current track.

•	Flat Beams option. Select this option to display subsequent beams as flat rather than slanted. You may want to do this if slanted beams look jagged on your monitor. You can change the angle of a beam by dragging its ends.

Selecting Flat Beams affects the beams entered subsequently and does not replace slanted beams previously entered in the track. In order to turn previously entered slanted beams in a track into flat beams:

1.	Select the Flat Beams option in the Setup Track dialog box for the track whose beams you’d like to flatten.

2.	Select the notes that you’d like to convert to flat beams.

Choose Edit>Select All to select all displayed notes in all tracks.

Double-click in a measure to select all notes in that measure for that track.

3.	Choose Notes>Beam>Based on Meter.

The beaming rules specified in the Set Meter dialog box create groups with flat beams for all selected notes. These same rules create beams if you select Options>Auto Beam. Be careful, because this will over-ride any manual beaming you’ve performed on selected notes.

•	Hide Staff Clef option. Select this option to suppress the display of clefs after the first clef in the track. You usually hide clefs when creating charts for a single instrument that doesn’t require restatement of the clef. Be careful when hiding clefs because it’s easy to get confused when multiple staves are displayed.

If you insert a clef after the beginning of the piece, Overture displays the first new clef but none thereafter.

•	Staff Design area. Use this area to design a custom line arrangement for any staff. Traditional staves use five lines, but some instruments (particularly percussion) use staves with a different number of lines. Click the small squares to the right of the Staff Design area to show or hide any of up to sixteen staff lines. You can even create staves with no lines (these are particularly useful for indicating strum patterns in a lead sheet as shown in the following figure). The small arrow to the left of the Staff Design area indicates where the middle line is in a standard five line staff.

Action Buttons

Use this portion of the dialog box to step through staves in a system; cancel your changes; or apply your changes to the selected staff.

0	The action buttons are

•	Previous button. Click this button to apply the changes to the selected track, then step up to display the attributes of the track immediately above it.

•	Next button. Click this button to apply the changes to the selected track, then step down to display the attributes of the track immediately below it.

•	Cancel button. Click this button to close the Setup Track dialog box without applying any of the changes to the selected track.

•	OK button. Click this button to apply the changes to the selected track and close the Setup Track dialog box.

GM Equivalent

When you select an instrument from the Instruments pop-up menu in the Setup Track dialog box, the GM # (if there is one) for that instrument appears in the GM Equivalent pop-up menu. You can override the GM # by selecting a new GM Equivalent patch but this is not recommended; it’s much easier to use the Instruments Library to define as many aspects of your instruments as possible.

Specifying a GM Equivalent patch for a track allows it to play correctly in a MIDI setup that doesn’t include that track’s device. This commonly occurs when Overture files are exchanged between composers in different environments. For example, a track created on a Proteus/1 would automatically play correctly on a Kurzweil K2000 using a different Instruments library if the libraries from both environments correctly used GM Equivalent fields.

The track’s GM Equivalent patch lets Overture search the Instruments library in the new environment for an instrument that uses the same GM #. If it finds a match, Overture uses the device and patch from that instrument if that device is known in the current setup. It’s important to realize that the GM# links MIDI devices in different setups. It is not the actual patch used for the track.

If Overture doesn’t find a match, it uses the device you select in the pop-up menu of the General Preferences option Remap Unknown Devices To if you select that option. The patch for that track still needs to be specified so the new device can play the correct sound. If you don’t select Remap Unknown Devices To, Overture warns you that it will not remap the device(s) and that any tracks using them will not play. Use the Tracks Window to specify devices and patches for these tracks.

Setting Attributes for all Tracks

Holding down the Alt key while setting any of the following attributes in the Name and Staff sections of the Setup Track dialog box assigns that attribute to all tracks:

•	Show Name and Show Abbreviation options in the Name section

•	all checkbox options in the Staff section

•	dragging the % Scale numerical field in the Staff section.
Since the character set changes when you hold down the Alt key, you can’t type a new number in the field.


Score>Respace Staves

Score/Respace Staves

Choose Score>Respace Staves to respace all staves according to your choices in the Respace Staves dialog box and the preferences in the Preferences dialog box. For an example of how to use this command, see Respacing Staves. For more information about Engraver preferences, see Engraver Preferences.

Respace Staves Dialog Box

The Respace Staves dialog box works in conjunction with the Engraver Preferences to provide more flexibility in page layout.

The spaces between staves, spaces between systems, and spaces between groups fields are identical to the first three Engraver Preferences fields. These fields acquire their initial values from the Engraver Preferences when Overture is launched and when a new document is opened. Otherwise, they selectively override the Engraver Preferences.

•	Avoid collisions. Selecting this option insures that notes on neighboring staves do not collide with each other. Overture does this by overriding the staff, system and group spacing when necessary.

•	Fill to bottom of page. Selecting this option uses the available space on a partially full page to space the staves evenly. Overture does this by overriding the staff, system and group spacing.

•	All remaining pages. Selecting this option applies the specifications set in the Respace Staves dialog box to the current page and all remaining pages.

Deselecting this option applies the specifications to the current page.


Score>Recalc Layout

Score/Recalc Layout

When you choose Save>Recalc Layout, Overture calculates a new width for each measure in the score based on the number of measures per system you specify in the Score>Layout Page dialog box.

Recalculating a layout causes some measure widths to expand and others to contract. This has the effect of changing the number of measures in many of the systems and even changing the number of systems and pages in a score. This greatly improves legibility since it eliminates the collision of note heads, but it can play havoc with a carefully tweaked score. For this reason, you should recalculate a score before you fine tune it.

To recalculate measure layout and note spacing in a score:

1.	Look at the sample score shown below.

2.	Choose Score>Recalc Layout.

Overture calculates new measure widths for all measures in the score based on the number of measures per system you specify in the Score>Layout Page dialog box.

To protect a measure from the Save>Recalc Layout command, see Locked Measures.

Overture can automatically space notes using either Options>Auto Position, Measures>Justify, or Score>Recalc Layout. All three of these commands affect note spacing differently.


Score>Redraw Page

Score/Redraw Page

This command would not be needed in a perfect world, but then this is software. Consequently, you may sometimes perform an edit in the Score window and be left with traces of some undesirable gobbledygook in the on-screen display of the score. This gobbledygook (not its technical name) results from Overture’s failing to update a score element correctly. When you choose the Score>Redraw Page command, Overture quickly redraws the entire page, cleaning up any undesirable remnants of an edit operation.


Score>Allotment

Score/Allotment

This command displays the Allotment table exactly as File>Edit Library>Allotment Table does. Choose this command either to edit the Allotment table for the current score or to create a new one.

Changing the Allotment Table Dialog Box

Assume, for this example, that you want to change an Allotment Table to minimize the spacing differences between eighth notes, sixteenth notes and thirty second notes. To do so, you need to change the Allotment Table so that eighth notes get less space and thirty second notes get more.

To change the Allotment Table:

1.	Choose File>Edit Library>Allotment Table.

Overture opens the Allotment Table dialog box. This dialog box shows all the assignments for the current Allotment Table. If you want to edit a different Allotment Table, choose File>Load Library and select a different Allotment Table.

2.	Use the numericals in the eighth note column to decrease the number of spaces allotted to all versions of eighth notes.

In this example, decrease the normal eighth note spacing to 1.7; the dotted eighth note spacing to 2.8; and the triplet eighth note spacing to 1.6.

3.	Use the numericals in the thirty second note column to increase the number of spaces allotted to all versions of thirty second notes.

In this example, increase the normal thirty-second note spacing to 1.4; the dotted thirty-second note spacing to 1.6; and the triplet thirty-second note spacing to 1.3.

4.	Click the Save button.

Overture saves the changed Allotment Table.

You’ve now changed the Allotment Table to minimize the spacing differences between eighth, sixteenth, and thirty-second notes. When you justify a measure, Overture spaces notes using the Beat Chart derived from the new Allotment Table.


Score>Font Map

Score/Font Map

Choose this command to map one music font to another. You can substitute individual symbols or the entire set of symbols in the font. The command displays the Music Font Map dialog box.

You can move the Music Font Map dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The following section describes the elements of the Music Font Map dialog box and how they work together.

You can use the mapping feature two ways:

•	To replace every symbol in one set with the corresponding symbol in another.

•	To align substituted symbols properly with the rest of your work.

To replace chosen symbols in your score with symbols from another music font:

1.	Choose Score>Font Map.

Overture displays the Music Font Map dialog box.

2.	In the original symbol set, double-click a symbol you want to replace.

Overture displays the Font Symbol dialog box with the corresponding symbol highlighted.

3.	Choose a font name in the Font Name pop-up menu.

Overture displays the symbols of the chosen font in the symbol set boxes. The symbol corresponding to the selected symbol remains highlighted.

4.	If you want the replacement symbol to be other than the highlighted one, select the one you want.

It highlights.

5.	Click OK.

Overture closes the Font Symbol dialog box and displays the replacement symbol in the box above the symbol to be replaced.

6.	Repeat steps 2 to 5 as many times as you need.

You can use a variety of replacement fonts, if you want, and you are not limited to symbols whose numbers match exactly.

7.	When you are finished, click OK in the Music Font Map dialog box.

Overture closes the box and displays your score with all substitutions as you specified them.

Placing Mapped Font Symbols

The Music Font Map dialog box has a placement feature to help you get precise spacing for substituted symbols.

To place a mapped font symbol precisely:

1.	Choose Score>Font Map.

Overture displays the Music Font Map dialog box.

2.	In the new symbol set, click a symbol you want to place precisely.

Overture highlights the symbol and puts an enlarged copy of it into the adjustment box.  A gray copy of the replaced symbol lets you place the new symbol as you want it with respect to the old symbol.

3.	Adjust placement either by pressing and dragging the symbol in the adjustment box or by changing the numbers in the Offset boxes.

Changes you make in either place affect both, so you can use both methods freely until you have placed the symbol as you want.

Clearing Replacement Symbols

To cause your score to revert to its last saved symbol set:

1.	Choose Score>Font Map.

Overture displays the Music Font Map dialog box.

2.	Click Clear All.

The font mappings disappear.  This command has no Undo, so use it with care.

3.	Click OK.

Your score reverts to its previous symbol set.

Saving Font Mappings

You save your font mappings as a library.  To do so, in the Music Font Map dialog box, click Save.  If you are saving this font mapping for the first time, Overture displays a normal Save As dialog box.  Choose a name and click OK.  Overture saves to the libraries folder unless you specify otherwise.

Overture saves your font map automatically when you save your score.  If you haven't saved it previously, Overture requests a name as above.

Loading Font Maps

Once you have created and saved a font map, you can reload it from the libraries folder.  To do so, in the Music Font Map dialog box, click Load.  Overture displays a browser.  Locate the font map you want.  Click Open.  Overture loads the font map library you specify.


Score>Title Page

Score/Title Page

Choose this command to specify all the text for your score.  You can put a title, instructions, composer, copyright notice, headers, and footers on your score.  When you choose Score>Title Page, Overture displays the Title Page Text dialog box.

You can move the Title page Text dialog box around the desktop by dragging its title bar.

The Title Page Text Dialog Box

The Title Page Text dialog box has a tab for each of the kinds of text you can put on.

•	Title. Use this tab to specify title text.

•	Instructions. Use this tab to specify instructions.

•	Composer. Use this tab to give the composer’s name.

•	Copyright. Use this tab to copyright your work.

•	Header. Use this tab if you want headers on your pages.

•	Footer. Use this tab if you want footers on your pages.

All the tabs make use of the standard Font dialog box, where you can choose the font, style, and size for each line of each kind of text you put on your score.

See also

Title Page>Composer tab

Title Page>Copyright tab

Title Page>Footer tab

Title Page>Header tab

Title Page>Instructions tab

Title Page>Title tab


Title Page>Composer tab

Score/Title Page/Composer tab

The Composer tab provides you with four lines for composer information, which appears at the top right of the title page, right justified to the right margin of the page’s systems.  You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the composer information.


Title Page>Copyright tab

Score/Title Page/Copyright tab

The Copyright tab provides you with four lines for copyright information, which appears at the center bottom of the title page.  You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the copyright information.

To put in a copyright symbol ©: be sure the Num Lock key is on, then hold down Alt while typing 0169.

To put in a registered sign ®: be sure the Num Lock key is on, then hold down Alt while typing 0174.


Title Page>Footer tab

Score/Title Page/Footer tab

These tabs supply a line for each header or footer.  Click the radio button for Header 1/2 or Footer 1/2 to put in and display the information for that header or footer.

Header 1 appears above the title, at the left margin.  Header 2 appears above the title, at the right margin.  Footers appear below the music at the left and right margin.  You can line each one up left, center, or right.  Further, you can specify that they reverse positions.  You might want that feature if your score is going to be bound so that two pages appear side by side, as they do in a book.  This lets you display headers and footers symmetrically.

Use the Starting Page field to specify that headers or footers start, not on the first page, but on some other page, usually the second.  This is conventional in books, for example.  Use the Page Offset field, then, to specify how many pages to add or subtract to make pagination as you want it.

You can specify font characteristics for each header and footer.

Use the codes as header or footer text to specify automatic page headers or footers.  Overture supplies the correct text in the header or footer you specify.


Title Page>Header tab

Score/Title Page/Header tab

These tabs supply a line for each header or footer.  Click the radio button for Header 1/2 or Footer 1/2 to put in and display the information for that header or footer.

Header 1 appears above the title, at the left margin.  Header 2 appears above the title, at the right margin.  Footers appear below the music at the left and right margin.  You can line each one up left, center, or right.  Further, you can specify that they reverse positions.  You might want that feature if your score is going to be bound so that two pages appear side by side, as they do in a book.  This lets you display headers and footers symmetrically.

Use the Starting Page field to specify that headers or footers start, not on the first page, but on some other page, usually the second.  This is conventional in books, for example.  Use the Page Offset field, then, to specify how many pages to add or subtract to make pagination as you want it.

You can specify font characteristics for each header and footer.

Use the codes as header or footer text to specify automatic page headers or footers.  Overture supplies the correct text in the header or footer you specify.


Title Page>Instructions tab

Score/Title Page/Instructions tab

The Instructions tab provides four lines where you can give whatever instructions you want (including tempo markings like vivace, for example).  Instructions appear above and to the left of the first system, lined up with the left margin of the page’s systems (ignoring the first system, which you may have placed differently).  You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the instructions.


Title Page>Title tab

Score/Title Page/Title tab

The Title tab provides you with four lines for title text, which appears at the top center of the title page.  You can specify font characteristics and a vertical and horizontal offset for the title.


Engraver

Score/Engraver

This command displays the Engraver dialog box exactly as Options>Preferences>Engraver does.  Choose this command to edit layout spacing, element spacing, and line thickness in the score.  See Engraver Preferences.


Windows Menu

The Windows menu commands are as follows:

Tool Bars

Transport

Tracks

Graphic

Chords

Lyrics

Step Input

Cascade

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Arrange Icons

Open Score Windows


Window>Tool Bars

Window/Tool Bars

Choose this command to open a Tool Bar. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Tool Bar.

Main Tool Bar

Checking this command displays all of Overture’s notation and other tools. To learn more about the Tool Bar, see Overture Toolbars

Standard Tool Bar

Checking this command displays the standard Windows tool bar, giving you easy access to the following commands: New, Open, Save, Cut, Copy, Past, Print.

Transport

Checking this command displays the Transport tool bar with MIDI playback functions. Drag it off the bar by an edge to see the full Transport window. See The Transport Window.


Window>Transport

Window/Transport

Choose this command to open the Transport window or to make it the active window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Transport window. The Transport window contains buttons to control MIDI recording and playback and a pop-up menu to select the MIDI Thru Instrument.


Window>Tracks

Window/Tracks

Choose this command  either to open the Tracks window or to make it the active window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Tracks window. The Tracks window defines the characteristics of all the tracks in your score.

For more information, see The Tracks Window


Window>Graphic

Window/Graphic

Choose this command either to open the Graphic window or to make it the active window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Graphic window. The Graphic window graphically displays the MIDI data in a selected track using piano roll and strip chart displays. You can use this window to edit any MIDI data in any track. Overture applies any changes you make in the Graphic window to the Score window and the reverse.

For more information, see Graphics Window


Window>Chords

Window/Chords

Choose this command either to open the Chords window or to make it the active window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Chords window. Use the Chords window to enter chord names anf guitar frames into a score.

For more information, see Chords Window


Window>Lyrics

Window/Lyrics

Choose this command either to open the Lyrics window or to make it the active window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Lyrics window. Use the Lyrics window to type or modify lyrics and assign them to specific notes.

For more information, see Lyrics Window


Window>Step Input

Window/Step Input

Choose this command to open the Step Input window or to make it the active window. A check mark to the left of the command indicates an open Step Input window. Use the Step Input window to enter a score by recording MIDI data one step at a time. You can enter notes, chords, or rhythmic slashes in the Step Input window.

The Step Input window is particularly convenient if your playing technique is limited, or if you want to enter lead sheet chords and guitar rhythms quickly. For more information about the Step Input window, see Step Input Windows


Open Score Windows

Window/Open Score Windows

The Windows menu displays the names of all open Score windows at the bottom of the menu. Select a Score to make it the active window. The active window always has a check to the left of its name.


Window>Cascade

Window/Cascade

Choose this command to line up all the open scores so their titles are visible and each upper left corner is to the right and below the one behind it.


Window>Tile Horizontally

Window/Tile Horizontally

Choose this command to line up all the open scores so each is the full width of the window and all are spaced evenly the length of the window.


Window>Tile Vertically

Window/Tile Vertically

Choose this command to line up all the open scores so each is the full length of the window and all are spaced evenly the width of the window.


Window>Arrange Icons

Window/Arrange Icons

Choose this command to line up icons of scores.


Overture Terms

Overture uses terms common to both standard musical notation and MIDI sequencing. Overture requires this mix of terminology because of its immense power to both notate and play a musical score. You must know these terms before proceeding with the remaining chapters in this manual.

Symbol

This term is applied loosely to any note, rest, beam, tie, ornament, etc. included in a musical score.

Staff

A staff is a set of horizontal lines on which symbols are placed to represent music.

Most musical instruments require only a single staff to notate their lines.

Harps and most keyboard instruments (such as piano or harpsichord) use two staves (called a grand staff)

Organs often use three staves (adding the third for the bass pedals).

Track

A track is very closely related to a staff; staves notate the MIDI data contained in tracks. Overture notates each track on a single staff, so any instruments that require multiple staves also require multiple tracks.

Voice

A voice is a single melodic or rhythmic line within a track. Some tracks require more than one voice to notate and playback correctly. Specifically:

•	If you notate more than one instrument per staff, you’ll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple instruments.

•	If you notate a polyphonic instrument (such as a piano) that plays different melodic and rhythmic lines simultaneously, you’ll need to use multiple voices to distinguish between the multiple rhythmic lines.

If you score an instrument such that it plays only a single melodic line, you’ll need to assign only one voice to the staff.

If you assign two or more instruments to a single staff (or notate a polyphonic instrument playing different melodic or rhythmic lines), you’ll need to assign different voices to each instrument or melodic or rhythmic line.

Overture allows you to assign up to eight voices to a single track—this supports even the most complicated melodic or rhythmic intricacies.

System

A system is a group of staves, each of which is played at the same time as all the other staves in the system. All staves in a system are joined by a single vertical line connecting their left sides.

Tool

Tools allow you to perform very specific Overture functions. Different tools allow you to insert notes and other symbols, to group various notes, to add staves, alter noteheads, create lyrics, and to perform many other useful tasks. You use Overture’s tool bar to access individual tools.

Palette

Palettes contain groups of related tools. For instance, the Dynamics palette contains all the individual dynamics tools (such as the Pianissimo Tool, Mezzo Forte Tool, Forte Tools, etc.).

Numerical

Numericals are variables that you can edit on the screen. Numericals usually contain numeric data.

There are a couple ways to edit the value of a numerical:

•	Use the mouse as a slider

To change a numerical in this way, press and hold the mouse button over the numerical, then drag the mouse in a vertical direction. Pushing the mouse away from you increases values; pulling it toward you decreases values

•	Type to set values

Click the numerical, then type the desired value. The numerical changes to reflect the new value. You can not enter invalid values.


Help Menu

The Help menu commands are as follows:

Contents

About Overture


Help>Contents

Help/Contents

This command brings up the product’s help file. From this menu, you can link to specific help topics or use the Find and Index tabs to search the help file.


Help>About Overture

Help/About Overture

This command displays copyright, version number of the product, and your licensing information.


Options Menu

The Options menu commands are as follows:

Show

Show>Beat Chart

Show>Handles

Show>Margin

Show>Rulers

Show>Voices in Color

Show>Invisibles

Show>Incorrect Rhythms

Show>Range Errors

Show>Tracks Transposed

Show>Filled Measure Rests

Show>System Separations

Show>Chord Positions

Show>Lyric Positions

Show>Slash Note Positions

AutoBeam

AutoPosition

AutoTranscribe

Keyboard Thru

Hold TIming

Metronome

Metronome>Click in Record

Metronome>Click in Play

Metronome>Click in Count Off

Metronome>Metronome Sound

Play Style

Play Style>As Recorded

Play Style>In Swing

Play Style>As Written

Play Style>Repeats

Record Options

MIDI Setup

Instruments

Preferences


Options>Show

Options/Show

Press and hold the mouse on the Show command to produce a submenu of show options.

For the most part, the Show submenu contains various visual editing aids.

For more information, see:

Options>Show>Beat Chart

Options>Show>Handles

Options>Show>Margin

Options>Show>Rulers

Options>Show>Voices in Color

Options>Show>Invisibles

Options>Show>Incorrect Rhythms

Options>Show>Range Errors

Options>Show>Tracks Transposed

Options>Show>Filled Measure Rests

Options>Show>System Separations

Options>Show>Chord Positions

Options>Show>Lyric Positions

Options>Show>Slash Note Positions


Options>Show>Beat Chart

Options/Show/Beat Chart

Select this option to show the beat chart for the active measure (the one containing the insertion point). Beat charts appear above the top staff in a system and illustrate graphically the location of each beat. You can change the spacing of notes by clicking and dragging the little square beat handles to new locations. See Using Beat Charts for more information.

If you select this option when the active measure already shows a beat chart, Overture hides the chart.

You can activate and de-activate beat charts for the current staff by holding down the shift key either when selecting Options>Show>Beat Charts or when using the keyboard equivalent Control-1.


Options>Show>Handles

Options/Show/Handles

Select this option to show each barline and staff handle. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When the option is checked, Overture displays handles. When the option is not checked, Overture does not display handles.


Options>Show>Margin

Options/Show/Margin

Select this option to show the page margin. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When the option is checked, Overture displays page margins. When the option is not checked, Overture does not display page margins. To set page margins, use the Page Layout dialog box as discussed in About the Layout Page Dialog Box.


Options>Show>Rulers

Options/Show/Rulers

Choose this command to display horizontal and vertical rulers on the score. Use them to align staves, text, and other symbols precisely.

Click anywhere within a horizontal or vertical ruler to switch between inches and centimeters.


Options>Show>Colors
Options>Show>Voices in Color

Options/Show/Rulers

Choose this command to display each voice in a seperate color.


Options>Show>Invisibles

Options/Show/Invisibles

Select this option to show any currently invisible music symbols. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overture’s Score window shows (in grey) any invisible symbols. When the option is unchecked, Overture hides all invisible notation.


Options>Show>Incorrect Rhythms

Options/Show/Incorrect Rhythms

When you choose this command, Overture searches your score (beginning with the active measure) for measures containing either too many beats or not enough beats. If Overture finds an incorrect rhythm, it beeps and places the insertion point in the offending measure. You may then either correct the measure, or activate the next measure and continue searching through your score for other incorrect rhythms.


Options>Show>Range Errors

Options/Show/Range Errors

When you choose this command, Overture searches your score (beginning with the active measure) for any pitches outside specified instrument ranges. If Overture finds a range error, it beeps and places the insertion point in the offending measure. You may then either correct the error, or activate the next measure and continue searching your score for other range errors.

Overture gets its instrument range information from the Setup Track dialog box. For more information about selecting Instruments and setting their ranges, see Score>Setup Track


Options>Show>Tracks Transposed

Options/Show/Tracks Transposed

When you select this option, Overture displays any transposing tracks (as set in the Setup Track dialog box) in their transposed keys.

Assume, for example, that you created the conductor’s score shown below, and that the top staff notates a transposing instrument (in this case, an A Trumpet).

If you select the Options>Show>Tracks Transposed option, Overture shows the trumpet track transposed into the proper notation key for the trumpet player.


Options>Show>Filled Measure Rests

Options/Show/Filled Measure Rests

Choosing this option tells Overture to put a whole measure rest in every empty measure.


Options>Show>System Separations

Options/Show/System Separations

When you check this option, Overture puts a double-slash mark between one system and the next. It doesn’t put a mark between systems if there is only one system displayed. Overture removes the mark from the score if you uncheck the option again.


Options>Show>Chord Positions

Options/Show/Chord Positions

When you check this option, Overture displays Chord position indicators: a small triangle appears to the left of the chord names above a score. When the option is unchecked, Overture hides the Chord position indicators.

Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of an entire line (or lines) of chords. For more information, see Moving Chord Names Globally.

Overture can not display Chord position indicators and Lyric position indicators at the same time.


Options>Show>Lyric Positions

Options/Show/Lyric Positions

When you choose this option, Overture displays Lyric position indicators: a small triangle to the left of each verse. When you uncheck the option, Overture hides the Lyric position indicators.

Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of the entire verse. For more information, see Using the Lyrics Window.

Overture can not display Lyric position indicators and Chord position indicators at the same time.


Options>Show>Slash Note Positions

Options/Show/Slash Note Positions

Checking this option displays slash note position indicators as small triangle to the left of each staff. Drag a position indicator to adjust the vertical position of slash notes on a staff.

The position of slash notes on a staff is independent of played pitch (or pitches, it you have entered a chord). You can transpose slash symbols, affecting the played pitch, without changing their position on a staff.


Options>Show>AutoBeam
Options>AutoBeam

Options/AutoBeam

Select this option to beam all notes automatically upon transcription. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overture automatically beams notes as they’re transcribed, using the beaming pattern for the current measure (as set in the Set Meter dialog box and discussed in Set Meter). When you uncheck the option, Overture does not beam notes upon transcription.


Options>Show>AutoPosition
Options>AutoPosition

Options/AutoPosition

When you select this option, Overture automatically spaces any new notes that you enter. When you check the option, Overture spaces notes according to the measure’s existing Beat Chart without changing the width of the measure. When you uncheck the option, Overture displays notes exactly where you enter them.

Overture can automatically space notes using either Options>AutoPosition, Measures>Justify, or Score>Recalc Layout. All three of these commands affect note spacing differently. To learn the differences between them, see Automatic Positioning.

For more information, see:

Editing Notation Symbols

File>Edit>Library>Allotment Table

Adjusting Note Spacing


Options>AutoTranscribe

Options/AutoTranscribe

Select this option to enable Overture’s automatic transcription feature. When you check AutoTranscribe, Overture automatically transcribes any recorded MIDI data into standard music notation. When you uncheck the option, Overture displays real-time MIDI recordings as raw MIDI data, which you can selectively and manually transcribe using the Notes>Transcribe command.

This menu option duplicates the AutoTranscribe checkbox in the Record Options dialog box. For more information about auto transcription, see Using the AutoTranscribe Option.


Options>Keyboard Thru

Options/Keyboard Thru

Select this option to enable Overture’s Keyboard Thru feature. You may toggle this option on and off by selecting it repeatedly. When you check Keyboard Thru, Overture passes any received MIDI data through to the selected Thru Instrument. Overture watches for MIDI input from any device that you select as an Input Device and passes the MIDI data out to the device that you select as a Thru Device (from the Thru Device button in the Transport window, as discussed in Thru Device Button).

What is Keyboard Thru and Why is it Useful?

The most common setup for a MIDI computer system uses a single MIDI keyboard connected to a computer by a MIDI interface.

When you play the keyboard, its internal hardware produces sound. MIDI information travels from the keyboard’s MIDI OUT. This path allows communication from the keyboard to the computer.

When MIDI information goes from the computer through the MIDI interface into the keyboard’s MIDI IN, the synthesizer produces sound. This path allows communication from the computer to the keyboard.

This simple arrangement, allowing both the musician and the computer to play the keyboard, is not possible for MIDI instruments that don’t produce their own onboard sound, like wind, guitar, drum pad, and keyboard controllers.

If you connect such a controller to a sound module, and the sound module through the MIDI interface to the computer, then there is no place to send the MIDI OUT of the MIDI interface.. No connection is possible for the computer to the sound module.

When the controller plays, MIDI information goes to the sound module’s MIDI IN causing the module to create sound. The sound module also routes MIDI information received at its MIDI IN back out its MIDI Thru to the MIDI interface and computer. This path allows communication from the MIDI controller to the computer.

The computer can not, however, play MIDI information back to the sound module because the module’s MIDI IN connection is already in use by the MIDI controller.

The Solution: Keyboard Thru

This problem is solved when you select Options>Keyboard Thru. Then the controller connects directly to the computer through the MIDI interface. MIDI information travels to the computer but creates no sound yet. Overture receives the incoming MIDI information but routes it immediately back to the sound module’s MIDI IN through the MIDI interface. The controller plays the sound module through the software despite the lack of a direct connection between them. During playback, Overture sends MIDI information through the MIDI interface to the sound module’s MIDI IN, causing it to produce sound.

The Keyboard Thru command lets you to play a master MIDI keyboard, assign a patch, and hear the output from any sound module in your studio.

For example, assume you have a K2000 keyboard with local control turned off and you want to play it into Overture while you hear the notes sound on a Proteus/2 set to MIDI channel #1 with a sound. To do so.

1.	Select Options>Keyboard Thru to check it.

Do not select the option if it is already checked—that would disable it.

2.	Move the mouse over the Thru Instrument button in the Transport window.

3.	Press and hold the mouse to open a pop-up menu of MIDI devices.

Overture displays the MIDI devices defined by your current setup.

4.	Release the mouse over the Proteus/2-1 device.

Overture selects the Proteus/2, MIDI channel #1 as your Thru Instrument and displays its name in the Thru Device button. For more information about the Thru Device button, see Thru Device Button.

5.	Select Options>Enable Input Devices.

Overture opens the Select Inputs Dialog box.

6.	Make sure the K2000 is enabled as an Input Device.

For more information about enabling input devices, see Options>MIDI Setup.

7.	Play your K2000.

You hear the sound assigned to the Proteus/2, channel #1 since you’ve now told Overture to send MIDI data from your K2000 to the Proteus/2.


Options>Hold Timing

Options/Hold Timing

Select this option to hold note timings constant in situations where they would otherwise alter. For example, if you delete notes with Options>Hold Timing selected, Overture inserts the rest in the place of the deleted note rather than moving the last two notes earlier.

Use the Hold Timing command to add notes to a measure without affecting the timing of pre-existing notes. Using Hold Timing allows the intended structure and timing of the measure to be maintained during the editing process.

The results are unpredictable when transcribing measures that have too many notes.

See Eraser Button for a description of Overture’s behavior when you don’t use the Hold Timing command.


Options>Metronome

Options/Metronome

Choose the Metronome command to produce a submenu of metronome options.

You can toggle each of the first three options on (checked) or off (unchecked). The fourth option opens the Metronome dialog box.

See also:

Options>Metronome>Click in Record

Options>Metronome>Click in Play

Options>Metronome>Click in Count Off

Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound


Options>Metronome>Click in Record

Options/Metronome/Click in Record

Select this option if you want Overture’s metronome to click while you record into Overture. You may toggle this option on and off by repeatedly choosing it. When the option is checked, Overture’s metronome plays during recording. When the option is not checked, Overture’s metronome does not play during recording.


Options>Metronome>Click in Play

Options/Metronome/Click in Play

Select this option if you want Overture’s metronome to click whenever Overture plays. You may toggle this option on and off by choosing it repeatedly. When you check the option, Overture’s metronome plays during playback. When you uncheck the option, Overture’s, it doesn’t.


Options>Metronome>Click in Count Off

Options/Metronome/Click in Count Off

Select this option if you want Overture’s metronome to click during count off. You may toggle this option on and off by choosing it repeatedly.


Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound

Options/Metronome/Metronome Sound

Choose this command to specify the sound used by Overture’s metronome. When you choose the Metronome Sound command, Overture produces the Metronome dialog box.

Overture’s metronome click uses the MIDI device and note parameters you specify in the Metronome submenu.

About the Metronome Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Metronome dialog box. These are described, below:

•	Beat Areas. You can set different MIDI note values for different beats. Specifically, you can set a MIDI note value for the Accented beat (the first beat in a measure), and a different MIDI note value for the Unaccented beat (the remaining beats in a measure).

•	Device Selection. Use this pop-up menu to choose which MIDI device (as defined by your current setup) to use for the metronome sound.

•	Note Selection. Use this numerical to choose a MIDI note for both accented and unaccented beats. You can also enter a value by clicking the down-pointing triangle and choosing a note from the pop-up menu, or by playing the desired note on a MIDI controller.

•	Velocity Numerical. Use this numerical to set the MIDI velocity value for both accented and unaccented beats. You can also enter a value by playing a note with the desired velocity on a MIDI controller.

•	Duration Numerical. Use this numerical to set the MIDI duration for both accented and unaccented beats.

•	Test Button. Click this button to hear a preview of your Metronome sound settings. The tempo and meter of the test metronome are unrelated to the tempo and meter in your score. This button provides only a preview of the metronome’s sound.

Using the Metronome Sound Command

To set Overture’s metronome sound:

1.	Choose Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound.

Overture produces the Metronome Sound dialog box.

2.	Configure the dialog box to your specifications.

0	3.	To test the metronome sound, click the Test button.

Overture accents the first metronome click in a measure. The note duration affects the test metronome’s tempo. The test metronome always allows enough time between notes for you to hear the entire selected duration.

4.	When you’re satisfied with your metronome sound, click the OK button.


Options>Play Style

Options/Play Style

Choose the Play Style command to produce a submenu of MIDI playback options.

0	Active play styles have a check mark to the left of their names. The following sections describe each play style in detail.

See also:

Options>Play Style>As Recorded

0	Options>Play Style>In Swing

1	Options>Play Style>As Written

2	Options>Play Style>Repeats


Options>Play Style>As Recorded

Options/Play Style/As Recorded

As Recorded

Select this option if you want Overture to play back your score exactly as recorded. When you select As Recorded, Overture plays back any timing nuances exactly as your recorded them. It also faithfully plays any changes you may have made to MIDI data in either the Modify Notes dialog box (as discussed in Modify Notes), or in the Graphic window.


Options>Play Style>In Swing

Options/Play Style/In Swing

In Swing

Select this option if you want Overture to play back your score in swing time. Overture uses a 63% swing value when you choose this play style.

0	This means the first half of the beat plays for 63% of the time occupied by the beat, while the second half plays for only 37% of the beat. For example, if you select the In Swing option and a measure starts with two eighth notes, the first eighth note will play longer than the second eighth note.


Options>Play Style>As Written

Options/Play Style/As Written

As Written

Select this option if you want Overture to play back your score exactly as written. When you select As Written, Overture ignores any timing nuances you may have recorded. It also ignores any subtle changes you may have made to MIDI data in either the Modify Notes dialog box (as discussed in Modify Notes), or in the Graphic window.


Options>Play Style>Repeats

Options/Play Style/Repeats

Repeats

Select this option if you want Overture to play back any and all repeats in your score. When you select Repeats, Overture plays all repeats it sees in your score, including standard repeat barlines, endings, and jumps (like D.S. al Coda, or D.C. al Fine). If you do not select this option, Overture’s MIDI playback ignores all repeats in a score.


Options>Record Options

Options/Record Options…

Choose this command to specify various recording options. When you choose Record Options, Overture produces the Record Options dialog box.

About the Record Options Dialog Box

There are numerous elements in the Record Options dialog box, as follows.

•	Split Point is checkbox and value field. Check this option if you want Overture to split incoming MIDI data into two tracks automatically and notate it on a grand staff. Use the note value field to define the split point.

•	AutoTranscribe checkbox. Check this option if you want Overture to transcribe incoming MIDI data automatically into standard notation. When this box is un-checked, Overture displays raw MIDI data in the score window. This checkbox duplicates the Options>AutoTranscribe option.

•	One voice per staff checkbox. You can enable this option only if the AutoTranscribe option is checked. Check this option if you want Overture to interpret incoming MIDI data as a single voice per staff. Un-check this option if you want Overture to interpret incoming MIDI data as multiple voices per staff.

•	Record Filters. Use the radio buttons and checkboxes to determine which types of MIDI data you want Overture to record and which types you want it to ignore.

Using the Record Options Dialog Box

The Record Options dialog box lets you specify how you want Overture to interpret and assign the MIDI data it records. To define the recording options:

1.	Choose Options>Record Options.

Overture displays the Record Options dialog box.

2.	Decide whether you want to check the Split point is, AutoTranscribe, and One voice per staff options.

Each of these options is described in detail, below.

3.	Select the desired Record filters.

The Record filters are discussed in Using the Record Filters.

4.	Click the OK button.

Whenever you perform real-time recording, Overture interprets the incoming MIDI data using the attributes of the Record Options dialog box.

Using the Split Point Option

Check the Split point is checkbox if you want Overture to split incoming MIDI data between two tracks automatically. Use the corresponding numerical to define the MIDI note value of the split point (C3=middle C). This option is particularly useful for correctly notating two-handed piano parts on a grand staff.

0	To use this option, your score must contain two adjacent staves; the top staff with a treble clef and the bottom staff with a bass clef. Overture always assigns the MIDI note value in the split point numerical to the treble staff. When you record, you can activate a measure in either the treble staff or the bass staff; Overture correctly divides the notes between the two staves.

Using the AutoTranscribe Option

Check the AutoTranscribe checkbox if you want Overture to transcribe any recorded MIDI data automatically. Uncheck the box if you want Overture to display recorded MIDI data as raw data in the Score window.

0	If you select the AutoTranscribe option, you also have the choice of transcribing the recorded MIDI data as single or multiple voices (see “Using the One Voice Per Staff Option” below).

1	Generally, automatic transcription is useful for most simple recordings. You may find it beneficial to turn off auto transcription if you’re recording rather complicated tracks with multiple voices. When auto transcription is off, Overture displays the recorded data as raw MIDI data in the Score window. You can edit and selectively transcribe sections of raw MIDI data as discussed in Transcribe.

2	Overture notates all autotranscribed data in the Score window using the transcription quantization value shown in the Tool Bar. For more information about setting a transcription quantization value, see Chapter 26, “Transcription Quantize Amount Button.”

Using the One Voice Per Staff Option

You can enable this option only if you check the AutoTranscribe option first. Check One voice per staff whenever you record a track that requires only a single voice per staff. This keeps Overture from interpreting any sloppy playing as multiple voices. If you want to record a track with multiple voices, then leave the option unchecked.

Using the Record Filters

Use the three radio buttons to tell Overture whether you want to record all events, only the events selected in this dialog box, or all events except those not selected in this dialog box.


Options>MIDI Setup

Options/MIDI Setup

When you start Overture for the first time, it checks your computer to find all the MIDI input and output devices you have installed (such as sound cards and MIDI interfaces). However, sometimes you need to tell Overture exactly which devices you want it to use. If you’re not getting sound from your sound card or MIDI keyboard, or if you just want to change the MIDI ports and devices that you are using, follow the steps in this section.

0	Use this command to open the MIDI ports dialog box in which you select the MIDI In and MIDI Out devices for Overture. Each item in the list is a MIDI In or MIDI Out port.

•	Input Ports. The left window shows devices on MIDI Input Ports. Make sure that all devices in this window are highlighted. If a device isn’t highlighted, click on it once to select it for MIDI Input.

•	Output Ports. The right window shows devices on MIDI Output Ports. Overture numbers its MIDI Output Ports by the order of the devices in this window. The device on top is on Port 1, the one below it is on Port 2, and so on.

Highlight each device in the Output Ports window and click Move Selected Devices to Top to change its order. Then highlight all the devices that appear in the window to select them for output.


Instruments

Options/Instruments

Use the Options>Instruments command to assign a MIDI instrument definition to each available MIDI port and channel. The assignments you make determine MIDI bank names, patch names, note names, and controller names that you see.

0	Suppose that you have a Roland GS-compatible synthesizer attached to MIDI port 1. By assigning all sixteen channels of MIDI port 1 to the Roland GS instrument definition, you ensure that the bank, patch, note, and controller name lists you see displayed in Overture are the ones that match your synthesizer.

1	Often, you want to assign a different instrument to channel 10, which is usually used for percussion. For example, you might assign the Roland GS instrument definition to channels 1 through 9 and 11 through 16, but you would most likely want to assign the Roland GS Drumsets instrument definition to channel 10. If you have several MIDI ports, with a different instrument attached to each one, you would normally assign a different instrument to each MIDI port.

2	For convenience, you can assign a block of channels to one instrument and then change the assignment of one or more of those channels without changing the others. For example, you can highlight all 16 channels of the first MIDI port and assign them to the Roland GS instrument definition. Then, you can highlight channel 10 of the first MIDI port and assign it to the Roland GS Drumset instrument definition. Channels 1 through 9 and 11 through 16 on the first MIDI port will stay assigned to Roland GS.

3	You might also want to split channels to different instruments if you have several instruments attached to a single MIDI port. For example, you might have a Roland synth receiving on MIDI channels 1 through 9, a Roland drum machine receiving on channel 10, and a basic GM-compatible synth receiving on channels 11 through 16. In this case, you’d use three different instrument definitions for your one and only MIDI port.

To Assign Instruments to MIDI Ports and Channels

1.	Choose Options>Instruments to display the Assign Instruments dialog box.

0	2.	Select one or more MIDI ports and channels from the Port/ Channel list (use Shift-click and control-click to select multiple ports and channels).

1	3.	Choose the instrument to which the selected ports and channels should be assigned from the Uses Instrument list.  A black line connects the two lists.

2	4.	To save these changes permanently, check the Save Changes for Next Session box.

3	5.	Click OK when you are done.

From now on, Overture uses the bank, patch, controller, and note names from the assigned instrument.

To Clear Instrument Assignments

1.	Choose Options>Instruments to display the Assign Instruments dialog box.

0	2.	Select the MIDI ports and channels whose assignments you want to remove from the Port/Channel list.

1	3.	Choose <default> from the Uses Instrument list.  A black line connects the two lists.

2	4.	Click OK when you are done.

From now on, Overture uses the default bank, patch, controller, and note names

For more information, see:

Importing Instrument Definitions

0	Creating Instrument Definitions

1	Assigning the Bank Select Method


Importing Instrument Definitions

A few common instrument definitions are already set up for you and ready to use. Overture also includes several hundred additional instrument definitions that you can import.

0	These instrument definitions are stored in files, organized largely by manufacturer. For example, all the instrument definitions for Roland gear are stored in the Roland.ins file; all the instrument definitions for Yamaha gear are stored in the Yamaha.ins file. The file Misc.ins contains miscellaneous instrument definitions. If you don’t see a file for the manufacturer of your instrument, look in this file to see if it contains the instrument you are looking for.

1	When you import an instrument definition, Overture adds it to the master instrument definition file Master.ins. The contents of this file determines the list of instruments that appear in the Assign Instruments dialog box.

To Import Instrument Definitions

1.	Choose Options>Instruments to display the Assign Instruments dialog box.

0	2.	Click Define to display the Define Instruments and Names dialog box.

1	3.	Click Import to display the Import Instrument Definitions dialog box.

2	4.	Choose the file that contains instrument definitions for your manufacturer, and click Open. Overture displays a list of all the instrument definitions in the file.

3	5.	Choose one or more instruments from the list, and click OK.

4	6.	Click Close to close the Define Instruments and Names dialog box.

The instrument definitions you import appear in the Uses Instrument list in the Assign Instruments dialog box.


Creating Instrument Definitions

Overture lets you create and edit instrument definitions.  To create an instrument definition, you must answer these types of questions:

•	What are the names of the patches in each bank?

•	Which note names should be used for each patch?

•	What are the names of the MIDI Controllers for this instrument?

•	Which RPN and NRPNs are available on the instrument?

•	Which Bank Select method does the instrument use?

To collect this information, you need the MIDI documentation for your instrument.

0	You define instruments in the Define Instruments and Names dialog box. It contains two trees:

•	The Instruments tree lists all defined instruments and their characteristics

•	The Names tree shows all the resources you use to define an instrument

You expand or collapse the folders and lists in each tree by clicking on the + or – key shown to the left of each item. You can also right-click an item and choose Expand or Collapse from the menu, or double-click an item to expand or collapse it.

0	To define an instrument, you drag resources from the Names tree to the appropriate branches on the Instruments tree. Each resource is color-coded—for example, you can only drag a Names list to an Instrument tree branch of the same color.

1	Here’s a general outline of the steps you must follow:

•	Create a new instrument

•	Create any new name lists that are required for the instrument

•	Drag name lists and other resources to each instrument

•	Save the instrument definition

There are six components to an instrument definition:

•	Method for bank selection

•	Patch names, such as Piano and Bass

•	Note names, which are most frequently used to name drum notes, such as kick or snare

•	Controller names, like volume and pan

•	Names for Registered Parameter Numbers (RPNs)

•	Names for Non-Registered Parameter Numbers (NRPNs)

The instrument definitions organize all names (patches, notes, controllers, RPNs, and NRPNs) into lists. You may be able to define a new instrument using existing name lists. For example, two models of synthesizers made by a particular manufacturer may have identical patch name lists but use different NRPNs. In this case, you can use the same patch lists for both instruments, but you need to use a different NRPN list (or perhaps create a new NRPN list) for the second synth.

0	If you want your changes to be remembered the next time you run Overture, check the Save Changes For Next Session option in the Assign Instruments dialog box before clicking OK. Otherwise, to make only temporary changes, remove the check from that option.

To Create a New Instrument

1.	Right-click the word Instruments at the top of the Instrument tree, and choose Add Instrument from the menu.

0	2.	Type a name for the new instrument and press Enter.

The new instrument gets default settings for all of its characteristics.

To Rename an Instrument

1.	Right-click an Instrument name and choose Edit from the menu.

0	2.	Type the new name and press Enter.

To Delete an Instrument

1.	Right-click an Instrument name and choose Delete from the menu.

0	2.	Confirm that you want to delete the instrument.

To Save an Instrument Definition

1.	Click Close to close the Define Instruments and Names dialog box.

0	2.	Click OK.

Overture saves the instrument definition in the MASTER.INS file.

Creating Lists

You can create and edit the various lists that make up each instrument definition. Patch name, note name, and controller name lists can contain up to 128 entries, numbered 0 through 127.  RPN and NRPN name lists can contain up to 16,384 entries, numbered 0 through 16,383.

To Manage Name Lists

1.	To create, edit, or work with name lists, follow the directions in the table:

To do this		Do this
Create a new name list		Highlight a name list and press the Ins (Insert) key; highlight the folder and press Shift-Insert; or right-click any folder or name list and choose Add Names List from the menu. Then enter the name of the list.
Delete a name list		Highlight the names list and press the Delete key; or right-click the name list and choose Delete from the menu. A warning appears if the list is used by any instrument defini tion. If you delete the list anyway, the instrument definition changes auto matically.
Add the next item in a name list		Highlight a name and press the Insert key, or right-click a name and choose Add Name from the menu. Then enter the name.
Add a name anywhere in a list		Highlight the name of a list and press Shift-Insert, or right-click the name of a list and choose Add Name from the menu. Then enter the name.
Delete names from a list		Highlight the Names List or Name, and press Delete. You can also right-click, then choose Delete.
Edit a name in a list		Highlight the name or name list and press F2, or right-click and choose Edit from the menu.  Then enter the new name
Copying Name Lists

You can easily create new lists that are similar to other lists. For example, suppose you want to create a new patch name list called NewList that is almost identical to the General MIDI patch list, but with one or two small changes.  Here’s how you proceed:

•	Create a new patch name list called NewList.

•	Drag the new list branch onto the General MIDI branch. Overture asks if you want to base NewList on the General MIDI list.

•	Click OK. Overture lists NewList under the General MIDI branch. Any patch names that exist in the General MIDI list apply to NewList, too.

•	Add new patch names to NewList. These names override those in the list on which NewList is based.

If you change your mind about NewList and want to make it a stand-alone, separate list, drag it to the Patch Names root folder.


Assigning the Bank Select Method

Your synthesizer uses one of four bank select methods to switch back and forth between banks of sounds. To find the method used for your instrument, check the instrument’s user’s guide or the manufacturer’s web site. The four methods are as follows:

Method		Used for
Normal		Instruments that respond to Controller 0 or Controller 32 bank select messages
Controller 0 only		Instruments that only respond to Controller 0 bank select messages
Controller 32 only		Instruments that only respond to Controller 32 bank select messages
Patch 100..127		Instruments that let you change banks by sending patch changes between 100 and 127
The bank select method you choose affects the bank numbers that you assign to each patch list, as described in the following section.  Here’s how you compute the bank numbers:

Bank select method		To compute the bank number
Normal		Take the value of Controller 0, multiply it by 128, and add the value of Controller 32 to derive the bank number. A synthesizer manufacturer may refer to Controller 0 as the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and to Controller 32 as the LSB (Least Signifi cant Byte).
Controller 0 only		The value of Controller 0 is the bank number.
Controller 32 only		The value of Controller 32 is the bank number.
Patch 100..127		Take the patch number and subtract 100 to derive the bank number.
Here is an example of the Normal bank select method. According to the documentation for the Roland JV-1080 synthesizer, the PR-A Bank has a Controller 0 value of 81 and a Controller 32 value of 0. You compute the bank number that you enter in the instrument definition as follows:  (81 x 128) + 0 = 10,368.

To Change the Bank Select Method

1.	Highlight and expand the instrument in the Instrument tree.

0	2.	Expand the Bank Select Method branch in the Names tree.

1	3.	Drag the desired bank select method from the Names tree to the Instrument tree.

Assigning Patch Names

A MIDI instrument can have up to 16,384 banks of 128 patches each.  Patches can have names, like Piano for patch number 0, Bass for patch number 1, and so on. Normally, each bank contains a different set of patches, so each bank needs a separate patch name list. Most synthesizers start with a patch number of 0.

0	You can assign a patch name list to each bank. You can also assign a default patch name list to the instrument, which is used for all banks for which you haven’t assigned a specific list. The previous section describes how to compute the bank numbers to which each patch name list is assigned.

1	You can also assign each bank a special Drum flag, which indicates that all patches in that bank contain drum sounds. If you set this flag, the Graphic window displays drum notes as diamonds, and the Score will use percussion notation.

To See the Assignment of Patch Name Lists to Banks

1.	Expand the instrument definition by clicking the + sign next to the instrument name.

0	2.	Expand the Patch Names for Banks folder by clicking the + sign.  The list expands to show the bank numbers and the patch name list that is assigned to each bank.

To Add a Bank or Change the Patch Names for a Bank

1.	Drag a patch name list from the Names tree to the Patch Names for Banks folder.

0	2.	Enter a bank number, or enter –1 to indicate that this list of patch names should be used as the default.

1	3.	Overture displays the updated banks and patch name lists.  If necessary, Overture adds a new bank to the instrument definition.

To Remove a Bank or Patch Name List

1.	Highlight the bank and patch names list in the Instrument tree.

0	2.	Press the Del key, or right-click on the bank name and choose Delete from the menu.

To Set or Clear the Drum Flag

•	•	Right-click on the bank in the Instrument tree, and choose Drums from the menu.

Assigning Note Names

Each patch may have a list of up to 128 names for notes. Usually, note names are labels for percussion instruments. For example, the pitch C3 may really be Kick Drum, and D3 may be Snare. Because a drum machine may provide different drum kits for each patch, Overture lets you specify a different list of note names for each patch. The Graphic window and Strip chart show you these note names.

You can assign a note name list to each patch. You can also assign a default note name list to the instrument, which is used for all patches for which you haven’t assigned a specific note name list.

You can assign each patch a special Drum flag, which indicates that this patch contains drum sounds. If you set this flag, the Graphic window displays drum notes as diamonds, and the Score uses percussion notation.

Overture provides  several standard note name lists:

Note name list…		Contents…
0..127		The numbers 0 through 127
Diatonic		The default MIDI note names (like C4, E5, and so on)
General MIDI Drums		The default instrument names for the General MIDI drum patch
To See the Assignment of Note Name Lists to Patches

1.	Expand the instrument definition by clicking the + sign next to the instrument name.

2.	Expand the Patch Names for Banks folder by clicking the + sign.

3.	Continue expanding the tree by clicking the + sign, until the tree is fully expanded.

To Change the s for a Patch

1.	Drag a note name list from the Names tree onto the Note Names for Patches folder.

2.	Enter a patch number, or enter –1 to indicate that Overture should use this list of note names as the default.

3.	Overture displays the updated patch and note name lists.  If necessary, Overture adds a new patch to the instrument definition.

To Remove a Note Name List

1.	Highlight the patch in the Instrument tree.

2.	Press the Delete key, or right-click the note name list and choose Delete from the menu.

To Set or Clear the Drum Flag

•	Right-click on the patch in the Instrument tree, and choose Drums from the menu.

Assigning Controller, RPN, and NRPN Names

Overture lets each instrument have its own lists of controller names, RPN names, and NRPN names. There is always exactly one list of each type per instrument.

To See the Controller, RPN, and NRPN Name Lists

•	Expand the instrument definition by clicking the + sign next to the instrument name.

To Change the Controller Name List

1.	In the Names tree, expand the branch containing the Controller name lists.

2.	Drag the desired name list from the Names tree onto the corresponding branch of the Instrument tree.

Overture displays the updated Controller name list.


Options>Preferences

Options/Preferences

Choose this command to select, set or view numerous Overture preferences. When you choose the Options>Preferences, Overture opens the Preferences dialog box.

The top of the Preferences dialog box displays [tabs]. This menu contains [five] different types of preferences:

•	Engraver

•	Fonts

•	General

•	Libraries

•	Playback

•	Dynamics

When you select one of the [tabs], the Preferences dialog box displays the selected tab or type. The following sections describe each preference and option in detail.

See also

Options>Preferences>Engraver tab

Options>Preferences>Fonts tab

Options>Preferences>General tab

Options>Preferences>Libraries tab

Options>Preferences>Playback tab

Options>Preferences>Dynamics tab


Preferences>Engraver tab

Options/Preferences>Engraver tab

To view the engraver preferences, [click the Engraver tab].

You can also see the Engraver preferences by choosing
Score>Engraver.

The Engraver dialog box displays three sets of options:

•	Layout Spacing

•	Element Spacing

•	Line Thickness

Layout Spacing

When you create a new Overture file, the Spacing numericals (as shown in the figure) define the default spacing between staves, systems, and groups. Spaces are measured as a number of ledger lines. For example, if you ask for 5 spaces between staves, Overture will space staves exactly 5 ledger lines apart. Also, when you choose Score>Respace Staves, Overture respaces staves on the current page according to these numericals (for more information, see “Respacing Staves” in Arranging Staves and Systems).

There are three spacing numericals:

•	spaces between staves. Use this numerical to set the default spacing (in ledger lines) between each staff.

•	spaces between systems. Use this numerical to set the default spacing (in ledger lines) between each system.

•	spaces between groups. Use this numerical to set the default spacing (in ledger lines) between an i	nstrument group and the other staves in a system.

In addition to the three spacing numericals, the engraver preferences include two page layout numericals. When you create a new Overture file, these numericals define the default number of measures in a system and the default number of systems per page.

Element Spacing

The Element Spacing numericals define default spacing for bar lines, clefs, key signature, and time signature.  A space is a quarter of the distance between two ledger lines.

There are six Element Spacing numericals:

•	Bar line to clef. Use this to set the default spacing (in spaces) between the initial bar line in the score and the clef sign.

•	Bar line to character. Use this to set the default spacing (in spaces) between each bar line in the score and the first character in the following measure.

•	Clef to note. Use this to set the default spacing (in spaces) between the clef sign and any note immediately following.

•	Clef to other. Use this to set the default spacing (spaces) between the clef sign and any other symbol immediately following.

•	Key to other. Use this to set the default spacing (in spaces) between the key signature and any symbol immediately following.

•	Meter to other. Use this to set the default spacing (in spaces) between the time signature and any symbol immediately following.

Line Thickness

The Line Thickness numericals define default thickness in quarters of a point (approximately 1/72 of an inch) for bar lines, beams, staff lines, stems, and the distance between beams.

There are five Line Thickness numericals:

•	Bar lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the bar lines.

•	Beam lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the beams.

•	Staff lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the staff lines.

•	Stem lines. Use this to set the default thickness (in units of 1/288 of an inch) of all the note stems.

•	Beam gap. Use this to set the default distance (in units of 1/288 of an inch) between note beams in all notes with multiple beams.


Preferences>Fonts tab

Options/Preferences>Fonts tab

To view the font preferences, [click the Fonts tab].

When you create a new Overture document, it automatically uses the default fonts specified in this dialog box. There are numerous types of text elements, each of which can have its own default font. Specifically, you can assign default fonts to:

•	Bar numbers

•	Endings

•	Tempo

•	Tablature

•	Track Names

•	Meter Font. Activate this by checking the Alternate Font option in the Set Tempo dialog box. See The Alternate Font Option.

•	Measure (Bar) Text

•	Page Text

•	Rehearsal Marks

•	System Text

•	Lyrics

•	Multi-bar rest

Using the Font Dialog Box

To change the default font assigned to one of the previous elements:

1.	Click the Select button next to the element.

Overture opens a Select Font dialog box.

2.	Use the dialog box to select the desired default font, size, and style.

3.	Click the OK button.

The next time you create a new Overture score, the specified element uses this font as the default.

There are numerous elements in the Font dialog box:

•	Font Pop-Up Menu. Select a new font from the pop-up menu.

•	Font Size Pop-Up Menu or List. Select a new size from the pop-up menu.

•	Font Size Field. Type a font size not included in the Font Size Pop-Up Menu or List.

•	Font Style Options. Check those style options you want applied to the font.

•	Font Preview Area. View the effects of your font selections in this area.


Preferences>General tab

Options/Preferences>General tab

To view the general preferences, [click the General tab].

Use the check boxes to enable (check) or disable (uncheck) various general options. The following sections discuss these options.

Drag Notes Chromatically

Use this option to determine whether Overture changes notes chromatically or diatonically when you drag them in the Score window.

•	Checked. When you drag a note vertically in the Score window, its pitch changes chromatically (according to the twelve-tone scale).

•	Unchecked. When you drag a note vertically in the Score window, its pitch changes diatonically (according to the key of the measure).

For more information, see Editing Notes.

Middle C Is

Use this option to establish how Overture names middle C.

•	C3. Overture displays Middle C (MIDI note #60) as C3—a convention adopted by Yamaha and some other manufacturers.

•	C4. Overture displays Middle C (MIDI note #60) as C4—the standard MIDI convention.

•	C5. Overture displays Middle C (MIDI note #60) as C5—a convention adopted by GenieSoft.

Remap Unknown Devices

Use this option to tell Overture whether or not to remap unknown MIDI devices to a device contained in your current setup.

•	Checked. Overture automatically remaps any unknown devices to the device specified in the corresponding pop-up menu. For example, if someone gives you an Overture file that references devices that aren’t in your current setup, Overture automatically remaps each of those devices to the device shown in the pop-up menu. Overture plays all remapped tracks using the selected device and MIDI channel. If you wish, you can open the Tracks window and reassign each remapped device to a new device.

•	Unchecked. Overture does not remap unknown devices. For example, if someone gives you an Overture file that references devices that aren’t in your current setup, Overture warns you that it will not remap the devices and that any tracks using these devices will not play. If you wish, you can open the Tracks window and assign a device to each unassigned track.

Auto Wrap Systems

Use this option to tell Overture what to do when you add staves to a system such that the default number of systems per page no longer fits on that page. You set the default number of systems per page in the Layout Page dialog box (discussed in Layout Page). You can choose either to check or to uncheck the Auto Wrap Systems option:

•	Checked. If you add staves to a system such that the requested number of systems no longer fits on a page, Overture automatically changes the number of systems per page by wrapping systems to new pages.

•	Unchecked. If you add staves to a system such that the requested number of systems no longer fits on a page, Overture automatically increases the length of the page to compensate.

The Auto Wrap Systems option is enabled by default.

For more information, see Creating Big Systems.

Skip Tied Notes in Lyrics

Use this option to specify that lyrics should treat tied notes as a single entity by placing only one word under the first of the tied notes .

Automatic Double Bar at Key Change

Use this option to insert double bar lines automatically before key changes.

Note Names

Use this option to specify a convention for displaying note names in the Graphic Window:

•	Standard. Uses the normal display technique with respect to note names. Overture identifies pitches by the note name and octave (C#3).

•	B = H. Overture identifies pitch B as H and the pitch Bb as B. It identifies other pitches normally. This convention is prevalent in Germany and other parts of Europe.

•	Solfege. Overture identifies pitches based on the Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Ti, Do convention for the C major scale. The pitch description includes the octave number and Overture identifies chromatic pitches as sharp or flat from the C major scale intervals. For example, F#4 is identified as Fa#4.


Preferences>Libraries tab

Options/Preferences>Libraries tab

To view the library preferences, click the Libraries tab.

When Overture launches, it automatically loads the Allotment Table, Chord Symbol Library, Drum Map, Expressions Library, and Instruments Library specified in this dialog box.

To select a new default Library, press and hold the mouse on the corresponding Library name and select a new Library from the pop-up menu.

The pop-up menu shows only those Libraries stored in the Libraries folder. That folder must be in the same folder as the Overture application.

Use the Auto Save Changed Libraries checkbox to tell Overture whether or not to save automatically any changes you may have made to any of the library types. You can either choose to check or to uncheck this option:

•	Checked. If you change any of the five library types without saving them to disk and you quit Overture, all changes are saved automatically without any warnings or dialog boxes.

•	Unchecked. If you change any of the five library types without saving them to disk and you quit Overture, a dialog box tells you that your current libraries have changed. You can then choose whether or not you want to save all library changes to disk.


Preferences>Playback tab

Options/Preferences>Playback tab

To view the playback preferences, click the Playback tab.

Use the check boxes to enable (check) or disabled (uncheck) various playback options. These playback options are discussed in the following sections.

MIDI Through Follows Tracks

Use this option to determine whether or not Overture will automatically change the Thru Instrument when you select different staves in the Score window. You can choose to either check or uncheck this option:

•	Checked. Whenever you click in a staff, Overture automatically changes the Thru Instrument to match the Device selected in the Tracks window.

•	Unchecked. Overture does not automatically change the Thru Instrument when you click in different staves—it stays set to the Instrument last selected from the Thru Instrument pop-up menu.

Play Dynamics

Use this option to tell Overture whether or not to change MIDI playback volumes when it encounters dynamic markings. You can choose to either check or uncheck this option:

•	Checked. When Overture encounters a dynamic marking in your score, it changes the MIDI playback volume to the level specified in the Dynamics dialog box.

•	Unchecked. Overture ignores dynamic markings when playing your score.

This option duplicates the function of the Use in Playback checkbox in the Dynamics dialog box.

Play Notes While Inserting/Dragging

Use this option to determine whether or not Overture sends MIDI data when inserting or dragging notes. You can choose to either check or uncheck this option:

•	Checked. When you insert a note or drag it in a score, Overture sends MIDI data to an external sound module—this gives you audible feedback of the note’s pitch. Select a chord and click any note in it to get audible feedback of the entire chord.

•	Unchecked. Overture does not play a note when you insert it or drag it in the Score window, therefore you receive no audible feedback of the note’s pitch.

Play Trills/Tremolos

Use this option to tell Overture whether or not to interpret trill and tremolo symbols when it plays back the score through a MIDI sound module. You can choose either to check or to uncheck this option:

•	Checked. When Overture encounters either a trill or tremolo symbol in your score, it automatically performs a trill or tremolo.

•	Unchecked. Overture ignores trill and tremolo symbols when playing your score. It plays the notes straight rather than articulated.

Trill Playback

You can modify trill playback by double-clicking the trill character. The Set Trill dialog box opens.

Overture plays the trill for the duration of the note within the pitch Interval using note durations set by the Rate option. The Diatonic option sets the trill to one diatonic scale interval above the selected note.

Space Bar Plays from Cursor

Use this option to specify space bar behavior. When you check this option, pressing the space bar has the same effect as clicking the Play From Measure button in the Transport Controls: playback begins from the current cursor location. When you deselect this option, pressing the space bar starts playback from the beginning of the file.


Preferences>Dynamics tab

Use the fourteen numericals to specify playback levels for dynamic markings. Each numerical specifies a MIDI volume level (MIDI control #7) or velocity level.

For more information about Dynamics, see:

Dynamics Palette Overview

Using Absolute Dynamics Tools

Using Crescendos and Decrescendos


Frequently Asked Questions

How do I enter notes and rests one by one?

How do I enter notes and rests by recording?

How do I enter chords by playing them?

How do I enter chords using the mouse?

How do I enter lyrics?

How do I add a title to the first page?

How do I add composer credits or copyrights to the page?

How do I add page numbers?

How do I add text to a measure or a page?

How do I add staves to the page?

How do I remove a staff?

How do I change the order of the staves from top to bottom?

How do I move staves around on the page?

How do I adjust staff positions through the whole score?

How do I extract separate parts from a complete score?

How do I import a MIDI file?

How do I open a song I made in another music software program?

How do I open an Overture song in another music program?

How do I make the music smaller on the page?

How do I make cue notes?

How do I convert a note into a grace note?

How do I add endings or repeat barlines to my score?

How do I add a repeat like D.S. al Fine or To Coda to my score?

How do I make drum staves?

How do I turn regular noteheads into drum noteheads?

How do I create copyright and trademark symbols in text?

Why are there duplicate chords in the chord window?

Why do I see General MIDI patches instead of my keyboard patches?

 Why do I hear a delay when I’m recording or playing my keyboard using Keyboard Thru?

In step inputting, does Enter add notes or replace them?

Why do transcribed MIDI files look different in Overture?

How do I dispaly patch names in the transport Controls?

How do I hear playback?


How do I enter notes and rests one by one?

When you enter notes one by one, it’s called Step Inputting. You can step input notes two ways:

Using the mouse:

You can use the Notes palette to enter notes individually. The palette is on the Main Tool Bar. If the tool bar isn’t visible, click Window>Tool Bars>Main Tool Bar.

1.	Choose a duration from the palette

2.	Position the cursor over the pitch you wish to enter

3.	Click the mouse button to enter the note

Use your computer keyboard to change duration values (type 4 for quarter note, 8 for eighth note, and so on) on the palette. You keyboard also determines whether you enter notes or rests (type r to switch from one to the other), or dotted notes or rests (type the period to turn dots on and off).

For more information, see Using the Notes Palette.

Using the Step Input window and your computer or MIDI keyboard:

Step inputting notes using nothing more than your computer or MIDI keyboard may be the fastest way to enter notes. To open the Step Input window, choose Windows>Step Input. Then you can type notes on your computer keyboard, entering them almost like words in a word processor. Or you can enter pitches from your MIDI keyboard while setting the duration value on your computer keyboard. Either way, it’s a great way to enter notes quickly.

For more information, see Step Entering Notes and Rests.


How do I enter notes and rests by recording?

If you’re a good keyboard player, Overture can make excellent transcriptions of your playing. You can build a recording one staff at a time, and even play percussion parts into Overture, with percussion notes mapped to the correct staves. Click any measure in a staff where you want to begin, click Record in the Transport window (Windows>Tool Bars>Transport), and you’re off!

See Real Time MIDI Recording for more details.


How do I enter chords by playing them?

By using Overture’s Step Input window (Windows>Step Input), you can enter chords individually by playing them on a MIDI keyboard. Overture recognizes over a hundred different combinations of notes in any given key. Hold down the notes on your keyboard while Step Entering, and Overture automatically enters your chords. For more information, see Entering Chord Names with the Computer Keyboard.


How do I enter Chords using the mouse?

Use Overture’s Chords window(Windows>Chords). The window lets you choose your chord root, the note in the bass, and a chord suffix (the min7 part of a Cmin7 chord). Just click the combination you need, then switch to the score window and click where you want your chord assigned. See Entering Chord Names with the Mousefor more information.


How do I enter Lyrics?

Overture allows you to type in the lyrics you want using the Lyrics window (Windows>Lyrics), just as you would on a word processor. In the Lyrics window, insert a new, blank verse in your score. Choose where your lyrics should appear in the score by choosing a particular staff, beginning at a particular measure in a particular voice. Set which font your lyrics will use. Then type in your lyrics. Use a space to separate words and a hyphen to tell Overture to split syllables across two neighboring notes. Finally, assign the lyrics to the score--Overture displays them instantly, intelligently avoiding rests and ties.

If the lyrics don’t appear where you’d expect, make sure you’ve assigned them to the right staff and measure and that you’ve selected the right voice in that staff. Add some spaces or hyphens as necessary to make sure the words appear under the correct notes to account for slurred notes and other situations.

For more information, see Advanced Lyric Entry Techniques and The Lyrics Window.


How do I add a title to the first page?

Use the Title Page Textdialog box (Score>Title Page). Overture automatically places the title text in its default location, although you can drag the items directly on the score, if you want.

Using the Title Page Text dialog box, you can also add:

•	performance instructions (displayed above the first measure)

•	composer credits (displayed above the first staff system at the right margin)

•	copyrightcredits (usually displayed at the bottom center of the first page)

•	up to two headers displayed across the top of the page

•	up to two footersdisplayed across the bottom of the page

See Score>Title Page for more details.


How do I add composer credits or copyrights to the page?

To add text like composer credits and copyrights to your title page, use the Title Page Text dialog box (Score>Title Page). Overture automatically places the text in its default location. You can drag the items directly on the score, if you want.

Using the Title Page Text dialog box, you can also add:

•	the title

•	performance instructions (displayed above the first measure)

•	up to two headers displayed across the top of the page

•	up to two footers displayed across the bottom of the page

See Score>Title Page for more details.


How do I add page numbers?

It’s easiest to add page numbers as a Footer, using the Title Page Text dialog box (Score>Title Page). You can set the text, the font, and the alignment (left, right, or center).

You can have Overture automatically add the current page number to the bottom of the page by typing a special code, #P. For example, typing the words “Page #P” in a footer makes Overture display “Page1” on the first page.

Using the Title Page Text dialog box, you can also add:

•	the title

•	performance instructions (displayed above the first measure)

•	composer credits (displayed above the first staff system at the right margin)

•	copyright credits (usually displayed at the bottom center of the first page)

•	up to two headers displayed across the top of the page

•	up to two footers displayed across the bottom of the page

See Score>Title Page for more details.


How do I add text to a measure or a page?

Overture allows you to add any text you want to a page or measure using the Page Textand Measure Text tools, on the Text palette.

Use the Insert Page Text tool to add text to a page that stays on that page, no matter how you arrange the staves and measures. Use the Insert Bar Text tool to add text to a measure, allowing the text to flow with that measure wherever it moves on the page.

To add a rehearsal mark, use the Using Rehearsal Marks tool on the Text palette instead.

To add a score title or other text that belongs on the title page, use the Title Page Text dialog box instead.

To add lyrics, use the Lyrics window instead.


How do I add staves to the page?

Choose the Score>Insert Track command to insert a new track into the score. When you choose the Insert Track command, the Insert Track dialog box opens.

	1.	Click on the track where you want to insert the new track.
	2.	Choose Score>Insert Track to open the Insert Track dialog box.
	3.	Choose the type on track (instrument) you want to insert.
	4.	Click either the Before current track or After current track radio buttons. If you select Before current track, the new track iis inserted mmediately before the active track (the track that contains the insertion point). If you select After current track, the new track iis inserted immediately after the active track.
	5.	Click the OK button.

Or

Use the Staves palette. Click one of the tools on the Staves palette, then click the score. A new staff is added above or below the location you click, depending on whether your mouse cursor points up or down before you click.


How do I move staves around on the page?

Press and drag the staff handle. Staff handles are always there on every staff, at the middle line on any staff at the left and right edges of staff system. When you position your mouse over a staff handle, the cursor turns into a drag cursor. Staff handles are usually hidden to prevent clutter--if you want to see the handles, choose Options>Show>Handles.

When you drag a handle right or left, you adjust the position of the system towards or away from the page margin. When you drag a handle up or down, you change the vertical position of the staff. See Arranging Staves and Systems for more details on arranging your page.


How do I adjust staff positions through the whole score?

It’s easy to change staff positions through the whole score. Use one of Overture’s handy shortcuts: holding the Control key before clicking your mouse and dragging an item.

When you Alt-drag a staff handle, you adjust the position of that track throughout the whole score from that point on. Although handles are normally hidden, you can see staff handles and other item handles by choosing Options>Show>Handles.

To adjust the distance between all staff systems

1.	Go to the first page

2.	Press Control and press the topmost staff handle on the second system on the page, then drag the handle to adjust the distance between that staff’s system and the first system above it

3.	When you release the mouse, Overture applies that spacing through the rest of the score

To change the distance between one staff and a neighboring staff through the whole score:

1.	Go to the first page

2.	Alt-drag any staff handle on the first system on the page, except the top staff (remember, if you click the top staff’s handle, you’ll be adjusting the spacing between systems, not individual staves with a system)

3.	When you release the mouse, Overture applies that spacing through the rest of the score.


How do I extract parts?
How do I create separate instrument parts from a complete score?

Choose File>Extract Parts to create separate instrument parts from your score. For more information on extracting parts, see File>Extract Parts.


How do I import a MIDI file?

Overture imports MIDI files through its Open dialog box. Choose File>Import and locate any standard MIDI file you want to convert into music notation automatically. For more information on importing MIDI files, see Importing a MIDI File.


How do I open a song from another music program?

If the file is an Encore or MusicTime file just Choose File>Import to import the file. If  not, you’ll need to create a MIDI file of your song in that music program and use Overture’s MIDI file import to create your Overture document. Choose File>Import to import the MIDI file. For instructions on creating a MIDI file of your song, see the other application’s documentation. For more information on Overture’s use of MIDI files, see Importing a MIDI File.


How do I open a Overture song in another music program?

Since most music software programs can open MIDI files, create a MIDI file of your song. Use Overture’s Export MIDI File feature (File>Export). For more information on Overture’s use of MIDI files, see File>Export.


How do I make the music smaller on the page?

You can change the size of music on a staff using the Setup Trackdialog box Scale function. Choose Score>Setup Track or double-click a track’s clef to open the dialog box.

When the Scale setting is 100%, Overture displays music in its usual size. When the Scale setting is smaller than 100%, Overture displays the music at a smaller size--everything on the staff becomes smaller, including markings, notes, and lyrics.

For example, you’ll often want to make a vocal staff in a Piano/Vocal lead sheet smaller than the piano staves. In this case, you might set the Vocal staff to 80%, leaving the piano staves at 100%.

For more information on formatting your music, see See Arranging Staves and Systems

To make one staff a different size than the rest:

1.	Click the track you want to change

2.	Choose Score>Setup Track

3.	Change the Scale setting (to 80%, for example)--you can click in the number field and drag up or down to change the value

4.	Click OK

You can also click Next and Previous in the Setup Track dialog to examine every staff in the score, applying any changes you want to each staff individually.

To make many staves the same size at once:

Use Overture’s handy Alt-dragging shortcut to apply a change to many items at once, in this case, staves.

1.	In a score with many tracks, click the topmost track you want to change

2.	Choose Score>Setup Track

3.	Hold the Alt key

4.	While holding the Alt key, click in the Scale setting and change the value by dragging up or down

5.	Click OK.

When you return to the score, that staff and every staff below it take on the new size you specify.


How do I make some cue notes?
How do I make Cue Notes?

Create cue notes using the Notate As command. Simply select the full size notes with the Arrow tool, and choose Notes>Notate As>Cue Notes. The notes instantly become smaller cue notes. You may want to add a rest in another Voice so that the rest and the cue notes both display.


How do I convert a note into a grace note?

Select the notes with the Arrow tool and type the g key on your computer keyboard. Or, select the notes, and use the Notes>Notate As>Grace Notes command. For more information on editing notes, see Notes Menu.


How do I add endings or repeat barlines to my score?

Use the Barlines palettein the Main Tool Bar to add repeats and endings. Click the tool you wish to use, then click the measure you want to change into a repeated section or ending.

For information on other repeats displayed as text, like D.S. al Coda, see Repeat dialog box. For information on endings, including setting up second, third, and other endings, see Using Ending Tools.


How do I add a repeat, like D.S. al Fine or To Coda to my score?

Use the Set Segnos, Codas, etc. dialog box to add a repeat to any measure. Click the measure in which you want a repeat to appear, and choose Measures>Set Codas, Segnos, etc.. The Repeats dialog box lets you choose from several common repeat types, or you can create your own. For more information on repeats, see Set Repeats.


How do I make drum staves?

You can make any staff in the score into a drum or percussion staff using the Setup Track dialog box. Click the staff you want to change and choose Score>Setup Track.

In the Setup Track dialog box, choose Drums or Percussion from the Instrument list. A chart appears containing MIDI pitches, drum names, staff position and noteheads. Choose the drum names you want to display on the staff and the notehead and position each drum name should use. From then on, you can add notes to the staves easily as percussion notes. Whenever you record on that track using MIDI, the MIDI pitches you specify appear in the staff positions you choose with the notehead you want. For more information on percussion and drum notation, see Noteheads.


How do I turn regular noteheads into drum noteheads?

Use Overture’s Heads palette on the Main Tool Bar. Using any of the notehead tools provided, you can click individual notes or select several notes at once to change them to the notehead you select. For more information on percussion notation, see Noteheads.


How do I create copyright and trademark symbols in text?

It is easy to add special text like the © copyright symbol to your headers and footers.

Windows provides a handy accessory, called the Character Map, to help you locate and insert uncommon symbols like the copyright in your text. You can usually find the Character Map accessory in the Start menu, inside the Programs folder’s Accessories folder.

When you launch the Character Map, you can see all the various characters that aren’t readily accessible from your QWERTY keyboard, like copyright, trademark, and registered trademark. The Character Map will tell you what keystrokes you make to add a symbol into your text. You can copy any symbol in Character Map, ready for pasting, or you can learn the keystroke needed to make the symbol yourself.

To enter most characters, Hold the Alt key, press four number keys, and then release the Alt key. Some common symbols in most text fonts include:

Character…	How to Make it…

Copyright symbol:  ©	Alt-0169

Trademark symbol:  ™	Alt-0153

Registered trademark symbol:  ®	Alt-0174


Why are there duplicate chords in the chord window?

Because there are lots of ways to voice many chords and we want to be sure that Overture recognizes as many chord voicings as is practical. So you will see, for example, several variations on a 13 chord.


Why do I see General MIDI patches instead of my keyboard patches?

See Options>Instruments… for a description of instrument definitions. Instrument definitions are collections of settings like bank definitions and patch names, stored in .ins files like KORG.INS, ROLAND.INS and YAMAHA.INS. They make it easy for you to choose a patch name in Overture that matches the name of a patch on your synthesizer, and have the right sound play on the device.

Overture includes many instrument definitions for popular MIDI sound modules and keyboards. More definitions are available for downloading from GenieSoft’s web site, or elsewhere on the Internet.


Why do I hear a delay recording or playing using Keyboard Thru?

On some systems, using Keyboard Thru (sometimes called MIDI through) in Oveture seems to cause a delay which can also affect MIDI recording on some of those systems. If you’re affected by this problem, turn off Keyboard Thru in the Options menu. GenieSoft is investigating this problem, and will make a solution available as soon as the solution has been tested.


In step inputting, does Enter add notes or replace them?

It depends on which Enter key! Most PC keyboards (except some laptops) actually have two Enter keys, one near the letter pad and one near the number pad keys. The first one replaces notes and moves the cursor forward, and the other adds notes to existing ones without moving forward, forming chords.

Replacing Notes

Use the Enter key near the letter pad to enter notes and move forward. When there's already a note in the measure, use this Enter key to replace the note with a new one and move forward.

Adding Notes to Form Chords

Use the Enter key near the number pad to enter a note at the current pitch to any existing notes without moving forward. To move forward, press the Enter key near the letter pad.


Why do transcribed MIDI files look different in Overture?

Overture and and other MIDI sequencing programs work a little differently. It isn’t possible for the exact pattern of notes you see in a sequencer’s to appear Overture’s transcription.

There are many reasons for this. For example, programs don’t write the actual notation as it’s displayed onscreen into a MIDI file, but instead writes the start and stop times of notes in a given measure.

When you bring the MIDI file into Overture, it looks at the note start and stop times, making sensible choices about the best way to transcribe (i.e., display in notation) any set of notes. While the pattern of notes you see Overture’s quantized transcription may resemble the results in other programs, it will almost never be exactly the same. The differences in transcription are a bit like the normal differences you see when two different people are asked to transcribe a recording into music notation.

When it transcribes the MIDI file, Overture lets you choose whether or not it should be sensitive to inner voices and other complexities when transcribing a track.

Overture provides the easier set of tools for adjusting the transcription of your MIDI files.


How do I display patch names in the transport window?

Overture displays patch numbers instead of patch names when it has no way of knowing what names to display. To tell Overture what to display, you probably need to do one of the following: set up your Instruments and MIDI Devices, or tell Overture what device and instrument to use on a given track.

You can set up instruments and devices in the Options menu, using the MIDI Devices and Instruments command

If your instruments and devices are set up properly, you may need to tell Overture what device to use when playing each track. When a track’s device is none, Overture won’t display patch names. To assign devices to tracks, use the Tracks window


How Do I Remove a Staff?

Use the Score>Delete Track menu command or use the Erase tool located next to the Arrow tool on the Main Tool Bar. Just point at any item you want to delete and click to remove it. To delete a staff, click the staff handle, located at the left edge of the staff at the middle line. The handles are usually invisible to prevent on screen clutter; if you want, you can view the handles by choosing Options>Show>Handles.


How Do I Hear Playback?

To hear playback, your must tell your system which port you are using. You do this by selecting your MIDI devices.

To select MIDI devices:

1.	Select Options | MIDI Devices.

The MIDI Devices dialog appears.

2.	Select your input and output ports and click OK. If you have no MIDI devices physically attached to your computer, you cannot use a MIDI Out port. You must use your soundcard’s onboard MIDI playback device. It may be called MIDI synth. If in doubt, try each of the output port options in the MIDI Ports dialog.

3.	Select Windows | Track Window.

The Track List window appears.

4.	Select a Device, Bank and Patch for each track.


How do I change the order of the staves from top to bottom?

It is easy to change the order of the staves using the The Tracks Window.

The Tracks Window displays all the tracks in your document in the order they appear, numbered top to bottom (each track is represented by an individual track in the score).

To view the Tracks Window, choose Window | Tracks.

To change the order of the staves, click the track’s number and drag it to the desired position.


Writing Your First Score
The Basics: Writing Your First Score

Starting Overture

Assigning Instruments

Opening the Tutorial File

Preparing the Score

Entering Notes

Editing Notes

Adding a Pickup Measure

Adding a Slur

Entering Symbols

Adding Voices

Changing Stem Directions

In this tutorial, you start constructing a score for “Amazing Grace” using some of the note and symbol tools available in Overture. Start the tutorial by Starting Overture


Starting Overture

When you open Overture, a New Score dialog box appears. Use the dialog to to enter your new score attributes.

When you open Overture for the first time, the first MIDI device found in your system is used for playback. If you need to add a MIDI keyboard or make a change to your MIDI setup, open the Options>MIDI Devices dialog box.

The MIDI devices dialog allows you to set up your MIDI devices for input and output.  You can assign names to your devices using the Options>Instruments dialog box.

Assigning Instruments

If you plan to use MIDI, once you’ve set up your MIDI devices you can assign a MIDI instrument definition to each available MIDI port and channel. The assignments you make determine the MIDI bank names, patch names, note names, and controller names that you see.

	1.	Select one or more MIDI ports and channels from the Port/ Channel list (use Shift-click and Control-click to select multiple ports and channels).
	2.	Choose the instrument to which the selected ports and channels should be assigned from the Uses Instrument list. A black line connects the two lists.
	3.	To save these changes permanently, check the Save Changes for Next Session box.
	4.	Click OK when you are done.
	From now on, Overture uses the bank, patch, controller, and note names from the assigned instrument.
You can change your choices in the Assign Instruments dialog box any time. Display it by choosing Options>Instruments.


Constructing a Tutorial File

	1.	Choose File>New if the New Score dialog does not appear automatically. Overture opens the New Score dialog box.
	2.	Click on the single staff radio button to a choose Treble Clef staff. Do not choose any other options.  You’ll set these manually in the tutorial.
Use this newly created blank score for this tutorial.


Preparing The Score

The first step in constructing the score is setting the key and time signature.

	1.	Choose the Arrow Cursor tool from the Tool Bar.
	2.	Click somewhere in the first measure, so that the  insertion point is positioned within that measure.
	3.	Choose Measures>Set Key Signature. The Set Key Signature dialog box opens.
	4.	Click the up arrow twice to move the key up to D Major, then click the OK button.
Since this piece is in 3/4 time, you need to change the time signature.

	1.	Choose Measures >Set Time Signature.The Set Time Signature dialog box opens.
	2.	Click the 3/4 button at the top of the window to set the score to 3/4 time.
	3.	Click OK.


Entering Notes

Now you’re ready to add some notes. Before you add each note, you have to specify a duration for it. There are three ways to do so:

• 	Press and hold the note palette’s icon in the Tool Bar, choose a note from the pop-up menu, and release the mouse button. The note palette vanishes.

Or

• 	Tear off the Notes palette by dragging it off the main toolbar, then choose a note value from the palette by clicking the appropriate tool.

Or

• 	Specify the note duration from the keyboard. Use 2 for a half note, 4 for a quarter note, and so on. The chart on the Quick Reference card shows shows a complete list of keyboard substitutions.

Here is the melody for Amazing Grace that you will write on the score:

	•	Since the first note in the melody is a half note, type the number 2. If the Notes palette is visible, the half note icon highlights. The note icon in the tool bar also changes to a half note.
Now it’s time to add the notes.

	1.	Position the crosshair in the first measure, on d, then click. A D appears in the score, and instantly moves to the left,
	2.	Type 8 to set the duration to eighth notes.
	3.	Position the cursor on the F space and click.This inserts an F# since you are in the key of D.
	4.	Position the cursor on the D line, to the right of theF# you just inserted, and click. Overture automatically draws a beam connecting the F# and D.
Repeat the steps of selecting the duration and placing notes on the score until your window looks like the melody in the graphic above.


Editing Notes

Overture has many tools for adjusting score elements. In many instances, it is not necessary to specially select them; you can just move the pointer over the element and the pointer will change shape to let you know that you can now edit the element.

You may notice that the last note in the melody in the previous graphic is the wrong pitch and duration. This section shows you how to fix it.

Changing Pitch or Duration

The eighth note G in the last measure of the score should actually be a half note A. To change pitch, drag a note up and down or select it, then press the up or down arrow keys. To change its duration, select it, then type the keyboard equivalent for the correct value

	1.	Position the pointer over the erroneous note so that it becomes a Drag Cursor,  then click. The note head turns red, indicating that it is selected:
	2.	Change the G ito an A by dragging it up one step.
	3.	While the note is still selected, change its duration by typing the number 2 (for half note). The note becomes a half note.
Overture lets you edit multiple notes simultaneously. Select multiple notes by shift-clicking them or by dragging a box around them. Any edit operation affects all selected notes.

Erasing

To erase any item from the score, select the eraser cursor  from the tool bar (or type e). Position the cursor over the note or symbol you wish to delete and click.


Adding a Pickup Measure

You may have noticed that the initial pickup note is missing from the score. To add new measures and change their lengths:

	1.	Choose the Arrow Cursor tool from the Tool Bar.
	2.	Click in the first measure, making it the active measure.
	3.	Choose Measures>Insert. The Insert Measure dialog box opens:
	4.	The preset values are correct, so simply click OK. Overture inserts a blank measure before the first measure.

Now tell Overture that it’s a pickup measure.

	1	Click in the first measure to make it the active measure.
	2	Choose Measures>Set Time Signature to open the Set Time Signature dialog box.
	3	Click the Is Pickup check box.
	4.	Click OK.

Use what you learned earlier to put a quarter-note a in the measure.

To move the barline to the left, reducing the space used by the measure:

	1.	Make sure that the Arrow Cursor tool is selected.
	2.	Choose Options>Show>Handles. Handles (small boxes for manipulating objects) appear.
	3.	To move the barline, drag its handle to the left. Adjust it so that it looks good to you.
	4.	Choose Options>Show>Handles again to hide the handles. You can use handles even when they’re invisible, if you prefer not to see them.


Adding a Slur

Now add a slur to the eighth notes in the second measure:

	1.	Select the slur tool from the Groups palette. The groups palette has a number of tools for marking multiple note, like ties, slurs, and ottava signs.
	2.	Drag a rectangle around the notes that you want to group. When you release the mouse button, a slur appears. To alter the shape of the slur, either drag the slur or click it to display shaping handles. Try dragging handles now to see how the slur changes.


Entering Symbols

The tool bar has a number of palettes whose tools are called symbols. These are the ornaments, articulations, noteheads, dynamics, expressions, text and clefs palettes. This section introduces you to the basics of placing and moving symbols on the score.

Dynamics

There is a mezzo-piano at the start of the piece. To put it in the score:

	1.	Choose the mezzo-piano tool from the dynamics palette. You can drop the palette down temporarily from the dynamics button in the tool bar, or you can tear off the palette for repeated uses.
	2.	Position the pointer under the first note of the score and click to place a mezzo-piano symbol there. To move it, move the pointer over the symbol so that it becomes a drag cursor, and drag the symbol to the right place.

Some dynamics symbols, like the crescendo hairpin, are resizable. To see how this works, add a crescendo and diminuendo to the score.

	1.	Choose the crescendo hairpin from the dynamics palette.
	2.	Put the pointer at the start of the second measure, press and hold the mouse button and drag to the right. The crescendo symbol appears and grows as you drag.
Now add a diminuendo in the third measure, using what you learned above. Drag from right to left, using the same open hairpin symbol.

Ornaments and Articulations

Add ornaments (like fingerings) and articulations (like staccato marks) to the score just as you add dynamics. To add the same ornament or articulation to many notes, drag a box around them with the ornament tool.

You can, if you wish, attach ornaments to specific notes. To do so click the note or select a group of notes to ornament. You can drag an attached ornament wherever you please, but it remains attached to the original note for playback purposes.


Adding Voices

Now it’s time to add a second voice to the score. A voice is a single melodic line in a track. Each track may have up to four voices. For further explanation of voices, consult Terms.

	1.	Choose the dotted half note in the note palette. Click the half note, then the augmentation dot to add a dot to the half note.
	2.	Select Voice 2 from the voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the score window. Selecting Voice 2 dims the notes belonging to Voice 1:
	3.	Click the F space at the start of the second measure to add F#. Don’t worry about the stems—you’ll clean them up later.
	4.	Add more dotted half notes, one per measure: another F#, a G, then a final F#.


Changing Stem Directions

With the stems from each voice going in the wrong direction, the score is difficult to read. To change stem direction:

	1.	Choose Edit>Select All (or type Control-a) to select all the notes in the current voice. The note heads turn red to indicate that they are selected.
	2.	Choose Notes>Stem>Stem Down (or type Control-d) to point the stems down.
	3.	Choose Voice 1 from the Voice pop-up menu at the bottom of the score window (or type Control-1).
	4.	Choose Edit>Select All (or type Control-a) to select all the notes in Voice 1.
	5.	Choose Notes>Stem>Stem Up (or type Control-u) to point the stems up.
	6.	Show all voices by selecting All from the voice pop-up menu (or typing Control-0 [zero]).

Go to the next tutorial: Beyond the Basics


Beyond the Basics

Adding Staves

Setting Up Staves

Setting Up MIDI

Recording MIDI

Linking Staves to MIDI Devices

Recording

Setting Up Step Record

Adding Chords

Adding Lyrics

Printing

Setting Up the Score

Templates

This tutorial teaches you how to create systems (groups of staves played together), assign instrument names, and set up some features of tracks.

Begin the tutorial by Adding Staves


Adding Staves

The score of “Amazing Grace” now consists of two voices in the treble clef. The next task is to add a staff for the left-hand accompaniment.

	1.	To specify the bass clef, select the bass staff tool from the staves palette. Don’t confuse the staves palette with its neighbor, the clefs palette. You may also use the Score>Insert Track menu command and skip the next step.
	2.	Move the pointer to the staff below the treble clef, so that the pointer becomes an up arrow. When you’re in position, click the mouse. The bass clef appears in the proper position.
You can add a variety of kinds of staves with the staves tools, like piano staves, percussion staves, piano and melody staves.  Further, you can add a number of symbols that affect multiple staves, like braces, brackets, and cross-staff barlines.

To delete a staff, click its handle (just to the left of the middle line) with the eraser cursor.

Now add a brace so the staves appear as  a grand staff (conventional left-hand/right-hand piano notation).

	1.	Select the brace tool from the staves palette.
	2.	Drag a box that spans the two staves. When you release the button, the brace appears.
All that remains is to add a barline through the system.

	1.	Select the Cross-Staff Barlines tool from the Staves palette.
	2.	Drag a box around both staves. A barline appears, connecting the two staves.
Overture has many features that can affect all the staves or measures in a system at once. See The Score Window for full details.


Setting Up Staves

In this tutorial, you specify that the staves are piano parts.

	1.	Click anywhere in the top staff to make it the active one.
	2.	Choose Score>Setup Track or double-click the staff’s handle. The Setup Track dialog box opens:
	3.	In the Instrument section display the Instrument Name pop-up menu, which lists common instruments. Choose Piano for the current track. The name boxes in the Setup Track dialog box fill in automatically.
	4.	Check the Show Main box. This causes the instrument name to appear to the left of the staff in the score.
	5.	Click OK.

Use the Setup Track dialog box to change many properties of each track, including

• 	which lines of the staff are displayed

• 	which elements of the staff are displayed

• 	scale of entire staff (greater or less than 100%)

• 	transposition if different from concert key

The next several tutorials discuss Overture’s MIDI functions. If you aren’t using a MIDI device with Overture, skip  to “Adding Lyrics” on page 27.


Setting Up MIDI

To record with MIDI, you must have a MIDI interface connected to your computer and a MIDI keyboard connected to the interface. A detailed explanation of these procedures is beyond the scope of this tutorial, so if you haven’t yet set yourself up, read the manuals that come with your MIDI keyboard(s) and interface(s) and get set up.

You won’t be able to proceed with this tutorial until you have done this.


Recording MIDI

There are a few program options to set up before you can start recording.

Metronome

You may want to set up a metronome to guide your playing.  To do so, consult Options>Metronome>Metronome Sound in the on-line help.

Record Options

	1.	Choose Options>Record Options. This opens the Record Options dialog box, where you tell Overture how to display the recorded data.
	2.	Make sure Auto Transcribe is checked.
	3.	Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Transcription Quantize

Overture records data from MIDI devices with  great rhythmic sensitivity. Often you don’t want such an accurate transcription. Say you’re only interested in entering quarter notes. Unless you play with computer precision, you could wind up with something like this:

To fix this, use the Transcription Quantize Amount button to round up anything smaller than a quarter note. Choose quarter note resolution.

Now whatever you play in transcribes as quarter notes or longer.


Linking Staves to MIDI Devices

To play on the proper devices, you need to specify where to send the data:

	1.	Click anywhere in the treble clef, so that it becomes active.
	2.	Choose Windows>Tracks. Each line in this window represents a staff in the score. If you have a multi-timbral synthesizer (one that plays more than one note at a time), you can play each staff over a different synthesizer sound, that is, with a unique device and channel. For simplicity’s sake, assign both staves to the same sound.
	3.	Click in the Device column. A pop-up menu appears listing all of your currently available instruments, as you set them up in the Assign Instruments dialog box in the first tutorial. Pick a device and MIDI channel appropriate for your setup.
	4.	Click the Device column for Track 2, and pick the same MIDI device and channel. Overture is now configured to play back the right and left hand parts on the synthesizer channel you selected.


Recording

Look at the left hand part for “Amazing Grace.”

You are going to play this into Overture from a MIDI keyboard. While you are do so, you will hear the metronome and the already-entered right-hand part.

	1.	Make sure Options>Keyboard Thru is checked.
	2.	Open the Transport window by choosing Windows>Transport.
	3.	Using the Thru device pop-up menu, select the same MIDI Instrument that you selected in the previous section. This makes everything you play on your keyboard sound on the Thru device.
	4.	Click in the first measure of the bass staff. Recording begins at the insertion point.
	5.	Set a transcription quantize note to smooth the transcription.
	6.	Choose Options>Metronome>Click in Count Off to have the metronome give you a one-bar count-in.
	7.	Click the record button to begin. There is a one-measure count in during which the metronome plays but no MIDI data is recorded.
	8.	Play the part!
	9.	When you’ve played it, press the spacebar or click the stop button to stop recording,
When you finish, your score should look like the one on page 23. To  clean up any mistakes use the editing techniques introduced earlier.

To hear what you played, click the Play button or press the space bar. Overture plays back your notes.  Click the Stop button or press space to stop playing.


Setting up Step Record

This tutorial introduces you to Overture’s step entry features. It assumes you have set up your MIDI devices and interfaces properly.

Step entry lets you enter notes very quickly from a MIDI device, one at a time.  It assigns them the value, size, duration, and velocity you specify in the Step Input window, regardless of how you play them.

To open the Step Input window, choose Windows>Step Input.

Use the Step Entry window to add more notes to the left hand part.

	1.	Make sure the type area displays a note.
	2.	Position the insertion point at the beginning of the first full measure of the bass clef. When you step enter data, it starts at the insertion point (the blinking cursor).
	3.	Select the dotted half note from the Note Size pop-up menu. The counter advances this much time after you enter each note.
	4.	Select Percent from the Duration pop-up menu. This tells Overture that step-entered notes have a playback duration equal to 90% of a dotted half-note. Playback duration affects only what you hear when you play the data over MIDI devices.  A little space between notes often sounds a little more realistic.
	5.	Play the low notes of the left hand part as shown here:
You can, of course, enter rests and chords, as well as rhythmic and slash notes.  See The Step Input Window


Adding Chords

Use the Chords window to put chord names in the Score window. To open the Chords window, choose Windows>Chords.

To add a chord to the score:

	1.	Click one of the root buttons to set the root of a chord name.
	2.	Click a sharp or flat button if the root is sharp or flat.
	3.	Click one of the bass buttons to add an alternate bass note to a chord name.
	4.	Click the sharp or flat button if the bass note is sharp or flat.
	5.	Click one of the symbols to select it. If a symbol isn’t visible, use the scroll bars to scroll the list,
	6.	Preview the chord name in the chord name display.
	7.	Click the Score window to insert the chord name.
For more information about adding chords, see The Chords Window.


Adding Lyrics

To add a lyric to a score that currently contains no lyrics:

	1.	Choose Window>Lyrics. Overture opens the Lyrics window.
	2.	Click the Insert Lyric button. Overture creates a tab.
	3.	In the Name box, type a name for the lyric.
	4.	In the Track box, type the number of the track to which you want to assign the lyric, numbering the tracks from top to bottom.
	5.	In the Measure box, type the number of the measure in which you want the lyric to begin.
	6.	In the Voice box, type the voice number (1-4) to which you want to assign the lyric.
	7.	In the Verse box, type the verse number (1-4) of the lyric.
	8.	Type the lyric in the Lyric editing area. Use spaces to separate words, and hyphens to separate syllables you want attached to different notes.
	9.	Click the Apply Lyric button. Overture assigns each word to an individual note automatically, adjusting for hyphens and spaces.
See The Lyrics Window for details about adding lyrics.


Printing

You’re ready for the final step—putting your score on paper.

Before printing, you need to set margins and page size.  Choose Score>Page Dimensions to open the Page Dimensions dialog box.

To add titles, composer, author of lyrics, copyright, and other textual information, use the Page Text dialog box.  Choose Score>Title Page.  You can specify font, size, style, location, and whatever text you want to appear.  Drag page text on the score to reposition it.

To move a stave on the page, press and drag its handles, located at the left and right edges of of each staff on the middle line.  If you prefer, you can make the staff handles visible by choosing Options>Show>Handles. See Arranging Staves and Systems for more information.

Overture has many facilites for making your score look just as you want it to.  Try, for example, Measures>Increase Measures on System, Measures>Decrease Measures on System, Measures>Justify, Score>Respace Staves, Score>Recalc Layout.

When everything is perfect, choose File>Print.  In the standard print dialog box, set everything properly for your printer and click OK.


Templates

In the Overture Templates folder are a number of templates using different formats. Open them and look at the staff and page settings to get a feel for their design. You can create your own templates, too.  One of the best ways to learn is by example, so don’t be shy!


About This Trial Version

This version of Overture is for demonstration purposes only. The limitations of this trial version are as follows:

•	Files cannot be saved

•	A watermark appears on all printed files

To purchase a full version of Overture, contact sales at (843) 832-2365 or by e-mail at sales@geniesoft.biz.


Introduction

Overture

Learning Overture

On-line Help

Overture Windows

Frequently Asked Questions

The following tutorials lead you through many of Overture’s features:

The Basics

Beyond the Basics


Overture

Overture is fun to learn and easy to use. You can write music and hear the results immediately.

Overture runs on almost any Windows 95/98/ME/2000 or XP computer. You can install and set it up in just a few minutes. Then you can create piano, band, orchestral, choral, and lead sheet notation and print your arrangements of up to sixty four instruments.

The Basics

Beyond the Basics

Frequently Asked Questions


Learning Overture

GenieSoft provides two tutorials for learning Overture:

The Basics contains step-by-step tutorials designed to introduce you to Overture’s basic features.

Beyond the Basics Gives you more advanced lessons on how to use Overture.

Work through the tutorials to get up and running quickly.

For quick answers to common questions, take a look at Overture's Frequently Asked Questions file.


On-line Help

To see on-line help about a particular topic:

The Help key. Press F1 to get context-sensitive help about highlighted commands, about active dialog boxes and their parts, and about active windows.

The Help button. Click the help button in any dialog box to get help about that dialog box.

The Help menu. Choose Help>Contents (the Contents command in the Help menu) to see the entire on-line help system. You can navigate it by contents, by topic, and by index.

The Basics

Beyond the Basics

Frequently Asked Questions


Overture Windows

Score Window. The score window displays a traditional music score. Use it to enter, view and modify your musical score.

Tool Bar. The tool bar’s buttons open all of Overture’s tool palettes. Use the tool bar to select tools for writing and modifying music in the score window.

Transport Window. Use the transport window to control MIDI recording and playback, and to select the MIDI thru instrument.

Tracks Window. Use the tracks window to work with tracks: to specify how many voices they have, and whether notes in each voice should automatically flip stems up or down when you enter them. You also determine which tracks play and which are silent, and which MIDI playback devices, programs, channels and transpositions belong to which tracks.

Graphic Window. Use the graphic window to edit the MIDI data in any track.

Chords Window. The chords window contains a list of possible chord suffixes and guitar frames, as well as root and bass names. Use the chords window to insert chord names and guitar frames into your score with the mouse.

Lyrics Window. Use the lyrics window to type or change lyrics and assign them to notes in the score.

Step Input Window. Use the step input window to build a score by recording notes, rests, rhythmic and slash notation, and chords, one step at a time.

The Basics

Beyond the Basics

Frequently Asked Questions


License Agreement
GENIESOFT, INC.

d/b/a GENIESOFT

LICENSE AGREEMENT

YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ ALL OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT. INSTALLING AND USING THE PRODUCT INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THEM, YOU SHOULD PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. In consideration of payment of the license fee, GenieSoft, Inc., d/b/a GenieSoft ("GenieSoft" or the "Licensor") grants to you, the Licensee, a nonexclusive license to have one person use the enclosed GenieSoft software product (the "Product") on one personal computer at a time. If you want to use the Product on more than one personal computer at a time, or if you want to network the Product, you must obtain separate licenses from GenieSoft by calling (843) 832-2365.  This license does not grant you any right to any enhancement or update to the Product.  Enhancements and updates, if available, may be obtained by you at GenieSoft’s then current standard pricing, terms and conditions.

2. OWNERSHIP OF THE PRODUCT. Portions of the Product incorporate certain material proprietary to third parties. GenieSoft and licensors of GenieSoft own and will retain all title, copyright, trademark and other proprietary rights in and to the Product. This License is NOT a sale of the Product or any copy of it. You, the Licensee, obtain only such rights as are provided in this Agreement. You understand and agree as follows:

2.1. You may NOT make any copies of all or any part of the Product except for archival copies of the computer software components of the Product as permitted by law,

2.2. You may NOT reverse compile, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, modify, incorporate in whole or in part in any other product or create derivative works based on all or any part of the Product.

2.3. You may NOT remove any copyright, trademark, proprietary rights, disclaimer or warning notice included on or embedded in any part of the Product.

2.4. You may NOT transfer the Product unless you permanently transfer the entire Product (including all components and archival copies, if any), and the person to whom the Product is transferred is informed of and agrees to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

2.5 You may not use the documentation for any purpose other than to support your use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT.

2.6 You may not perform engineering analyses of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, including performance analyses, or benchmark analyses, without the written permission of GenieSoft.

3. CONTENT RESTRICTIONS. Unless specified elsewhere in your product package, the following restrictions apply to all digitally recorded sounds, MIDI or GenieSoft-format song files or rhythm patterns, and printed or digitally reproduced sheet music contained in the product package (the “content”):

All content is protected by copyright and owned by GenieSoft or other parties that have licensed these works to GenieSoft.

Any duplication, adaptation, or arrangement of the content without written consent of the owner is an infringement of U.S. or foreign copyright law and subject to the penalties and liabilities provided therein.

You may not synchronize the content with any videotape or film, or print the content in the form of standard music notation, without the express written permission of the copyright owner.

The content may not be used for broadcast or transmission of any kind.

You may not resell or redistribute the content “as is” (i.e., stand alone) in any way, including for use in sampling or sample playback units, or in any sound library product, or in any radio or television broadcast, soundtrack, film or other commercial product in any media, whether the works remain in their original form or are reformatted, mixed, filtered, re-synthesized or otherwise edited.

4. LICENSEE'S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR SELECTION AND USE OF THE PRODUCT. GenieSoft hopes the Product will be useful to your business or personal endeavors. HOWEVER, GENEISOFT DOES NOT WARRANT THE OPERATION OF THE PRODUCT OR THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE PRODUCT. You, and not GenieSoft, are responsible for all uses of the Product.

5. WARRANTY.

5.1. Limited Warranty. Subject to the other provisions in Articles 4 and 5 of this Agreement, GenieSoft warrants to you, the original licensee, that the media on which the Product is recorded will be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of thirty (30) days from purchase, and that the Product will perform substantially in accordance with the user guide for a period of thirty (30) days from purchase. GenieSoft's sole responsibility under this warranty will be, at its option, (1) to use reasonable efforts to correct any defects that are reported to it within the foregoing warranty period or (2) to refund the full purchase price. GenieSoft does not warrant that the Product will be error free, nor that all program errors will be corrected. In addition, GenieSoft makes no warranties if the failure of the Product results from accident, abuse or misapplication.  Outside the United States, these remedies are not available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source.  All requests for warranty assistance shall be directed to GenieSoft at the following address:

GenieSoft
113 Sommett Dr
Summerville, SC 29483 U.S.A.
(843)832-2365

5.2. Limitations on Warranties. THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH IN THIS ARTICLE 4 IS THE ONLY WARRANTY GIVEN BY GENIESOFT WITH RESPECT TO THE ENTIRE PRODUCT; GENIESOFT MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR ARISING BY CUSTOM OR TRADE USAGE, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. GENIESOFT SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT NOR FOR ANY LIABILITY TO ANY OTHER PARTY ARISING OUT OF USE OF THE PRODUCT.

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.

6. LIMITATIONS ON REMEDIES. GenieSoft's liability in contract, tort or otherwise arising in connection with the Product shall not exceed the purchase price of the Product. IN NO EVENT SHALL GENIESOFT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, TORT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF BUSINESS) ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF GENIESOFT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

7. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. If you are a government agency, you acknowledge that the Product was developed at private expense and that the computer software component is provided to you subject to RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The rights of the government regarding its use, duplication, reproduction or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, and (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software -- Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19. Contractor is GenieSoft, Inc., d/b/a GenieSoft.

8. TERMINATION. This License Agreement will terminate immediately if you breach any of its terms. Upon termination, you will be required promptly to return to GenieSoft or to destroy all copies of the Product covered by this License Agreement.

9. MISCELLANEOUS.

9.1. Governing Law. The terms of this License shall be construed in accordance with the substantive laws of the United States and/or Commonwealth of Massachusetts, U.S.A.

9.2. No Waiver. The failure of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder or to take any action against the other party in the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver by that party as to subsequent enforcement of rights or subsequent actions in the event of future breaches.

9.3. Litigation Expenses. If any action is brought by either party to this Agreement against the other party regarding the subject matter hereof, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover, in addition to any other relief granted, reasonable attorneys' fees and litigation expenses.

9.4. Unenforceable Terms. Should any term of this License Agreement be declared void or unenforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction, such declaration shall have no effect on the remaining terms hereof.

YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT IT IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND GENIESOFT WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSALS, OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN YOU AND GENIESOFT RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.